Browse by Title : ALL

  • ALL
  • 36 Views of Mount Fuji
    Author(s): Davidson, Cathy N
    Abstract:

    In 1980 Cathy N. Davidson traveled to Japan to teach English at a leading all-women’s university. It was the first of many journeys and the beginning of a deep and abiding fascination. In this extraordinary book, Davidson depicts a series of intimate moments and small epiphanies that together make up a panoramic view of Japan. With wit, candor, and a lover’s keen eye, she tells captivating stories—from that of a Buddhist funeral laden with ritual to an exhilarating evening spent touring the “Floating World,” the sensual demimonde in which salaryman meets geisha and the normal rules are suspended. On a remote island inhabited by one of the last matriarchal societies in the world, a disconcertingly down-to-earth priestess leads her to the heart of a sacred grove. And she spends a few unforgettable weeks in a quasi-Victorian residence called the Practice House, where, until recently, Japanese women were taught American customs so that they would make proper wives for husbands who might be stationed abroad. In an afterword new to this edition, Davidson tells of a poignant trip back to Japan in 2005 to visit friends who had remade their lives after the Great Hanshin Earthquake of 1995, which had devastated the city of Kobe, as well as the small town where Davidson had lived and the university where she taught.

    36 Views of Mount Fuji not only transforms our image of Japan, it offers a stirring look at the very nature of culture and identity. Often funny, sometimes liltingly sad, it is as intimate and irresistible as a long-awaited letter from a good friend.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822388180
    Publication Date: 2006-10-04
    contrib-author: Cathy N Davidson
    copyright-year: 2006
    eisbn: 9780822388180
    illustrations-note: 17 illustrations
    isbn-cloth: 9780822338604
    isbn-paper: 9780822339137
    short-abstract:

    By turns candid, witty, and poignant, 36 Views of Mount Fuji is an American professor's much-praised memoir about her experiences of Japan and the Japanese.

    subtitle: On Finding Myself in Japan
  • A Body Worth Defending
    Author(s): Cohen, Ed
    Abstract:

    Biological immunity as we know it does not exist until the late nineteenth century. Nor does the premise that organisms defend themselves at the cellular or molecular levels. For nearly two thousand years “immunity,” a legal concept invented in ancient Rome, serves almost exclusively political and juridical ends. “Self-defense” also originates in a juridico-political context; it emerges in the mid-seventeenth century, during the English Civil War, when Thomas Hobbes defines it as the first “natural right.” In the 1880s and 1890s, biomedicine fuses these two political precepts into one, creating a new vital function, “immunity-as-defense.” In A Body Worth Defending, Ed Cohen reveals the unacknowledged political, economic, and philosophical assumptions about the human body that biomedicine incorporates when it recruits immunity to safeguard the vulnerable living organism.

    Inspired by Michel Foucault’s writings about biopolitics and biopower, Cohen traces the migration of immunity from politics and law into the domains of medicine and science. Offering a genealogy of the concept, he illuminates a complex of thinking about modern bodies that percolates through European political, legal, philosophical, economic, governmental, scientific, and medical discourses from the mid-seventeenth century through the twentieth. He shows that by the late nineteenth century, “the body” literally incarnates modern notions of personhood. In this lively cultural rumination, Cohen argues that by embracing the idea of immunity-as-defense so exclusively, biomedicine naturalizes the individual as the privileged focus for identifying and treating illness, thereby devaluing or obscuring approaches to healing situated within communities or collectives.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822391111
    Publication Date: 2009-09-25
    contrib-author: Ed Cohen
    copyright-year: 2009
    eisbn: 9780822391111
    isbn-cloth: 9780822345183
    isbn-paper: 9780822345350
    short-abstract:

    A science studies text that reveals the legal and political origins of the concept of immunity

    subtitle: Immunity, Biopolitics, and the Apotheosis of the Modern Body
  • A British Enterprise in Brazil
    Author(s): Eakin, Marshall C.
    Abstract:

    Marshall Eakin presents what may be the most detailed study ever written about the operations of a foreign business in Latin America and the first scholarly, book-length study of any foreign business enterprise in Brazil. Between 1830 and 1970 the British-owned St. John d’el Rey Mining Company, Ltd. constructed a diverse business conglomerate around Minas Gerais, South America’s largest gold mine, in Nova Lima. Until the 1950s the company was the largest industrial firm and the largest taxpayer in Brazil’s most populous state.

    Utilizing company and local archives, Eakin shows that the company was surprisingly ineffective in translating economic success into political influence in Brazil. The most impressive impact of the British operation was at the local level, transforming a small, agrarian community into a sizable industrial city. Virtually a company town, Nova Lima experienced a small-scale industrial revolution as the community made the transition from the largest industrial slave complex in Brazil to a working-class city torn by labor strife and violence between communists and their opponents.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822382331
    Publication Date: 1990-01-22
    contrib-author: Marshall C. Eakin
    copyright-year: 1989
    eisbn: 9780822382331
    isbn-cloth: 9780822309147
    subtitle: The St. John d’el Rey Mining Company and the Morro Velho Gold Mine, 1830–1960
  • A Century of Revolution
    Author(s): Grandin, Greg; Joseph, Gilbert M.; Rosenberg, Emily S.; Katz, Friedrich; Olcott, Jocelyn
    Abstract:

    Latin America experienced an epochal cycle of revolutionary upheavals and insurgencies during the twentieth century, from the Mexican Revolution of 1910 through the mobilizations and terror in Central America, the Southern Cone, and the Andes during the 1970s and 1980s. In his introduction to A Century of Revolution, Greg Grandin argues that the dynamics of political violence and terror in Latin America are so recognizable in their enforcement of domination, their generation and maintenance of social exclusion, and their propulsion of historical change, that historians have tended to take them for granted, leaving unexamined important questions regarding their form and meaning. The essays in this groundbreaking collection take up these questions, providing a sociologically and historically nuanced view of the ideological hardening and accelerated polarization that marked Latin America’s twentieth century. Attentive to the interplay among overlapping local, regional, national, and international fields of power, the contributors focus on the dialectical relations between revolutionary and counterrevolutionary processes and their unfolding in the context of U.S. hemispheric and global hegemony. Through their fine-grained analyses of events in Chile, Colombia, Cuba, El Salvador, Guatemala, Mexico, Nicaragua, and Peru, they suggest a framework for interpreting the experiential nature of political violence while also analyzing its historical causes and consequences. In so doing, they set a new agenda for the study of revolutionary change and political violence in twentieth-century Latin America.

    Contributors

    Michelle Chase

    Jeffrey L. Gould

    Greg Grandin

    Lillian Guerra

    Forrest Hylton

    Gilbert M. Joseph

    Friedrich Katz

    Thomas Miller Klubock

    Neil Larsen

    Arno J. Mayer

    Carlota McAllister

    Jocelyn Olcott

    Gerardo Rénique

    Corey Robin

    Peter Winn

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822392859
    Publication Date: 2010-09-30
    contrib-editor: Greg Grandin; Gilbert M. Joseph
    contrib-other: Friedrich Katz; Jocelyn Olcott
    contrib-series-editor: Emily S. Rosenberg
    copyright-year: 2010
    eisbn: 9780822392859
    illustrations-note: 17 illustrations, 1 map
    isbn-cloth: 9780822347200
    isbn-paper: 9780822347378
    series: American Encounters/Global Interactions
    short-abstract:

    A collection exploring the ideological hardening and accelerated polarization that marked twentieth-century Latin America and its epochal cycles of revolutionary and counterrevolutionary violence.

    subtitle: Insurgent and Counterinsurgent Violence during Latin America’s Long Cold War
  • A Certain Age
    Author(s): Mrázek, Rudolf
    Abstract:

    A Certain Age is an unconventional, evocative work of history and a moving reflection on memory, modernity, space, time, and the limitations of traditional historical narratives. Rudolf Mrázek visited Indonesia throughout the 1990s, recording lengthy interviews with elderly intellectuals in and around Jakarta. With few exceptions, they were part of an urban elite born under colonial rule and educated at Dutch schools. From the early twentieth century, through the late colonial era, the national revolution, and well into independence after 1945, these intellectuals injected their ideas of modernity, progress, and freedom into local and national discussion.

    When Mrázek began his interviews, he expected to discuss phenomena such as the transition from colonialism to postcolonialism. His interviewees, however, wanted to share more personal recollections. Mrázek illuminates their stories of the past with evocative depictions of their late-twentieth-century surroundings. He brings to bear insights from thinkers including Walter Benjamin, Bertold Brecht, Le Corbusier, and Marcel Proust, and from his youth in Prague, another metropolis with its own experience of passages and revolution. Architectural and spatial tropes organize the book. Thresholds, windowsills, and sidewalks come to seem more apt as descriptors of historical transitions than colonial and postcolonial, or modern and postmodern. Asphalt roads, homes, classrooms, fences, and windows organize movement, perceptions, and selves in relation to others. A Certain Age is a portal into questions about how the past informs the present and how historical accounts are inevitably partial and incomplete.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822392682
    Publication Date: 2009-01-01
    contrib-author: Rudolf Mrázek
    copyright-year: 2010
    eisbn: 9780822392682
    illustrations-note: 6 illustrations
    isbn-cloth: 9780822346852
    isbn-paper: 9780822346975
    series: a John Hope Franklin Center Book
    short-abstract:

    An unconventional, evocative work of history and a series of moving reflections on memory, modernity, space, and time, all based on the author s interviews with elderly Indonesian intellectuals.

    subtitle: Colonial Jakarta through the Memories of Its Intellectuals
  • A Coincidence of Desires
    Author(s): Boellstorff, Tom
    Abstract:

    In A Coincidence of Desires, Tom Boellstorff considers how interdisciplinary collaboration between anthropology and queer studies might enrich both fields. For more than a decade he has visited Indonesia, both as an anthropologist exploring gender and sexuality and as an activist involved in HIV prevention work. Drawing on these experiences, he provides several in-depth case studies, primarily concerning the lives of Indonesian men who term themselves gay (an Indonesian-language word that overlaps with, but does not correspond exactly to, the English word “gay”). These case studies put interdisciplinary research approaches into practice. They are preceded and followed by theoretical meditations on the most productive forms that collaborations between queer studies and anthropology might take. Boellstorff uses theories of time to ask how a model of “coincidence” might open up new possibilities for cooperation between the two disciplines. He also juxtaposes his own work with other scholars’ studies of Indonesia, Thailand, the Philippines, Malaysia, and Singapore to compare queer sexualities across Southeast Asia. In doing so, he asks how comparison might be understood as a queer project and how queerness might be understood as comparative.

    The case studies contained in A Coincidence of Desires speak to questions about the relation of sexualities to nationalism, religion, and globalization. They include an examination of zines published by gay Indonesians; an analysis of bahasa gay—a slang spoken by gay Indonesians that is increasingly appropriated in Indonesian popular culture; and an exploration of the place of warias (roughly, “male-to-female transvestites”) within Indonesian society. Boellstorff also considers the tension between Islam and sexuality in gay Indonesians’ lives and a series of incidents in which groups of men, identified with Islamic fundamentalism, violently attacked gatherings of gay men. Collectively, these studies insist on the primacy of empirical investigation to any queer studies project that wishes to speak to the specificities of lived experience.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822389538
    Publication Date: 2007-04-04
    contrib-author: Tom Boellstorff
    copyright-year: 2007
    eisbn: 9780822389538
    illustrations-note: 19 illustrations, 7 tables
    isbn-cloth: 9780822339748
    isbn-paper: 9780822339915
    series: e-Duke books scholarly collection.
    short-abstract:

    An anthropological examination of non-normative male sexuality outside of the "West," using Indonesia as a case study.

    subtitle: Anthropology, Queer Studies, Indonesia
  • A Colonial Lexicon
    Author(s): Hunt, Nancy Rose; Appadurai, Arjun; Comaroff, John L.; Farquhar, Judith
    Abstract:

    A Colonial Lexicon is the first historical investigation of how childbirth became medicalized in Africa. Rejecting the “colonial encounter” paradigm pervasive in current studies, Nancy Rose Hunt elegantly weaves together stories about autopsies and bicycles, obstetric surgery and male initiation, to reveal how concerns about strange new objects and procedures fashioned the hybrid social world of colonialism and its aftermath in Mobutu’s Zaire.

    Relying on archival research in England and Belgium, as well as fieldwork in the Congo, Hunt reconstructs an ethnographic history of a remote British Baptist mission struggling to survive under the successive regimes of King Leopold II’s Congo Free State, the hyper-hygienic, pronatalist Belgian Congo, and Mobutu’s Zaire. After exploring the roots of social reproduction in rituals of manhood, she shows how the arrival of the fast and modern ushered in novel productions of gender, seen equally in the forced labor of road construction and the medicalization of childbirth. Hunt focuses on a specifically interwar modernity, where the speed of airplanes and bicycles correlated with a new, mobile medicine aimed at curbing epidemics and enumerating colonial subjects. Fascinating stories about imperial masculinities, Christmas rituals, evangelical humor, colonial terror, and European cannibalism demonstrate that everyday life in the mission, on plantations, and under a strongly Catholic colonial state was never quite what it seemed. In a world where everyone was living in translation, privileged access to new objects and technologies allowed a class of “colonial middle figures”—particularly teachers, nurses, and midwives—to mediate the evolving hybridity of Congolese society. Successfully blurring conventional distinctions between precolonial, colonial, and postcolonial situations, Hunt moves on to discuss the unexpected presence of colonial fragments in the vibrant world of today’s postcolonial Africa.

    With its close attention to semiotics as well as sociology, A Colonial Lexiconwill interest specialists in anthropology, African history, obstetrics and gynecology, medical history, religion, and women’s and cultural studies.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822381365
    Publication Date: 1999-10-25
    contrib-author: Nancy Rose Hunt
    contrib-series-editor: Arjun Appadurai; John L. Comaroff; Judith Farquhar
    copyright-year: 1999
    eisbn: 9780822381365
    illustrations-note: 47 b&w photographs, 8 maps
    isbn-cloth: 9780822323310
    isbn-paper: 9780822323662
    series: Body, Commodity, Text
    short-abstract:

    Colonial relations in Zaire viewed through the attempts of missionaries to impose European midwifery and birthing practices.

    subtitle: Of Birth Ritual, Medicalization, and Mobility in the Congo
  • A Culture of Stone
    Author(s): Dean, Carolyn J
    Abstract:

    A major contribution to both art history and Latin American studies, A Culture of Stone offers sophisticated new insights into Inka culture and the interpretation of non-Western art. Carolyn Dean focuses on rock outcrops masterfully integrated into Inka architecture, exquisitely worked masonry, and freestanding sacred rocks, explaining how certain stones took on lives of their own and played a vital role in the unfolding of Inka history. Examining the multiple uses of stone, she argues that the Inka understood building in stone as a way of ordering the chaos of unordered nature, converting untamed spaces into domesticated places, and laying claim to new territories. Dean contends that understanding what the rocks signified requires seeing them as the Inka saw them: as potentially animate, sentient, and sacred. Through careful analysis of Inka stonework, colonial-period accounts of the Inka, and contemporary ethnographic and folkloric studies of indigenous Andean culture, Dean reconstructs the relationships between stonework and other aspects of Inka life, including imperial expansion, worship, and agriculture. She also scrutinizes meanings imposed on Inka stone by the colonial Spanish and, later, by tourism and the tourist industry. A Culture of Stone is a compelling multidisciplinary argument for rethinking how we see and comprehend the Inka past.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822393177
    Publication Date: 2010-09-30
    contrib-author: Carolyn J Dean
    copyright-year: 2010
    eisbn: 9780822393177
    illustrations-note: 53 b&w illustrations, 15 color plates
    isbn-cloth: 9780822347910
    isbn-paper: 9780822348078
    short-abstract:

    Argues that the imperial Inka understood stone as potentially animate, sentient, and sacred; building in stone was a way of ordering unordered nature, domesticating untamed spaces, and claiming new territories.

    subtitle: Inka Perspectives on Rock
  • A Date Which Will Live
    Author(s): Rosenberg, Emily S.; Joseph, Gilbert M.
    Abstract:

    December 7, 1941—the date of Japan’s surprise attack on the U.S. fleet at Pearl Harbor—is "a date which will live" in American history and memory, but the stories that will live and the meanings attributed to them are hardly settled. In movies, books, and magazines, at memorial sites and public ceremonies, and on television and the internet, Pearl Harbor lives in a thousand guises and symbolizes dozens of different historical lessons. In A Date Which Will Live, historian Emily S. Rosenberg examines the contested meanings of Pearl Harbor in American culture.

    Rosenberg considers the emergence of Pearl Harbor’s symbolic role within multiple contexts: as a day of infamy that highlighted the need for future U.S. military preparedness, as an attack that opened a "back door" to U.S. involvement in World War II, as an event of national commemoration, and as a central metaphor in American-Japanese relations. She explores the cultural background that contributed to Pearl Harbor’s resurgence in American memory after the fiftieth anniversary of the attack in 1991. In doing so, she discusses the recent “memory boom” in American culture; the movement to exonerate the military commanders at Pearl Harbor, Admiral Husband Kimmel and General Walter Short; the political mobilization of various groups during the culture and history "wars" of the 1990s, and the spectacle surrounding the movie Pearl Harbor. Rosenberg concludes with a look at the uses of Pearl Harbor as a historical frame for understanding the events of September 11, 2001.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822387459
    Publication Date: 2003-08-25
    contrib-author: Emily S. Rosenberg
    contrib-series-editor: Gilbert M. Joseph
    copyright-year: 2005
    eisbn: 9780822387459
    illustrations-note: 15 b&w photos
    isbn-cloth: 9780822332060
    isbn-paper: 9780822336372
    series: American Encounters/Global Interactions
    short-abstract:

    How Pearl Harbor has been written about, thought of, and manipulated in American culture.

    subtitle: Pearl Harbor in American Memory
  • A Decade of Negative Thinking
    Author(s): Schor, Mira
    Abstract:

    A Decade of Negative Thinking brings together writings on contemporary art and culture by the painter and feminist art theorist Mira Schor. Mixing theory and practice, the personal and the political, she tackles questions about the place of feminism in art and political discourse, the aesthetics and values of contemporary painting, and the influence of the market on the creation of art. Schor writes across disciplines and is committed to the fluid interrelationship between a formalist aesthetic, a literary sensibility, and a strongly political viewpoint. Her critical views are expressed with poetry and humor in the accessible language that has been her hallmark, and her perspective is informed by her dual practice as a painter and writer and by her experience as a teacher of art.

    In essays such as “The ism that dare not speak its name,” “Generation 2.5,” “Like a Veneer,” “Modest Painting,” “Blurring Richter,” and “Trite Tropes, Clichés, or the Persistence of Styles,” Schor considers how artists relate to and represent the past and how the art market influences their choices: whether or not to disavow a social movement, to explicitly compare their work to that of a canonical artist, or to take up an exhausted style. She places her writings in the rich transitory space between the near past and the “nextmodern.” Witty, brave, rigorous, and heartfelt, Schor’s essays are impassioned reflections on art, politics, and criticism.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822391418
    Publication Date: 2009-01-01
    contrib-author: Mira Schor
    copyright-year: 2009
    eisbn: 9780822391418
    illustrations-note: 53 illustrations
    isbn-cloth: 9780822345848
    isbn-paper: 9780822346029
    series: e-Duke books scholarly collection.
    short-abstract:

    Writings on the changing relationship between feminism and art production and criticism, and the impact of intergenerational struggle in the contemporary art world.

    subtitle: Essays on Art, Politics, and Daily Life
  • A Different Light
    Author(s): Nair, Parvati
    DOI: 10.1215/9780822394372
    Publication Date: 2011-12-14
    contrib-author: Parvati Nair
    copyright-year: 2012
    eisbn: 9780822394372
    illustrations-note: 21 photographs
    isbn-cloth: 9780822350316
    isbn-paper: 9780822350484
    subtitle: The Photography of Sebastião Salgado
  • A Discontented Diaspora
    Author(s): Lesser, Jeffrey
    Abstract:

    In A Discontented Diaspora, Jeffrey Lesser investigates broad questions of ethnicity, the nature of diasporic identity, and Brazilian culture. He does so by exploring particular experiences of young Japanese Brazilians who came of age in São Paulo during the 1960s and 1970s, an intensely authoritarian period of military rule. The most populous city in Brazil, São Paulo was also the world’s largest “Japanese” city outside of Japan by 1960. Believing that their own regional identity should be the national one, residents of São Paulo constantly discussed the relationship between Brazilianness and Japaneseness. As second-generation Nikkei (Brazilians of Japanese descent) moved from the agricultural countryside of their immigrant parents into various urban professions, they became the “best Brazilians” in terms of their ability to modernize the country and the “worst Brazilians” because they were believed to be the least likely to fulfill the cultural dream of whitening. Lesser analyzes how Nikkei both resisted and conformed to others’ perceptions of their identity as they struggled to define and claim their own ethnicity within São Paulo during the military dictatorship.

    Lesser draws on a wide range of sources, including films, oral histories, wanted posters, advertisements, newspapers, photographs, police reports, government records, and diplomatic correspondence. He focuses on two particular cultural arenas—erotic cinema and political militancy—which highlight the ways that Japanese Brazilians imagined themselves to be Brazilian. As he explains, young Nikkei were sure that their participation in these two realms would be recognized for its Brazilianness. They were mistaken. Whether joining banned political movements, training as guerrilla fighters, or acting in erotic films, the subjects of A Discontented Diaspora militantly asserted their Brazilianness only to find that doing so reinforced their minority status.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822390480
    Publication Date: 2007-08-24
    contrib-author: Jeffrey Lesser
    copyright-year: 2007
    eisbn: 9780822390480
    illustrations-note: 29 illus., 8 tables, 1 map
    isbn-cloth: 9780822340607
    isbn-paper: 9780822340812
    short-abstract:

    Analyzes the experiences of a generation of Japanese-Brazilians in Sao Paulo during the most authoritarian period of military rule in order to ask questions about ethnicity, the nature of diasporic identity, and Brazilian culture.

    subtitle: Japanese Brazilians and the Meanings of Ethnic Militancy, 1960–1980
  • A Feminist Reader in Early Cinema
    Author(s): Bean, Jennifer M.; Negra, Diane; Hastie, Amelie; Gaines, Jane M.
    Abstract:

    A Feminist Reader in Early Cinema marks a new era of feminist film scholarship. The twenty essays collected here demonstrate how feminist historiographies at once alter and enrich ongoing debates over visuality and identification, authorship, stardom, and nationalist ideologies in cinema and media studies. Drawing extensively on archival research, the collection yields startling accounts of women's multiple roles as early producers, directors, writers, stars, and viewers. It also engages urgent questions about cinema's capacity for presenting a stable visual field, often at the expense of racially, sexually, or class-marked bodies.

    While fostering new ways of thinking about film history, A Feminist Reader in Early Cinema illuminates the many questions that the concept of "early cinema" itself raises about the relation of gender to modernism, representation, and technologies of the body. The contributors bring a number of disciplinary frameworks to bear, including not only film studies but also postcolonial studies, dance scholarship, literary analysis, philosophies of the body, and theories regarding modernism and postmodernism.

    Reflecting the stimulating diversity of early cinematic styles, technologies, and narrative forms, essays address a range of topics—from the dangerous sexuality of the urban flâneuse to the childlike femininity exemplified by Mary Pickford, from the Shanghai film industry to Italian diva films—looking along the way at birth-control sensation films, French crime serials, "war actualities," and the stylistic influence of art deco. Recurring throughout the volume is the protean figure of the New Woman, alternately garbed as childish tomboy, athletic star, enigmatic vamp, languid diva, working girl, kinetic flapper, and primitive exotic.

    Contributors. Constance Balides, Jennifer M. Bean, Kristine Butler, Mary Ann Doane, Lucy Fischer, Jane Gaines, Amelie Hastie, Sumiko Higashi, Lori Landay, Anne Morey, Diane Negra, Catherine Russell, Siobhan B. Somerville, Shelley Stamp, Gaylyn Studlar, Angela Dalle Vacche, Radha Vatsal, Kristen Whissel, Patricia White, Zhang Zhen

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822383840
    Publication Date: 2002-10-31
    contrib-editor: Jennifer M. Bean; Diane Negra
    contrib-other: Amelie Hastie; Jane M. Gaines
    copyright-year: 2002
    eisbn: 9780822383840
    illustrations-note: 62 illus.
    isbn-cloth: 9780822330257
    isbn-paper: 9780822329992
    series: a Camera Obscura Book
    short-abstract:

    The first anthology in a rapidly expanding area of cinema studies.

    subtitle:
  • A Flock Divided
    Author(s): O'Hara, Matthew D.
    Abstract:

    Catholicism, as it developed in colonial Mexico, helped to create a broad and remarkably inclusive community of Christian subjects, while it also divided that community into countless smaller flocks. Taking this contradiction as a starting point, Matthew D. O’Hara describes how religious thought and practice shaped Mexico’s popular politics. As he shows, religion facilitated the emergence of new social categories and modes of belonging in which individuals—initially subjects of the Spanish crown, but later citizens and other residents of republican Mexico—found both significant opportunities for improving their place in society and major constraints on their ways of thinking and behaving.

    O’Hara focuses on interactions between church authorities and parishioners from the late-colonial era into the early-national period, first in Mexico City and later in the surrounding countryside. Paying particular attention to disputes regarding caste status, the category of “Indian,” and the ownership of property, he demonstrates that religious collectivities from neighborhood parishes to informal devotions served as complex but effective means of political organization for plebeians and peasants. At the same time, longstanding religious practices and ideas made colonial social identities linger into the decades following independence, well after republican leaders formally abolished the caste system that classified individuals according to racial and ethnic criteria. These institutional and cultural legacies would be profound, since they raised fundamental questions about political inclusion and exclusion precisely when Mexico was trying to envision and realize new forms of political community. The modes of belonging and organizing created by colonialism provided openings for popular mobilization, but they were always stalked by their origins as tools of hierarchy and marginalization.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822392491
    Publication Date: 2009-11-02
    contrib-author: Matthew D. O'Hara
    copyright-year: 2010
    eisbn: 9780822392491
    illustrations-note: 5 photos, 10 tables, 9 maps, 2 figures
    isbn-cloth: 9780822346272
    isbn-paper: 9780822346395
    short-abstract:

    A history examining the interactions between church authorities and Mexican parishioners—from the late-colonial era into the early-national period—shows how religious thought and practice shaped Mexico s popular politics.

    subtitle: Race, Religion, and Politics in Mexico, 1749–1857
  • A Foreign Policy in Transition
    Author(s): Adams, Jan S.
    Abstract:

    During his years of leadership in the Soviet Union, Mikhail Gorbachev initiated revolutionary changes in that country's foreign and domestic policies. A Foreign Policy in Transition charts the changing Soviet policies toward Central America and the Caribbean during the Gorbachev years, examines the effects of these policies on individual countries, and looks to the role that Russia and the other Soviet-successor states will play in this region in the 1990s.

    Jan S. Adams analyzes the factors shaping Gorbachev's foreign policy in Central America by surveying Soviet political views old and new, by describing Gorbachev's bold restructuring of the Soviet foreign policy establishment, and by assessing the implications of his policy of perestroika. A series of country studies demonstrates how changes in Soviet policies and domestic and economic circumstances contributed to significant shifts in the internal conditions and external relations of the Central American and Caribbean nations. Adams discusses in detail such topics as the reduction of Soviet military and economic aid to the region and pressures exerted by Moscow on client states to effect the settlement of regional conflicts by political rather than military means.

    The author concludes by speculating about which trends in foreign policy by Russia and other Soviet-successor states toward Central America and the Caribbean may persist in the post-Soviet period, discussing as the implications of these changes for future U.S. policy in the region.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822383017
    Publication Date: 1992-09-08
    contrib-author: Jan S. Adams
    copyright-year: 1992
    eisbn: 9780822383017
    isbn-cloth: 9780822312567
    isbn-paper: 9780822312932
    subtitle: Moscow’s Retreat from Central America and the Carribbean, 1985–1992
  • A Foreigner Carrying in the Crook of His Arm a Tiny Bomb
    Author(s): Kumar, Amitava
    Abstract:

    Part reportage and part protest, A Foreigner Carrying in the Crook of His Arm a Tiny Bomb is an inquiry into the cultural logic and global repercussions of the war on terror. At its center are two men convicted in U.S. courts on terrorism-related charges: Hemant Lakhani, a seventy-year-old tried for attempting to sell a fake missile to an FBI informant, and Shahawar Matin Siraj, baited by the New York Police Department into a conspiracy to bomb a subway. Lakhani and Siraj were caught through questionable sting operations involving paid informants; both men received lengthy jail sentences. Their convictions were celebrated as major victories in the war on terror. In Amitava Kumar’s riveting account of their cases, Lakhani and Siraj emerge as epic bunglers, and the U.S. government as the creator of terror suspects to prosecute. Kumar analyzed the trial transcripts and media coverage, and he interviewed Lakhani, Siraj, their families, and their lawyers. Juxtaposing such stories of entrapment in the United States with narratives from India, another site of multiple terror attacks and state crackdowns, Kumar explores the harrowing experiences of ordinary people entangled in the war on terror. He also considers the fierce critiques of post-9/11 surveillance and security regimes by soldiers and torture victims, as well as artists and writers, including Coco Fusco, Paul Shambroom, and Arundhati Roy.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822391357
    Publication Date: 2010-05-20
    contrib-author: Amitava Kumar
    copyright-year: 2010
    eisbn: 9780822391357
    illustrations-note: 13 photographs
    isbn-cloth: 9780822345626
    isbn-paper: 9780822345787
    short-abstract:

    Part reportage and part protest, an inquiry into the cultural logic and global repercussions of the war on terror, with particular focus on the United States and India.

    subtitle:
  • A Forgetful Nation
    Author(s): Behdad, Ali
    Abstract:

    In A Forgetful Nation, the renowned postcolonialism scholar Ali Behdad turns his attention to the United States. Offering a timely critique of immigration and nationalism, Behdad takes on an idea central to American national mythology: that the United States is “a nation of immigrants,” welcoming and generous to foreigners. He argues that Americans’ treatment of immigrants and foreigners has long fluctuated between hospitality and hostility, and that this deep-seated ambivalence is fundamental to the construction of national identity. Building on the insights of Freud, Nietzsche, Foucault, and Derrida, he develops a theory of the historical amnesia that enables the United States to disavow a past and present built on the exclusion of others.

    Behdad shows how political, cultural, and legal texts have articulated American anxiety about immigration from the Federalist period to the present day. He reads texts both well-known—J. Hector St. John de Crèvecoeur’s Letters from an American Farmer, Alexis de Tocqueville’s Democracy in America, and Walt Whitman’s Leaves of Grass—and lesser-known—such as the writings of nineteenth-century nativists and of public health officials at Ellis Island. In the process, he highlights what is obscured by narratives and texts celebrating the United States as an open-armed haven for everyone: the country’s violent beginnings, including its conquest of Native Americans, brutal exploitation of enslaved Africans, and colonialist annexation of French and Mexican territories; a recurring and fierce strand of nativism; the need for a docile labor force; and the harsh discipline meted out to immigrant “aliens” today, particularly along the Mexican border.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822387039
    Publication Date: 2005-06-27
    contrib-author: Ali Behdad
    copyright-year: 2005
    eisbn: 9780822387039
    isbn-cloth: 9780822336068
    isbn-paper: 9780822336198
    short-abstract:

    The cultural workings of immigration and exclusion in U.S. history.

    subtitle: On Immigration and Cultural Identity in the United States
  • A Jewish Family in Germany Today
    Author(s): Bodemann, Y. Michal
    Abstract:

    Immediately after the Holocaust, it seemed inconceivable that a Jewish community would rebuild in Germany. What was once unimaginable has now come to pass: Germany is home to one of Europe’s most vibrant Jewish communities, and it has the fastest growing Jewish immigrant population of any country in the world outside Israel. By sharing the life stories of members of one Jewish family—the Kalmans—Y. Michal Bodemann provides an intimate look at what it is like to live as a Jew in Germany today. Having survived concentration camps in Poland, four Kalman siblings—three brothers and a sister—were left stranded in Germany after the war. They built new lives and a major enterprise; they each married and had children. Over the past fifteen years Bodemann conducted extensive interviews with the Kalmans, mostly with the survivors’ ten children, who were born between 1948 and 1964. In these oral histories, he shares their thoughts on Judaism, work, family, and community. Staying in Germany is not a given; four of the ten cousins live in Israel and the United States.

    Among the Kalman cousins are an art gallery owner, a body builder, a radio personality, a former chief financial officer of a prominent U.S. bank, and a sculptor. They discuss Zionism, anti-Semitism, what it means to root for the German soccer team, Schindler’s List, money, success, marriage and intermarriage, and family history. They reveal their different levels of engagement with Judaism and involvement with local Jewish communities. Kalman is a pseudonym, and their anonymity allows the family members to talk with passion and candor about their relationships and their lives as Jews.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822385929
    Publication Date: 2004-11-12
    contrib-author: Y. Michal Bodemann
    copyright-year: 2005
    eisbn: 9780822385929
    illustrations-note: 1 figure
    isbn-cloth: 9780822334101
    isbn-paper: 9780822334217
    short-abstract:

    Shares the life experiences of the children of 4 siblings who out of eight siblings, parents and grandparents, survived the Holocaust. It explores the ways in which these children from the same socio-cultural background have built diverse lives in German

    subtitle: An Intimate Portrait
  • A Language of Song
    Author(s): Charters, Samuel
    Abstract:

    In A Language of Song, Samuel Charters—one of the pioneering collectors of African American music—writes of a trip to West Africa where he found “a gathering of cultures and a continuing history that lay behind the flood of musical expression [he] encountered everywhere . . . from Brazil to Cuba, to Trinidad, to New Orleans, to the Bahamas, to dance halls of west Louisiana and the great churches of Harlem.” In this book, Charters takes readers along to those and other places, including Jamaica and the Georgia Sea Islands, as he recounts experiences from a half-century spent following, documenting, recording, and writing about the Africa-influenced music of the United States, Brazil, and the Caribbean.

    Each of the book’s fourteen chapters is a vivid rendering of a particular location that Charters visited. While music is always his focus, the book is filled with details about individuals, history, landscape, and culture. In first-person narratives, Charters relates voyages including a trip to the St. Louis home of the legendary ragtime composer Scott Joplin and the journey to West Africa, where he met a man who performed an hours-long song about the Europeans’ first colonial conquests in Gambia. Throughout the book, Charters traces the persistence of African musical culture despite slavery, as well as the influence of slaves’ songs on subsequent musical forms. In evocative prose, he relates a lifetime of travel and research, listening to brass bands in New Orleans; investigating the emergence of reggae, ska, and rock-steady music in Jamaica’s dancehalls; and exploring the history of Afro-Cuban music through the life of the jazz musician Bebo Valdés. A Language of Song is a unique expedition led by one of music’s most observant and well-traveled explorers.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822392071
    Publication Date: 2009-04-15
    contrib-author: Samuel Charters
    copyright-year: 2009
    eisbn: 9780822392071
    illustrations-note: 59 photographs
    isbn-cloth: 9780822343585
    isbn-paper: 9780822343806
    short-abstract:

    Samuel Charters recounts experiences from a half-century spent following, documenting, recording, and writing about the Africa-influenced music of the United States, Brazil, and the Caribbean.

    subtitle: Journeys in the Musical World of the African Diaspora
  • A Master on the Periphery of Capitalism
    Author(s): Schwarz, Roberto; Gledson, John; Fish, Stanley; Jameson, Fredric
    Abstract:

    A Master on the Periphery of Capitalism is a translation (from the original Portuguese) of Roberto Schwarz’s renowned study of the work of Brazilian novelist Machado de Assis (1839–1908). A leading Brazilian theorist and author of the highly influential notion of “misplaced ideas,” Schwarz focuses his literary and cultural analysis on Machado’s The Posthumous Memoirs of Brás Cubas, which was published in 1880. Writing in the Marxist tradition, Schwarz investigates in particular how social structure gets internalized as literary form, arguing that Machado’s style replicates and reveals the deeply embedded class divisions of nineteenth-century Brazil.

    Widely acknowledged as the most important novelist to have written in Latin America before 1940, Machado had a surprisingly modern style. Schwarz notes that the unprecedented wit, sarcasm, structural inventiveness, and mercurial changes of tone and subject matter found in The Posthumous Memoirs of Brás Cubas marked a crucial moment in the history of Latin American literature. He argues that Machado’s vanguard narrative reflects the Brazilian owner class and its peculiar status in both national and international contexts, and shows why this novel’s success was no accident. The author was able to confront some of the most prestigious ideologies of the nineteenth century with some uncomfortable truths, not the least of which was that slavery remained the basis of the Brazilian economy.

    A Master on the Periphery of Capitalism will appeal to those with interests in Latin American literature, nineteenth century history, and Marxist literary theory.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822380801
    Publication Date: 2001-11-21
    contrib-author: Roberto Schwarz
    contrib-other: John Gledson
    contrib-series-editor: Stanley Fish; Fredric Jameson
    copyright-year: 2001
    eisbn: 9780822380801
    isbn-cloth: 9780822322108
    isbn-paper: 9780822322399
    series: Latin America in Translation
    short-abstract:

    A translation of Schwarz's study of the work of Brazilian novelist Machado de Assis (1839-1908).

    subtitle: Machado de Assis
  • A Matter of Rats
    Author(s): Kumar, Amitava
    Abstract:

    It is not only the past that lies in ruins in Patna, it is also the present. But that is not the only truth about the city that Amitava Kumar explores in this vivid, entertaining account of his hometown. We accompany him through many Patnas, the myriad cities locked within the city—the shabby reality of the present-day capital of Bihar; Pataliputra, the storied city of emperors; the dreamlike embodiment of the city in the minds and hearts of those who have escaped contemporary Patna's confines. Full of fascinating observations and impressions, A Matter of Rats reveals a challenging and enduring city that exerts a lasting pull on all those who drift into its orbit.

    Kumar's ruminations on one of the world's oldest cities, the capital of India's poorest province, are also a meditation on how to write about place. His memory is partial. All he has going for him is his attentiveness. He carefully observes everything that surrounds him in Patna: rats and poets, artists and politicians, a girl's picture in a historian's study, and a sheet of paper on his mother's desk. The result is this unique book, as cutting as it is honest.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822376453
    Publication Date: 2014-03-10
    contrib-author: Amitava Kumar
    copyright-year: 2014
    eisbn: 9780822376453
    isbn-cloth: 9780822357049
    short-abstract:

    Part memoir, part travelogue, A Matter of Rats is the acclaimed writer Amitava Kumar's account of Patna, one of the world's oldest cities, the capital of India's poorest province, and the author and Vassar professor's home town.

    subtitle: A Short Biography of Patna
  • A Mother’s Cry
    Author(s): Sattamini, Lina; Green, James; Nielson, Rex P.; Arruda, Marcos P. S.
    Abstract:

    During the late 1960s and early 1970s, Brazil’s dictatorship arrested, tortured, and interrogated many people it suspected of subversion; hundreds of those arrested were killed in prison. In May 1970, Marcos P. S. Arruda, a young political activist, was seized in São Paulo, imprisoned, and tortured. A Mother’s Cry is the harrowing story of Marcos’s incarceration and his family’s efforts to locate him and obtain his release. Marcos’s mother, Lina Penna Sattamini, was living in the United States and working for the U.S. State Department when her son was captured. After learning of his arrest, she and her family mobilized every resource and contact to discover where he was being held, and then they launched an equally intense effort to have him released. Marcos was freed from prison in 1971. Fearing that he would be arrested and tortured again, he left the country, beginning eight years of exile.

    Lina Penna Sattamini describes her son’s tribulations through letters exchanged among family members, including Marcos, during the year that he was imprisoned. Her narrative is enhanced by Marcos’s account of his arrest, imprisonment, and torture. James N. Green’s introduction provides an overview of the political situation in Brazil, and Latin America more broadly, during that tumultuous era. In the 1990s, some Brazilians began to suggest that it would be best to forget the trauma of that era and move on. Lina Penna Sattamini wrote her memoir as a protest against historical amnesia. First published in Brazil in 2000, A Mother’s Cry is testimonial literature at its best. It conveys the experiences of a family united by love and determination during years of political repression.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822392842
    Publication Date: 2010-05-19
    contrib-author: Lina Sattamini
    contrib-editor: James Green
    contrib-other: Marcos P. S. Arruda
    contrib-translator: Rex P. Nielson
    copyright-year: 2010
    eisbn: 9780822392842
    illustrations-note: frontispiece
    isbn-cloth: 9780822347187
    isbn-paper: 9780822347361
    short-abstract:

    A memoir recounting a family s efforts to locate and free a young Brazilian activist arrested, imprisoned, and tortured by the military dictatorship.

    subtitle: A Memoir of Politics, Prison, and Torture under the Brazilian Military Dictatorship
  • A Narrative of Events, since the First of August, 1834, by James Williams, an Apprenticed Labourer in Jamaica
    Author(s): Williams, James; Paton, Diana; Mignolo, Walter D.; Silverblatt, Irene; Saldívar-Hull, Sonia
    Abstract:

    This book brings back into print, for the first time since the 1830s, a text that was central to the transatlantic campaign to fully abolish slavery in Britain’s colonies. James Williams, an eighteen-year-old Jamaican “apprentice” (former slave), came to Britain in 1837 at the instigation of the abolitionist Joseph Sturge. The Narrative he produced there, one of very few autobiographical texts by Caribbean slaves or former slaves, became one of the most powerful abolitionist tools for effecting the immediate end to the system of apprenticeship that had replaced slavery.

    Describing the hard working conditions on plantations and the harsh treatment of apprentices unjustly incarcerated, Williams argues that apprenticeship actually worsened the conditions of Jamaican ex-slaves: former owners, no longer legally permitted to directly punish their workers, used the Jamaican legal system as a punitive lever against them. Williams’s story documents the collaboration of local magistrates in this practice, wherein apprentices were routinely jailed and beaten for both real and imaginary infractions of the apprenticeship regulations.

    In addition to the complete text of Williams’s original Narrative, this fully annotated edition includes nineteenth-century responses to the controversy from the British and Jamaican press, as well as extensive testimony from the Commission of Enquiry that heard evidence regarding the Narrative’s claims. These fascinating and revealing documents constitute the largest extant body of direct testimony by Caribbean slaves or apprentices.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822383208
    Publication Date: 2001-07-02
    contrib-author: James Williams
    contrib-editor: Diana Paton
    contrib-series-editor: Walter D. Mignolo; Irene Silverblatt; Sonia Saldívar-Hull
    copyright-year: 2001
    eisbn: 9780822383208
    illustrations-note: 5 b&w photos, 2 maps, 7 figures
    isbn-cloth: 9780822326588
    isbn-paper: 9780822326472
    series: a John Hope Franklin Center Book
    short-abstract:

    Scholarly edition of a slave narrative that tells of life as an "apprentice" under the British gradual emancipation plan.

    subtitle:
  • A Nation of Realtors®
    Author(s): Hornstein, Jeffrey M.; Walkowitz, Daniel J.
    Abstract:

    How is it that in the twentieth century virtually all Americans came to think of themselves as “middle class”? In this cultural history of real estate brokerage, Jeffrey M. Hornstein argues that the rise of the Realtors as dealers in both domestic space and the ideology of home ownership provides tremendous insight into this critical question. At the dawn of the twentieth century, a group of prominent real estate brokers attempted to transform their occupation into a profession. Drawing on traditional notions of the learned professions, they developed a new identity—the professional entrepreneur—and a brand name, “Realtor.” The Realtors worked doggedly to make home ownership a central element of what became known as the “American dream.” Hornstein analyzes the internal evolution of the occupation, particularly the gender dynamics culminating in the rise of women brokers to predominance after the Second World War. At the same time, he examines the ways organized real estate brokers influenced American housing policy throughout the century.

    Hornstein draws on trade journals, government documents on housing policy, material from the archives of the National Association of Realtors and local real estate boards, demographic data, and fictional accounts of real estate agents. He chronicles the early efforts of real estate brokers to establish their profession by creating local and national boards, business practices, ethical codes, and educational programs and by working to influence laws from local zoning ordinances to national housing policy. A rich and original work of American history, A Nation of Realtors® illuminates class, gender, and business through a look at the development of a profession and its enormously successful effort to make the owner-occupied, single-family home a key element of twentieth-century American identity.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822386605
    Publication Date: 2005-04-20
    contrib-author: Jeffrey M. Hornstein
    contrib-series-editor: Daniel J. Walkowitz
    copyright-year: 2005
    eisbn: 9780822386605
    illustrations-note: 3 illustrations, 5 tables
    isbn-cloth: 9780822335283
    isbn-paper: 9780822335405
    series: Radical Perspectives
    short-abstract:

    A history of the real estate profession that rethinks the impact of gender and class tensions in twentieth-century America.

    subtitle: A Cultural History of the Twentieth-Century American Middle Class
  • A Nation Rising
    Author(s): Goodyear-Ka’opua, Noelani; Hussey, Ikaika; Kahunawaika’ala Wright, Erin Kahunawaika'ala
    Abstract:

    A Nation Rising chronicles the political struggles and grassroots initiatives collectively known as the Hawaiian sovereignty movement. Scholars, community organizers, journalists, and filmmakers contribute essays that explore Native Hawaiian resistance and resurgence from the 1970s to the early 2010s. Photographs and vignettes about particular activists further bring Hawaiian social movements to life. The stories and analyses of efforts to protect land and natural resources, resist community dispossession, and advance claims for sovereignty and self-determination reveal the diverse objectives and strategies, as well as the inevitable tensions, of the broad-tent sovereignty movement. The collection explores the Hawaiian political ethic of ea, which both includes and exceeds dominant notions of state-based sovereignty. A Nation Rising raises issues that resonate far beyond the Hawaiian archipelago, issues such as Indigenous cultural revitalization, environmental justice, and demilitarization.

    Contributors. Noa Emmett Aluli, Ibrahim G. Aoudé, Kekuni Blaisdell, Joan Conrow, Noelani Goodyear-Ka'opua, Edward W. Greevy, Ulla Hasager, Pauahi Ho'okano, Micky Huihui, Ikaika Hussey, Manu Ka‘iama, Le‘a Malia Kanehe, J. Kehaulani Kauanui, Anne Keala Kelly, Jacqueline Lasky, Davianna Pomaika'i McGregor, Nalani Minton, Kalamaoka'aina Niheu, Katrina-Ann R. Kapa'anaokalaokeola Nakoa Oliveira, Jonathan Kamakawiwo'ole Osorio, Leon No'eau Peralto, Kekailoa Perry, Puhipau, Noenoe K. Silva, D. Kapua‘ala Sproat, Ty P. Kawika Tengan, Mehana Blaich Vaughan, Kuhio Vogeler, Erin Kahunawaika’ala Wright

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822376552
    Publication Date: 2014-08-27
    contrib-editor: Noelani Goodyear-Ka’opua; Ikaika Hussey; Erin Kahunawaika'ala Kahunawaika’ala Wright
    copyright-year: 2014
    eisbn: 9780822376552
    illustrations-note: 83 photographs
    isbn-cloth: 9780822356837
    isbn-paper: 9780822356950
    series: Narrating Native Histories
    short-abstract:

    A Nation Rising chronicles the political struggles and grassroots initiatives collectively known as the Hawaiian sovereignty movement, raising issues that resonate far beyond the Hawaiian archipelago, issues such as Indigenous cultural revitalization, environmental justice, and demilitarization.

    subtitle: Hawaiian Movements for Life, Land, and Sovereignty
  • A New Criminal Type in Jakarta
    Author(s): Siegel, James T.
    Abstract:

    In A New Criminal Type in Jakarta, James T. Siegel studies the dependence of Indonesia’s post-1965 government on the ubiquitous presence of what he calls criminality, an ensemble of imagined forces within its society that is poised to tear it apart. Siegel, a foremost authority on Indonesia, interprets Suharto’s New Order—in powerful contrast to Sukarno’s Old Order—and shows a cultural and political life in Jakarta controlled by a repressive regime that has created new ideas among its population about crime, ghosts, fear, and national identity.

    Examining the links between the concept of criminality and scandal, rumor, fear, and the state, Siegel analyzes daily life in Jakarta through the seemingly disparate but strongly connected elements of family life, gossip, and sensationalist journalism. He offers close analysis of the preoccupation with crime in Pos Kota (a newspaper directed toward the lower classes) and the middle-class magazine Tempo. Because criminal activity has been a sensationalized preoccupation in Jakarta’s news venues and among its people, criminality, according to Siegel, has pervaded the identities of its ordinary citizens. Siegel examines how and why the government, fearing revolution and in an attempt to assert power, has made criminality itself a disturbing rationalization for the spectacular massacre of the people it calls criminals—many of whom were never accused of particular crimes. A New Criminal Type in Jakarta reveals that Indonesians—once united by Sukarno’s revolutionary proclamations in the name of “the people”—are now, lacking any other unifying element, united through their identification with the criminal and through a “nationalization of death” that has emerged with Suharto’s strong counter-revolutionary measures.

    A provocative introduction to contemporary Indonesia, this book will engage those interested in Southeast Asian studies, anthropology, history, political science, postcolonial studies, public culture, and cultural studies generally.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822382515
    Publication Date: 1998-07-27
    contrib-author: James T. Siegel
    copyright-year: 1998
    eisbn: 9780822382515
    isbn-cloth: 9780822322122
    isbn-paper: 9780822322412
    short-abstract:

    The politics of New Order Jakarta and the regime’s dependence on the continued prosecution of somewhat phantasmic internal enemies.

    subtitle: Counter-Revolution Today
  • A New Deal for All?
    Author(s): Skotnes, Andor
    Abstract:

    In A New Deal for All? Andor Skotnes examines the interrelationships between the Black freedom movement and the workers' movement in Baltimore and Maryland during the Great Depression and the early years of the Second World War. Adding to the growing body of scholarship on the long civil rights struggle, he argues that such "border state" movements helped resuscitate and transform the national freedom and labor struggles. In the wake of the Great Crash of 1929, the freedom and workers' movements had to rebuild themselves, often in new forms. In the early 1930s, deepening commitments to antiracism led Communists and Socialists in Baltimore to launch racially integrated initiatives for workers' rights, the unemployed, and social justice. An organization of radicalized African American youth, the City-Wide Young People's Forum, emerged in the Black community and became involved in mass educational, anti-lynching, and Buy Where You Can Work campaigns, often in multiracial alliances with other progressives. During the later 1930s, the movements of Baltimore merged into new and renewed national organizations, especially the CIO and the NAACP, and built mass regional struggles. While this collaboration declined after the war, Skotnes shows that the earlier cooperative efforts greatly shaped national freedom campaigns to come—including the civil rights movement.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822395843
    Publication Date: 2012-11-30
    contrib-author: Andor Skotnes
    copyright-year: 2012
    eisbn: 9780822395843
    illustrations-note: 40 photographs
    isbn-cloth: 9780822353478
    isbn-paper: 9780822353591
    series: Radical perspectives
    short-abstract:

    In A New Deal for All? Andor Skotnes examines the interrelationships between the Black freedom movement and the workers' movement in Baltimore and Maryland during the Great Depression and the early years of the Second World War. Adding to the growing body of scholarship on the long civil rights struggle, he argues that such "border state" movements helped resuscitate and transform the national freedom and labor struggles.

    subtitle: Race and Class Struggles in Depression-Era Baltimore
  • A New Type of Womanhood
    Author(s): Kraus, Natasha Kirsten; Kraus, Natasha Kirsten
    Abstract:

    In A New Type of Womanhood, Natasha Kirsten Kraus retells the history of the 1850s woman’s rights movement. She traces how the movement changed society’s very conception of “womanhood” in its successful bid for economic rights and rights of contract for married women. Kraus demonstrates that this discursive change was a necessary condition of possibility for U.S. women to be popularly conceived as civil subjects within a Western democracy, and she shows that many rights, including suffrage, followed from the basic right to form legal contracts. She analyzes this new conception of women as legitimate economic actors in relation to antebellum economic and demographic changes as well as changes in the legal structure and social meanings of contract.

    Enabling Kraus’s retelling of the 1850s woman’s rights movement is her theory of “structural aporias,” which takes the institutional structures of any particular society as fully imbricated with the force of language. Kraus reads the antebellum relations of womanhood, contract, property, the economy, and the nation as a fruitful site for analysis of the interconnected power of language, culture, and the law. She combines poststructural theory, particularly deconstructive approaches to discourse analysis; the political economic history of the antebellum era; and the interpretation of archival documents, including woman’s rights speeches, petitions, pamphlets, and convention proceedings, as well as state legislative debates, reports, and constitutional convention proceedings. Arguing that her method provides critical insight not only into social movements and cultural changes of the past but also of the present and future, Kraus concludes A New Type of Womanhood by considering the implications of her theory for contemporary feminist and queer politics.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822390046
    Publication Date: 2008-07-28
    contrib-author: Natasha Kirsten Kraus; Natasha Kirsten Kraus
    copyright-year: 2008
    eisbn: 9780822390046
    illustrations-note: 10 tables
    isbn-cloth: 9780822343332
    isbn-paper: 9780822343684
    short-abstract:

    Sociological analysis of the ideology and the reality of True Womanhood as manifest in 19th century NY state culture and politics, as well as those feminist protests and legislative-/market-developments which revised this contradiction.

    subtitle: Discursive Politics and Social Change in Antebellum America
  • A Not So Foreign Affair
    Author(s): Slane, Andrea
    Abstract:

    In A Not So Foreign Affair Andrea Slane investigates the influence of images of Nazism on debates about sexuality that are central to contemporary American political rhetoric. By analyzing an array of films, journalism, scholarly theories, melodrama, video, and propaganda literature, Slane describes a common rhetoric that emerged during the 1930s and 1940s as a means of distinguishing “democratic sexuality” from that ascribed to Nazi Germany.

    World War II marked a turning point in the cultural rhetoric of democracy, Slane claims, because it intensified a preoccupation with the political role of private life and pushed sexuality to the center of democratic discourse. Having created tremendous anxiety—and fascination—in American culture, Nazism became associated with promiscuity, sexual perversionand the destruction of the family. Slane reveals how this particular imprint of fascism is used in progressive as well as conservative imagery and language to further their domestic agendas and shows how our cultural engagement with Nazism reflects the inherent tension in democracy between the value of diversity, individual freedoms national identity, and notions of the common good. Finally, she applies her analysis of wartime narratives to contemporary texts, examining anti-abortion, anti-gay, and anti-federal rhetoric, as well as the psychic life of skinheads, censorship debates, and the contemporary fascination with incest.

    An invaluable resource for understanding the language we use—both visual and narrative—to describe and debate democracy in the United States today, A Not So Foreign Affair will appeal to those interested in cultural studies, film and video studies, American studies, twentieth century history, German studies, rhetoric, and sexuality studies.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822380849
    Publication Date: 2001-05-01
    contrib-author: Andrea Slane
    copyright-year: 2001
    eisbn: 9780822380849
    illustrations-note: 21 b&w photographs
    isbn-cloth: 9780822326847
    isbn-paper: 9780822326939
    short-abstract:

    An examination of how the aesthetics of Nazi Germany have been deployed to help define the place of sexuality in U.S. political and popular culture.

    subtitle: Fascism, Sexuality, and the Cultural Rhetoric of American Democracy
  • A Place in Politics
    Author(s): Woodard, James
    Abstract:

    A Place in Politics is a thorough reinterpretation of the politics and political culture of the Brazilian state of São Paulo between the 1890s and the 1930s. The world’s foremost coffee-producing region from the outset of this period and home to more than six million people by 1930, São Paulo was an economic and demographic giant. In an era marked by political conflict and dramatic social and cultural change in Brazil, nowhere were the conflicts as intense or changes more dramatic than in São Paulo. The southeastern state was the site of the country’s most important political developments, from the contested presidential campaign of 1909–10 to the massive military revolt of 1924. Drawing on a wide array of source materials, James P. Woodard analyzes these events and the republican political culture that informed them.

    Woodard’s fine-grained political history proceeds chronologically from the final years of the nineteenth century, when São Paulo’s leaders enjoyed political preeminence within the federal system codified by the Constitution of 1891, through the mass mobilization of 1931–32, in which São Paulo’s people marched, rioted, and eventually took up arms against the national government in what was to be Brazil’s last great regionalist revolt. In taking to the streets in the name of their state, constitutionalism, and the “civilization” that they identified with both, the people of São Paulo were at once expressing their allegiance to elements of a regionally distinct political culture and converging on a broader, more participatory public sphere that had arisen amid the political conflicts of the preceding decades.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822389453
    Publication Date: 2009-03-25
    contrib-author: James Woodard
    copyright-year: 2009
    eisbn: 9780822389453
    illustrations-note: 4 maps
    isbn-cloth: 9780822343462
    isbn-paper: 9780822343295
    short-abstract:

    An analysis of the emergence of a distinct political culture in the state of São Paulo, Brazil, during the first three decades of the twentieth century.

    subtitle: São Paulo, Brazil, from Seigneurial Republicanism to Regionalist Revolt
  • A Primer for Teaching World History
    Author(s): Burton, Antoinette
    Abstract:

    A Primer for Teaching World History is a guide for college and high school teachers who are designing an introductory-level world history syllabus for the first time, for those who already teach world history and are seeking new ideas or approaches, and for those who train future teachers to prepare any history course with a global or transnational focus. Drawing on her own classroom practices, as well as her career as a historian, Antoinette Burton offers a set of principles to help instructors think about how to design their courses with specific goals in mind, whatever those may be. She encourages teachers to envision the world history syllabus as having an architecture: a fundamental, underlying structure or interpretive focus that runs throughout the course, shaping students' experiences, offering pathways in and out of "the global," and reflecting the teacher's convictions about the world and the work of history.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822395089
    Publication Date: 2011-12-20
    contrib-author: Antoinette Burton
    copyright-year: 2012
    eisbn: 9780822395089
    isbn-cloth: 9780822351740
    isbn-paper: 9780822351887
    short-abstract:

    This book offers principles to consider when creating a world history syllabus; it prompts a teacher, rather than aiming for full world coverage, to pick an interpretive focus and thread it through the course. It will be used by university faculty, graduate students, and high school teachers who are teaching world history for the first time or want to rethink their approach to teaching the subject.

    subtitle: Ten Design Principles
  • A Revolution for Our Rights
    Author(s): Gotkowitz, Laura
    Abstract:

    A Revolution for Our Rights is a critical reassessment of the causes and significance of the Bolivian Revolution of 1952. Historians have tended to view the revolution as the result of class-based movements that accompanied the rise of peasant leagues, mineworker unions, and reformist political projects in the 1930s. Laura Gotkowitz argues that the revolution had deeper roots in the indigenous struggles for land and justice that swept through Bolivia during the first half of the twentieth century. Challenging conventional wisdom, she demonstrates that rural indigenous activists fundamentally reshaped the military populist projects of the 1930s and 1940s. In so doing, she chronicles a hidden rural revolution—before the revolution of 1952—that fused appeals for equality with demands for a radical reconfiguration of political power, landholding, and rights.

    Gotkowitz combines an emphasis on national political debates and congresses with a sharply focused analysis of Indian communities and large estates in the department of Cochabamba. The fragmented nature of Cochabamba’s Indian communities and the pioneering significance of its peasant unions make it a propitious vantage point for exploring contests over competing visions of the nation, justice, and rights. Scrutinizing state authorities’ efforts to impose the law in what was considered a lawless countryside, Gotkowitz shows how, time and again, indigenous activists shrewdly exploited the ambiguous status of the state’s pro-Indian laws to press their demands for land and justice. Bolivian indigenous and social movements have captured worldwide attention during the past several years. By describing indigenous mobilization in the decades preceding the revolution of 1952, A Revolution for Our Rights illuminates a crucial chapter in the long history behind present-day struggles in Bolivia and contributes to an understanding of indigenous politics in modern Latin America more broadly.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822390121
    Publication Date: 2008-01-30
    contrib-author: Laura Gotkowitz
    copyright-year: 2007
    eisbn: 9780822390121
    illustrations-note: 26 b&w photos, 4 maps
    isbn-cloth: 9780822340492
    isbn-paper: 9780822340676
    short-abstract:

    Analyzes struggles over citizenship and nationhood in Bolivia, following the fate of subaltern projects for political inclusion and asking why ethnic/racial claims were more effectively incorporated into the revolutionary agenda than were gender demands.

    subtitle: Indigenous Struggles for Land and Justice in Bolivia, 1880–1952
  • A Small World
    Author(s): Heckman, Davin
    Abstract:

    Conceived in the 1960s, Walt Disney’s original plans for his Experimental Prototype Community of Tomorrow (EPCOT) outlined a utopian laboratory for domestic technology, where families would live, work, and play in an integrated environment. Like many of his contemporaries, Disney imagined homes that would attend to their inhabitants’ every need, and he regarded the home as a site of unending technological progress. This fixation on “space-age” technology, with its promise of domestic bliss, marked an important mid-twentieth-century shift in understandings of the American home. In A Small World, Davin Heckman considers how domestic technologies that free people to enjoy leisure time in the home have come to be understood as necessary parts of everyday life.

    Heckman’s narrative stretches from the early-twentieth-century introduction into the home of electric appliances and industrial time-management techniques, through the postwar advent of television and the space-age “house of tomorrow,” to the contemporary automated, networked “smart home.” He considers all these developments in relation to lifestyle and consumer narratives. Building on the tension between agency and control within the walls of homes designed to anticipate and fulfill desires, Heckman engages debates about lifestyle, posthumanism, and rights under the destabilizing influences of consumer technologies, and he considers the utopian and dystopian potential of new media forms. Heckman argues that the achievement of an environment completely attuned to its inhabitants’ specific wants and needs—what he calls the “Perfect Day”—institutionalizes everyday life as the ultimate consumer practice.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822388845
    Publication Date: 2008-02-21
    contrib-author: Davin Heckman
    copyright-year: 2007
    eisbn: 9780822388845
    illustrations-note: 24 illustrations
    isbn-cloth: 9780822341345
    isbn-paper: 9780822341581
    short-abstract:

    A look at how domestic technologies that free people to enjoy leisure time in the home have come to be understood as necessary parts of everyday life.

    subtitle: Smart Houses and the Dream of the Perfect Day
  • A Social History of Iranian Cinema, Volume 1
    Author(s): Naficy, Hamid
    Abstract:

    Hamid Naficy is one of the world’s leading authorities on Iranian film, and A Social History of Iranian Cinema is his magnum opus. Covering the late nineteenth century to the early twenty-first and addressing documentaries, popular genres, and art films, it explains Iran’s peculiar cinematic production modes, as well as the role of cinema and media in shaping modernity and a modern national identity in Iran. This comprehensive social history unfolds across four volumes, each of which can be appreciated on its own.

    Volume 1 depicts and analyzes the early years of Iranian cinema. Film was introduced in Iran in 1900, three years after the country’s first commercial film exhibitor saw the new medium in Great Britain. An artisanal cinema industry sponsored by the ruling shahs and other elites soon emerged. The presence of women, both on the screen and in movie houses, proved controversial until 1925, when Reza Shah Pahlavi dissolved the Qajar dynasty. Ruling until 1941, Reza Shah implemented a Westernization program intended to unite, modernize, and secularize his multicultural, multilingual, and multiethnic country. Cinematic representations of a fast-modernizing Iran were encouraged, the veil was outlawed, and dandies flourished. At the same time, photography, movie production, and movie houses were tightly controlled. Film production ultimately proved marginal to state formation. Only four silent feature films were produced in Iran; of the five Persian-language sound features shown in the country before 1941, four were made by an Iranian expatriate in India.

    A Social History of Iranian Cinema Volume 1: The Artisanal Era, 1897–1941Volume 2: The Industrializing Years, 1941–1978Volume 3: The Islamicate Period, 1978–1984Volume 4: The Globalizing Era, 1984–2010

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822393009
    Publication Date: 2011-08-01
    contrib-author: Hamid Naficy
    copyright-year: 2011
    eisbn: 9780822393009
    illustrations-note: 74 illustrations, 1 table
    isbn-cloth: 9780822347545
    isbn-paper: 9780822347750
    short-abstract:

    Social history of Iranian cinema that explores cinema's role in creating national identity and contextualizes Iranian cinema within an international arena. The first volume focuses on silent era cinema and the transition to sound.

    subtitle: The Artisanal Era, 1897–1941
  • A Social History of Iranian Cinema, Volume 2
    Author(s): Naficy, Hamid
    Abstract:

    Hamid Naficy is one of the world’s leading authorities on Iranian film, and A Social History of Iranian Cinema is his magnum opus. Covering the late nineteenth century to the early twenty-first and addressing documentaries, popular genres, and art films, it explains Iran’s peculiar cinematic production modes, as well as the role of cinema and media in shaping modernity and a modern national identity in Iran. This comprehensive social history unfolds across four volumes, each of which can be appreciated on its own.

    Volume 2 spans the period of Mohammad Reza Shah’s rule, from 1941 until 1978. During this time Iranian cinema flourished and became industrialized, at its height producing more than ninety films each year. The state was instrumental in building the infrastructures of the cinema and television industries, and it instituted a vast apparatus of censorship and patronage. During the Second World War the Allied powers competed to control the movies shown in Iran. In the following decades, two distinct indigenous cinemas emerged. The more popular, traditional, and commercial filmfarsi movies included tough-guy films and the “stewpot” genre of melodrama, with plots reflecting the rapid changes in Iranian society. The new-wave cinema was a smaller but more influential cinema of dissent, made mostly by foreign-trained filmmakers and modernist writers opposed to the regime. Ironically, the state both funded and censored much of the new-wave cinema, which grew bolder in its criticism as state authoritarianism consolidated. A vital documentary cinema also developed in the prerevolutionary era.

    A Social History of Iranian Cinema Volume 1: The Artisanal Era, 1897–1941Volume 2: The Industrializing Years, 1941–1978Volume 3: The Islamicate Period, 1978–1984Volume 4: The Globalizing Era, 1984–2010

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822393016
    Publication Date: 2011-08-26
    contrib-author: Hamid Naficy
    copyright-year: 2011
    eisbn: 9780822393016
    illustrations-note: 83 photographs, 7 tables
    isbn-cloth: 9780822347552
    isbn-paper: 9780822347743
    short-abstract:

    Social history of Iranian cinema that explores cinema's role in creating national identity and contextualizes Iranian cinema within an international arena.

    subtitle: The Industrializing Years, 1941–1978
  • A Social History of Iranian Cinema, Volume 3
    Author(s): Naficy, Hamid
    Abstract:

    Hamid Naficy is one of the world’s leading authorities on Iranian film, and A Social History of Iranian Cinema is his magnum opus. Covering the late nineteenth century to the early twenty-first and addressing documentaries, popular genres, and art films, it explains Iran’s peculiar cinematic production modes, as well as the role of cinema and media in shaping modernity and a modern national identity in Iran. This comprehensive social history unfolds across four volumes, each of which can be appreciated on its own.

    In Volume 3, Naficy assesses the profound effects of the Islamic Revolution on Iran's cinema and film industry. Throughout the book, he uses the term Islamicate, rather than Islamic, to indicate that the values of the postrevolutionary state, culture, and cinema were informed not only by Islam but also by Persian traditions. Naficy examines documentary films made to record events prior to, during, and in the immediate aftermath of the revolution. He describes how certain institutions and individuals, including prerevolutionary cinema and filmmakers, were associated with the Pahlavi regime, the West, and modernity and therefore perceived as corrupt and immoral. Many of the nation's moviehouses were burned down. Prerevolutionary films were subject to strict review and often banned, to be replaced with films commensurate with Islamicate values. Filmmakers and entertainers were thrown out of the industry, exiled, imprisoned, and even executed. Yet, out of this revolutionary turmoil, an extraordinary Islamicate cinema and film culture emerged. Naficy traces its development and explains how Iran's long war with Iraq, the gendered segregation of space, and the imposition of the veil on women encouraged certain ideological and aesthetic trends in film and related media. Finally, he discusses the structural, administrative, and regulatory measures that helped to institutionalize the new evolving cinema.

    A Social History of Iranian Cinema Volume 1: The Artisanal Era, 1897–1941Volume 2: The Industrializing Years, 1941–1978Volume 3: The Islamicate Period, 1978–1984Volume 4: The Globalizing Era, 1984–2010

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822393535
    Publication Date: 2012-04-06
    contrib-author: Hamid Naficy
    copyright-year: 2012
    eisbn: 9780822393535
    illustrations-note: 42 illustrations, 8 tables
    isbn-cloth: 9780822348658
    isbn-paper: 9780822348771
    short-abstract:

    The third volume of this sweeping series covers the period of the Islamic Revolution and its immediate aftermath. Naficy details the destruction of Iran s movie theaters by Revolutionaries, the attempts of amateur and professional filmmakers to capture the action of the Revolution on film in real time, and the post-Revolutionary consolidation of the film industry.

    subtitle: The Islamicate Period, 1978–1984
  • A Social History of Iranian Cinema, Volume 4
    Author(s): Naficy, Hamid
    Abstract:

    Hamid Naficy is one of the world's leading authorities on Iranian film, and A Social History of Iranian Cinema is his magnum opus. Covering the late nineteenth century to the early twenty-first and addressing documentaries, popular genres, and art films, it explains Iran's peculiar cinematic production modes, as well as the role of cinema and media in shaping modernity and a modern national identity in Iran. This comprehensive social history unfolds across four volumes, each of which can be appreciated on its own.

    The extraordinary efflorescence in Iranian film, TV, and the new media since the consolidation of the Islamic Revolution animates Volume 4. During this time, documentary films proliferated. Many filmmakers took as their subject the revolution and the bloody eight-year war with Iraq; others critiqued postrevolution society. The strong presence of women on screen and behind the camera led to a dynamic women's cinema. A dissident art-house cinema—involving some of the best Pahlavi-era new-wave directors and a younger generation of innovative postrevolution directors—placed Iranian cinema on the map of world cinemas, bringing prestige to Iranians at home and abroad. A struggle over cinema, media, culture, and, ultimately, the legitimacy of the Islamic Republic, emerged and intensified. The media became a contested site of public diplomacy as the Islamic Republic regime as well as foreign governments antagonistic to it sought to harness Iranian popular culture and media toward their own ends, within and outside of Iran. The broad international circulation of films made in Iran and its diaspora, the vast dispersion of media-savvy filmmakers abroad, and new filmmaking and communication technologies helped to globalize Iranian cinema.

    A Social History of Iranian Cinema Volume 1: The Artisanal Era, 1897–1941Volume 2: The Industrializing Years, 1941–1978Volume 3: The Islamicate Period, 1978–1984Volume 4: The Globalizing Era, 1984–2010

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822393542
    Publication Date: 2012-11-01
    contrib-author: Hamid Naficy
    copyright-year: 2012
    eisbn: 9780822393542
    illustrations-note: 112 photographs
    isbn-cloth: 9780822348665
    isbn-paper: 9780822348788
    series: e-Duke books scholarly collection.
    short-abstract:

    In the fourth and final volume of A History of Iranian Cinema, Hamid Naficy looks at the extraordinary efflorescence in Iranian film and other visual media since the Islamic Revolution.

    subtitle: The Globalizing Era, 1984–2010
  • A Social Laboratory for Modern France
    Author(s): Horne, Janet R.
    Abstract:

    As a nineteenth-century think tank that sought answers to France’s pressing “social question,” the Musée Social reached across political lines to forge a reformist alliance founded on an optimistic faith in social science. In A Social Laboratory for Modern France Janet R. Horne presents the story of this institution, offering a nuanced explanation of how, despite centuries of deep ideological division, the French came to agree on the basic premises of their welfare state.

    Horne explains how Musée founders believed—and convinced others to believe—that the Third Republic would carry out the social mission of the French Revolution and create a new social contract for modern France, one based on the rights of citizenship and that assumed collective responsibility for the victims of social change. Challenging the persistent notion of the Third Republic as the stagnant backwater of European social reform, Horne instead depicts the intellectually sophisticated and progressive political culture of a generation that laid the groundwork for the rise of a hybrid welfare system, characterized by a partnership between private agencies and government. With a focus on the cultural origins of turn-of-the-century thought—including religion, republicanism, liberalism, solidarism, and early sociology—A Social Laboratory for Modern France demonstrates how French reformers grappled with social problems that are still of the utmost relevance today and how they initiated a process that gave the welfare state the task of achieving social cohesion within an industrializing republic.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822383246
    Publication Date: 2001-12-21
    contrib-author: Janet R. Horne
    copyright-year: 2001
    eisbn: 9780822383246
    illustrations-note: 15 b&w photos, 2 tables
    isbn-cloth: 9780822327820
    isbn-paper: 9780822327929
    short-abstract:

    Documents the early days of the French welfare state through the Musée Social, an early think tank.

    subtitle: The Musée Social and the Rise of the Welfare State
  • A Tale of Two Murders
    Author(s): Farr, James R.
    Abstract:

    As scandalous as any modern-day celebrity murder trial, the “Giroux affair” was a maelstrom of intrigue, encompassing daggers, poison, adultery, archenemies, servants, royalty, and legal proceedings that reached the pinnacle of seventeenth-century French society. In 1638 Philippe Giroux, a judge in the highest royal court of Burgundy, allegedly murdered his equally powerful cousin, Pierre Baillet, and Baillet’s valet, Philibert Neugot. The murders were all the more shocking because they were surrounded by accusations (particularly that Giroux had been carrying on a passionate affair with Baillet’s wife), conspiracy theories (including allegations that Giroux tried to poison his mother-in-law), and unexplained deaths (Giroux’s wife and her physician died under suspicious circumstances). The trial lasted from 1639 until 1643 and came to involve many of the most distinguished and influential men in France, among them the prince of Condé, Henri II Bourbon; the prime minister, Cardinal Richelieu; and King Louis XIII.

    James R. Farr reveals the Giroux affair not only as a riveting murder mystery but also as an illuminating point of entry into the dynamics of power, justice, and law in seventeenth-century France. Drawing on the voluminous trial records, Farr uses Giroux’s experience in the court system to trace the mechanisms of power—both the formal power vested by law in judicial officials and the informal power exerted by the nobility through patron-client relationships. He does not take a position on Giroux’s guilt or innocence. Instead, he allows readers to draw their own conclusions about who did what to whom on that ill-fated evening in 1638.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822387145
    Publication Date: 2005-09-07
    contrib-author: James R. Farr
    copyright-year: 2005
    eisbn: 9780822387145
    illustrations-note: 15 b&w photos, 1 figure
    isbn-cloth: 9780822334590
    isbn-paper: 9780822334712
    short-abstract:

    A compelling account of a 17th-century murder mystery and a well-researched scholarly work that explores the dynamics of power, justice, and law in Louis XIII's France.

    subtitle: Passion and Power in Seventeenth-Century France
  • A Time for Tea
    Author(s): Chatterjee, Piya
    Abstract:

    In this creative, ethnographic, and historical critique of labor practices on an Indian plantation, Piya Chatterjee provides a sophisticated examination of the production, consumption, and circulation of tea. A Time for Tea reveals how the female tea-pluckers seen in advertisements—picturesque women in mist-shrouded fields—came to symbolize the heart of colonialism in India. Chatterjee exposes how this image has distracted from terrible working conditions, low wages, and coercive labor practices enforced by the patronage system.

    Allowing personal, scholarly, and artistic voices to speak in turn and in tandem, Chatterjee discusses the fetishization of women who labor under colonial, postcolonial, and now neofeudal conditions. In telling the overarching story of commodity and empire, A Time for Tea demonstrates that at the heart of these narratives of travel, conquest, and settlement are compelling stories of women workers. While exploring the global and political dimensions of local practices of gendered labor, Chatterjee also reflects on the privileges and paradoxes of her own “decolonization” as a Third World feminist anthropologist. The book concludes with an extended reflection on the cultures of hierarchy, power, and difference in the plantation’s villages. It explores the overlapping processes by which gender, caste, and ethnicity constitute the interlocked patronage system of villages and their fields of labor. The tropes of coercion, consent, and resistance are threaded through the discussion.

    A Time for Tea will appeal to anthropologists and historians, South Asianists, and those interested in colonialism, postcolonialism, labor studies, and comparative or international feminism.

    Designated a John Hope Franklin Center book by the John Hope Franklin Seminar Group on Race, Religion, and Globalization.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822380153
    Publication Date: 2001-11-08
    contrib-author: Piya Chatterjee
    copyright-year: 2001
    eisbn: 9780822380153
    illustrations-note: 27 b&w photos, 6 tables
    isbn-cloth: 9780822326793
    isbn-paper: 9780822326748
    series: a John Hope Franklin Center Book
    short-abstract:

    An innovative ethnography of the production, circulation, and consumption of tea, centered on the lives of the mostly women workers who produce it.

    subtitle: Women, Labor, and Post/Colonial Politics on an Indian Plantation
  • A View from the Bottom
    Author(s): Nguyen, Hoang Tan
    Abstract:

    A View from the Bottom offers a major critical reassessment of male effeminacy and its racialization in visual culture. Examining portrayals of Asian and Asian American men in Hollywood cinema, European art film, gay pornography, and experimental documentary, Nguyen Tan Hoang explores the cultural meanings that accrue to sexual positions. He shows how cultural fantasies around the position of the sexual "bottom" overdetermine and refract the meanings of race, gender, sexuality, and nationality in American culture in ways that both enable and constrain Asian masculinity. Challenging the association of bottoming with passivity and abjection, Nguyen suggests ways of thinking about the bottom position that afford agency and pleasure. A more capacious conception of bottomhood—as a sexual position, a social alliance, an affective bond, and an aesthetic form—has the potential to destabilize sexual, gender, and racial norms, suggesting an ethical mode of relation organized not around dominance and mastery but around the risk of vulnerability and shame. Thus reconceived, bottomhood as a critical category creates new possibilities for arousal, receptiveness, and recognition, and offers a new framework for analyzing sexual representations in cinema as well as understanding their relation to oppositional political projects.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822376606
    Publication Date: 2014-07-28
    contrib-author: Hoang Tan Nguyen
    copyright-year: 2014
    eisbn: 9780822376606
    illustrations-note: 39 photographs
    isbn-cloth: 9780822356721
    isbn-paper: 9780822356844
    series: Perverse modernities
    short-abstract:

    Rather than using displays of masculinity to counter portrayals of Asian American men as passive and effeminate, Nguyen Tan Hoang develops a concept of bottomhood that opens up political alliances based on risk, vulnerability, and receptiveness.

    subtitle: Asian American Masculinity and Sexual Representation
  • A White Side of Black Britain
    Author(s): Twine, France Winddance; Smyth, Michael
    Abstract:

    A White Side of Black Britain explores the racial consciousness of white women who have established families and had children with black men of African Caribbean heritage in the United Kingdom. Filling a gap in the sociological literature on racism and antiracism, France Winddance Twine introduces new theoretical concepts in her description and analysis of white “transracial” mothers raising their children of African Caribbean ancestry in a racially diverse British city. Varying in age, income, education, and marital status, the transracial mothers at the center of Twine’s ethnography share moving stories about how they cope with racism and teach their children to identify and respond to it. They also discuss how and why their thinking about race, racism, and whiteness changed over time. Interviewing and observing more than forty multiracial families over a decade, Twine discovered that in most of them, the white woman’s racial consciousness and her ability to recognize and negotiate racism were derived as much from her relationships with her black partner and his extended family as from her female friends. In addition to the white birth mothers, Twine interviewed their children, spouses, domestic partners, friends, and members of their extended families. Her book is best characterized as an ethnography of racial consciousness and a dialogue between black and white family members about the meaning of race, racism, and whiteness. It includes intimate photographs of the family members and their communities.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822393559
    Publication Date: 2011-01-18
    contrib-author: France Winddance Twine
    contrib-other: Michael Smyth
    copyright-year: 2010
    eisbn: 9780822393559
    illustrations-note: 57 b&w photos, 3 figures
    isbn-cloth: 9780822349006
    isbn-paper: 9780822348764
    short-abstract:

    An ethnographic analysis of the racial consciousness of white transracial women who have established families and had children with black men of African Caribbean heritage in the United Kingdom.

    subtitle: Interracial Intimacy and Racial Literacy
  • A World of Becoming
    Author(s): Connolly, William E.
    Abstract:

    In A World of Becoming William E. Connolly outlines a political philosophy suited to a world whose powers of creative evolution include and exceed the human estate. This is a world composed of multiple interacting systems, including those of climate change, biological evolution, economic practices, and geological formations. Such open systems, set on different temporal registers of stability and instability, periodically resonate together to produce profound, unpredictable changes. To engage such a world reflectively is to feel pressure to alter established practices of politics, ethics, and spirituality. In pursuing such a course, Connolly draws inspiration from philosophers such as Maurice Merleau-Ponty, Alfred North Whitehead, and Gilles Deleuze, as well as the complexity theorist of biology Stuart Kauffman and the theologian Catherine Keller.

    Attunement to a world of becoming, Connolly argues, may help us address dangerous resonances between global finance capital, cross-regional religious resentments, neoconservative ideology, and the 24-hour mass media. Coming to terms with subliminal changes in the contemporary experience of time that challenge traditional images can help us grasp how these movements have arisen and perhaps even inspire creative counter-movements. The book closes with the chapter “The Theorist and the Seer,” in which Connolly draws insights from early Greek ideas of the Seer and a Jerry Lewis film, The Nutty Professor, to inform the theory enterprise today.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822393511
    Publication Date: 2010-12-27
    contrib-author: William E. Connolly
    copyright-year: 2010
    eisbn: 9780822393511
    illustrations-note: 3 photographs
    isbn-cloth: 9780822348634
    isbn-paper: 9780822348795
    series: a John Hope Franklin Center Book
    short-abstract:

    The prominent political theorist William E. Connolly outlines a political philosophy for the contemporary world: a world whose powers of creative evolution include and exceed the human estate.

    subtitle:
  • A World of Words
    Author(s): Williams, Michael J. S.
    Abstract:

    A World of Words offers a new look at the degree to which language itself is a topic of Poe's texts. Stressing the ways his fiction reflects on the nature of its own signifying practices, Williams sheds new light on such issues as Poe's characterization of the relationship between author and reader as a struggle for authority, on his awareness of the displacement of an "authorial writing self" by a "self as it is written," and on his debunking of the redemptive properties of the romantic symbol.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822381495
    Publication Date: 1988-03-11
    contrib-author: Michael J. S. Williams
    copyright-year: 1988
    eisbn: 9780822381495
    isbn-cloth: 9780822307808
    subtitle: Language and Displacement in the Fiction of Edgar Allan Poe
  • A Xicana Codex of Changing Consciousness
    Author(s): Moraga, Cherríe L.
    Abstract:

    A Xicana Codex of Changing Consciousness features essays and poems by Cherríe L. Moraga, one of the most influential figures in Chicana/o, feminist, queer, and indigenous activism and scholarship. Combining moving personal stories with trenchant political and cultural critique, the writer, activist, teacher, dramatist, mother, daughter, comadre, and lesbian lover looks back on the first ten years of the twenty-first century. She considers decade-defining public events such as 9/11 and the campaign and election of Barack Obama, and she explores socioeconomic, cultural, and political phenomena closer to home, sharing her fears about raising her son amid increasing urban violence and the many forms of dehumanization faced by young men of color. Moraga describes her deepening grief as she loses her mother to Alzheimer’s; pays poignant tribute to friends who passed away, including the sculptor Marsha Gómez and the poets Alfred Arteaga, Pat Parker, and Audre Lorde; and offers a heartfelt essay about her personal and political relationship with Gloria Anzaldúa.

    Thirty years after the publication of Anzaldúa and Moraga’s collection This Bridge Called My Back, a landmark of women-of-color feminism, Moraga’s literary and political praxis remains motivated by and intertwined with indigenous spirituality and her identity as Chicana lesbian. Yet aspects of her thinking have changed over time. A Xicana Codex of Changing Consciousness reveals key transformations in Moraga’s thought; the breadth, rigor, and philosophical depth of her work; her views on contemporary debates about citizenship, immigration, and gay marriage; and her deepening involvement in transnational feminist and indigenous activism. It is a major statement from one of our most important public intellectuals.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822393962
    Publication Date: 2011-05-17
    contrib-author: Cherríe L. Moraga
    copyright-year: 2011
    eisbn: 9780822393962
    illustrations-note: 9 illustrations
    isbn-cloth: 9780822349624
    isbn-paper: 9780822349778
    short-abstract:

    Collection of essays and poems that address the challenges of being a Chicana, a lesbian, and a feminist in the changing world of the twenty-first century.

    subtitle: Writings, 2000–2010
  • A Year at the Supreme Court
    Author(s): Devins, Neal; Douglas, Davison M.; Graber, Mark A.
    Abstract:

    The United States Supreme Court’s 2002–03 term confounded Court watchers. The same Rehnquist Court that many had seen as solidly conservative and unduly activist—the Court that helped decide the 2000 presidential election and struck down thirty-one federal statutes since 1995—issued a set of surprising, watershed rulings. In a term filled with important and unpredictable decisions, it upheld affirmative action, invalidated a same-sex sodomy statute, and reversed a death sentence due to ineffective assistance of counsel. With essays focused on individual Justices, Court practices, and some of last year’s most important rulings, this volume explores the meaning and significance of the Court’s 2002–03 term. Seasoned Supreme Court advocates and journalists from The New Republic, The Los Angeles Times, Newsweek, National Journal, Slate, and Legal Times grapple with questions about the Rehnquist Court’s identity and the Supreme Court’s role in the political life of the country.

    Some essays consider the role of “swing” Justices Sandra Day O’Connor and Anthony Kennedy within a Court that divides 5–4 more than any other group of Justices in the nation’s history. Others examine the political reaction to and legal context of the Court’s Lawrence v. Texas decision declaring a Texas law criminalizing homosexual sodomy unconstitutional. Contributors analyze the Court’s rulings on affirmative action and reassess its commitment to states’ rights. Considering the Court’s practices, one advocate explores the use and utility of amicus curiae, or “friend of the court” briefs, while another reflects on indications of an increased openness by the Court to public scrutiny. Two advocates who argued cases before the Court—one related to hate speech and the other to a “three strikes and you’re out” criminal statute—offer vivid accounts of their experiences. Intended for general readers, A Year at the Supreme Court is for all those who want to understand the Rehnquist Court and its momentous 2002–03 term.

    Contributors

    Erwin Chemerinsky

    Neal Devins

    Davison M. Douglas

    David J. Garrow

    Dahlia Lithwick

    Tony Mauro

    Carter Phillips

    Ramesh Ponnuru

    Jeffrey Rosen

    David G. Savage

    Rodney A. Smolla

    Stuart Taylor Jr.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822385950
    Publication Date: 2004-09-22
    contrib-editor: Neal Devins; Davison M. Douglas
    contrib-series-editor: Mark A. Graber
    copyright-year: 2004
    eisbn: 9780822385950
    isbn-cloth: 9780822334378
    isbn-paper: 9780822334484
    series: Constitutional Conflicts
    short-abstract:

    Profiles a watershed year (2002-2003) in the life of the U.S. Supreme Court, with contributions by journalists and Court advocates that discuss critical rulings on gay rights, affirmative action, hate speech, federal-state relations, and criminal law.

    subtitle:
  • A Year in the Life of the Supreme Court
    Author(s): Smolla, Rodney A.; Wermiel, Stephen; Devins, Neal; Graber, Mark A.; Barrett, Paul; Denniston, Lyle; Epstein, Aaron; Kindred, Kay; Mauro, Tony; Savage, David
    Abstract:

    Despite its importance to the life of the nation and all its citizens, the Supreme Court remains a mystery to most Americans, its workings widely felt but rarely seen firsthand. In this book, journalists who cover the Court—acting as the eyes and ears of not just the American people, but the Constitution itself—give us a rare close look into its proceedings, the people behind them, and the complex, often fascinating ways in which justice is ultimately served. Their narratives form an intimate account of a year in the life of the Supreme Court.

    The cases heard by the Surpreme Court are, first and foremost, disputes involving real people with actual stories. The accidents and twists of circumstance that have brought these people to the last resort of litigation can make for compelling drama. The contributors to this volume bring these dramatic stories to life, using them as a backdrop for the larger issues of law and social policy that constitute the Court’s business: abortion, separation of church and state, freedom of speech, the right of privacy, crime, violence, discrimination, and the death penalty. In the course of these narratives, the authors describe the personalities and jurisprudential leanings of the various Justices, explaining how the interplay of these characters and theories about the Constitution interact to influence the Court’s decisions.

    Highly readable and richly informative, this book offers an unusually clear and comprehensive portrait of one of the most influential institutions in modern American life.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822381945
    Publication Date: 1995-07-31
    contrib-author: Stephen Wermiel; Aaron Epstein; Kay Kindred; Tony Mauro; David Savage
    contrib-editor: Rodney A. Smolla
    contrib-other: Paul Barrett; Lyle Denniston
    contrib-series-editor: Neal Devins; Mark A. Graber
    copyright-year: 1995
    eisbn: 9780822381945
    isbn-cloth: 9780822316534
    isbn-paper: 9780822316657
    series: Constitutional Conflicts
    short-abstract:

    Despite its importance to the life of the nation and all its citizens, the Supreme Court remains a mystery to most Americans, its workings widely felt but rarely seen firsthand. In this book, journalists who cover the Court—acting as the eyes and ears of not just the American people, but the Constitution itself—give us a rare close look into its proceedings, the people behind them, and the complex, often fascinating ways in which justice is ultimately served. Their narratives form an intimate account of a year in the life of the Supreme Court.

    The cases heard by the Surpreme Court are, first and foremost, disputes involving real people with actual stories. The accidents and twists of circumstance that have brought these people to the last resort of litigation can make for compelling drama. The contributors to this volume bring these dramatic stories to life, using them as a backdrop for the larger issues of law and social policy that constitute the Court’s business: abortion, separation of church and state, freedom of speech, the right of privacy, crime, violence, discrimination, and the death penalty. In the course of these narratives, the authors describe the personalities and jurisprudential leanings of the various Justices, explaining how the interplay of these characters and theories about the Constitution interact to influence the Court’s decisions.

    Highly readable and richly informative, this book offers an unusually clear and comprehensive portrait of one of the most influential institutions in modern American life.

    subtitle:
  • Abalone Tales
    Author(s): Field, Les; Lomawaima, K. Tsianina; Mallon, Florencia E.; Ramos, Alcida Rita; Rappaport, Joanne; Seidner, Cheryl
    Abstract:

    For Native peoples of California, the abalone found along the state’s coast have remarkably complex significance as food, spirit, narrative symbol, tradable commodity, and material with which to make adornment and sacred regalia. The large mollusks also represent contemporary struggles surrounding cultural identity and political sovereignty. Abalone Tales, a collaborative ethnography, presents different perspectives on the multifaceted material and symbolic relationships between abalone and the Ohlone, Pomo, Karuk, Hupa, and Wiyot peoples of California. The research agenda, analyses, and writing strategies were determined through collaborative relationships between the anthropologist Les W. Field and Native individuals and communities. Several of these individuals contributed written texts or oral stories for inclusion in the book.

    Tales about abalone and their historical and contemporary meanings are related by Field and his coauthors, who include the chair and other members of the Muwekma Ohlone Tribe; a Point Arena Pomo elder; the chair of the Wiyot tribe and her sister; several Hupa Indians; and a Karuk scholar, artist, and performer. Reflecting the divergent perspectives of various Native groups and people, the stories and analyses belie any presumption of a single, unified indigenous understanding of abalone. At the same time, they shed light on abalone’s role in cultural revitalization, struggles over territory, tribal appeals for federal recognition, and connections among California’s Native groups. While California’s abalone are in danger of extinction, their symbolic power appears to surpass even the environmental crises affecting the state’s vulnerable coastline.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822391159
    Publication Date: 2009-01-01
    contrib-author: Les Field
    contrib-editor: K. Tsianina Lomawaima
    contrib-other: Cheryl Seidner
    contrib-series-editor: Florencia E. Mallon; Alcida Rita Ramos; Joanne Rappaport
    copyright-year: 2008
    eisbn: 9780822391159
    illustrations-note: 10 illustrations, 1 map, 1 figure
    isbn-cloth: 9780822342168
    isbn-paper: 9780822342335
    series: Narrating Native Histories
    short-abstract:

    Examines the meaning of abalone among past and present California Indian tribes and how these interpretations of its meaning address larger issues of sovereignty and identity within the tribes.

    subtitle: Collaborative Explorations of Sovereignty and Identity in Native California
  • Absolute Erotic, Absolute Grotesque
    Author(s): Driscoll, Mark
    Abstract:

    In this major reassessment of Japanese imperialism in Asia, Mark Driscoll foregrounds the role of human life and labor. Drawing on subaltern postcolonial studies and Marxism, he directs critical attention to the peripheries, where figures including Chinese coolies, Japanese pimps, trafficked Japanese women, and Korean tenant farmers supplied the vital energy that drove Japan's empire. He identifies three phases of Japan's capitalist expansion, each powered by distinct modes of capturing and expropriating life and labor: biopolitics (1895–1914), neuropolitics (1920–32), and necropolitics (1935-45). During the first phase, Japanese elites harnessed the labor of marginalized subjects as Japan colonized Taiwan, Korea, and south Manchuria, and sent hustlers and sex workers into China to expand its market hegemony. Linking the deformed bodies laboring in the peripheries with the "erotic-grotesque" media in the metropole, Driscoll centers the second phase on commercial sexology, pornography, and detective stories in Tokyo to argue that by 1930, capitalism had colonized all aspects of human life: not just labor practices but also consumers’ attention and leisure time. Focusing on Japan's Manchukuo colony in the third phase, he shows what happens to the central figures of biopolitics as they are subsumed under necropolitical capitalism: coolies become forced laborers, pimps turn into state officials and authorized narcotraffickers, and sex workers become "comfort women". Driscoll concludes by discussing Chinese fiction written inside Manchukuo, describing the everyday violence unleashed by necropolitics.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822392880
    Publication Date: 2010-07-13
    contrib-author: Mark Driscoll
    copyright-year: 2010
    eisbn: 9780822392880
    illustrations-note: 13 illustrations
    isbn-cloth: 9780822347408
    isbn-paper: 9780822347613
    short-abstract:

    A major rethinking of Japanese imperialism in Asia using subaltern postcolonial studies and Marxism to focus attention on the role of human life and labor in colonial expansion.

    subtitle: The Living, Dead, and Undead in Japan's Imperialism, 1895–1945
  • Accounting for Violence
    Author(s): Bilbija, Ksenija; Payne, Leigh A.
    Abstract:

    Accounting for Violence offers bold new perspectives on the politics of memory in Latin America. Scholars from across the humanities and social sciences provide in-depth analyses of the political economy of memory in Argentina, Brazil, Chile, Mexico, Peru, and Uruguay, countries that emerged from authoritarian rule in the 1980s and 1990s. The contributors take up issues of authenticity and commodification, as well as the “never again” imperative implicit in memory goods and memorial sites. They describe how bookstores, cinemas, theaters, the music industry, and television shows (and their commercial sponsors) trade in testimonial and fictional accounts of the authoritarian past; how tourist itineraries have come to include trauma sites and memorial museums; and how memory studies has emerged as a distinct academic field profiting from its own journals, conferences, book series, and courses. The memory market, described in terms of goods, sites, producers, marketers, consumers, and patrons, presents a paradoxical situation. On the one hand, commodifying memory potentially cheapens it. On the other hand, too little public exposure may limit awareness of past human-rights atrocities; such awareness may help to prevent their recurring.

    Contributors. Rebecca J. Atencio, Ksenija Bilbija, Jo-Marie Burt, Laurie Beth Clark, Cath Collins, Susana Draper, Nancy Gates-Madsen, Susana Kaiser, Cynthia E. Milton, Alice A. Nelson, Carmen Oquendo Villar, Leigh A. Payne, José Ramón Ruisánchez Serra, Maria Eugenia Ulfe

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822394327
    Publication Date: 2011-07-25
    contrib-editor: Ksenija Bilbija; Leigh A. Payne
    copyright-year: 2011
    eisbn: 9780822394327
    illustrations-note: 25 photographs
    isbn-cloth: 9780822350255
    isbn-paper: 9780822350422
    series: The cultures and practice of violence series
    short-abstract:

    Offering bold new perspectives on the politics of memory in Latin America, scholars analyze the memory markets in six countries that emerged from authoritarian rule in the 1980s and 1990s.

    subtitle: Marketing Memory in Latin America
  • Adam's Gift
    Author(s): Creech, Jimmy
    Abstract:

    Jimmy Creech, a United Methodist pastor in North Carolina, was visited one morning in 1984 by Adam, a longtime parishioner whom he liked and respected. Adam said that he was gay, and that he was leaving The United Methodist Church, which had just pronounced that “self-avowed practicing homosexuals” could not be ordained. He would not be part of a community that excluded him. Creech found himself instinctively supporting Adam, telling him that he was sure that God loved and accepted him as he was. Adam’s Gift is Creech’s inspiring first-person account of how that conversation transformed his life and ministry.

    Adam’s visit prompted Creech to re-evaluate his belief that homosexuality was a sin, and to research the scriptural basis for the church’s position. He determined that the church was mistaken, that scriptural translations and interpretations had been botched and dangerously distorted. As a Christian, Creech came to believe that discriminating against lesbian, gay, bisexual, and transgender people was morally wrong. This understanding compelled him to perform same-gender commitment ceremonies, which conflicted with church directives. Creech was tried twice by The United Methodist Church, and, after the second trial, his ordination credentials were revoked. Adam’s Gift is a moving story and an important chapter in the unfinished struggle for lesbian, gay, bisexual, and transgender civil and human rights.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822393610
    Publication Date: 2011-03-14
    contrib-author: Jimmy Creech
    copyright-year: 2011
    eisbn: 9780822393610
    illustrations-note: 17color photographs
    isbn-cloth: 9780822348856
    short-abstract:

    The inspiring first-person account of a minister whose ordination credentials were revoked by The United Methodist Church after he performed same-gender commitment ceremonies.

    subtitle: A Memoir of a Pastor’s Calling to Defy the Church’s Persecution of Lesbians and Gays
  • Addiction Trajectories
    Author(s): Raikhel, Eugene; Garriott, William
    Abstract:

    Bringing anthropological perspectives to bear on addiction, the contributors to this important collection highlight the contingency of addiction as a category of human knowledge and experience. Based on ethnographic research conducted in sites from alcohol treatment clinics in Russia to Pentecostal addiction ministries in Puerto Rico, the essays are linked by the contributors' attention to the dynamics—including the cultural, scientific, legal, religious, personal, and social—that shape the meaning of "addiction" in particular settings. They examine how it is understood and experienced among professionals working in the criminal justice system of a rural West Virginia community; Hispano residents of New Mexico's Espanola Valley, where the rate of heroin overdose is among the highest in the United States; homeless women participating in an outpatient addiction therapy program in the Midwest; machine-gaming addicts in Las Vegas, and many others. The collection's editors suggest "addiction trajectories" as a useful rubric for analyzing the changing meanings of addiction across time, place, institutions, and individual lives. Pursuing three primary trajectories, the contributors show how addiction comes into being as an object of knowledge, a site of therapeutic intervention, and a source of subjective experience.

    Contributors. Nancy D. Campbell, E. Summerson Carr, Angela Garcia, William Garriott, Helena Hansen, Anne M. Lovell, Emily Martin, Todd Meyers, Eugene Raikhel, A. Jamie Saris, Natasha Dow Schüll

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822395874
    Publication Date: 2013-03-28
    contrib-editor: Eugene Raikhel; William Garriott
    copyright-year: 2013
    eisbn: 9780822395874
    illustrations-note: 7 illustrations, 3 tables
    isbn-cloth: 9780822353508
    isbn-paper: 9780822353645
    series: Experimental futures : technological lives, scientific arts, anthropological voices
    short-abstract:

    Drawing on medical anthropology and science and technology studies,the contributors to Addiction Trajectories examine the epistemic, therapeutic, and experiential dimensions of contemporary addiction.

    subtitle:
  • Adiós Muchachos
    Author(s): Ramírez, Sergio; Ramírez, Stacey Alba D.
    Abstract:

    Adiós Muchachos is a candid insider’s account of the leftist Sandinista revolution in Nicaragua. During the 1970s, Sergio Ramírez led prominent intellectuals, priests, and business leaders to support the Sandinista National Liberation Front (FSLN), against Anastasio Somoza’s dictatorship. After the Sandinistas overthrew the Somoza regime in 1979, Ramírez served as vice-president under Daniel Ortega from 1985 until 1990, when the FSLN lost power in a national election. Disillusioned by his former comrades’ increasing intolerance of dissent and resistance to democratization, Ramírez defected from the Sandinistas in 1995 and founded the Sandinista Renovation Movement. In Adiós Muchachos, he describes the utopian aspirations for liberation and reform that motivated the Sandinista revolution against the Somoza regime, as well as the triumphs and shortcomings of the movement’s leadership as it struggled to turn an insurrection into a government, reconstruct a country beset by poverty and internal conflict, and defend the revolution against the Contras, an armed counterinsurgency supported by the United States. Adiós Muchachos was first published in 1999. Based on a later edition, this translation includes Ramírez’s thoughts on more recent developments, including the re-election of Daniel Ortega as president in 2006.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822394594
    Publication Date: 2012-10-01
    contrib-author: Sergio Ramírez
    contrib-translator: Stacey Alba D. Ramírez
    copyright-year: 2012
    eisbn: 9780822394594
    isbn-cloth: 9780822350699
    isbn-paper: 9780822350873
    series: American encounters/global interactions
    short-abstract:

    Sergio Ramírez, Vice President of Nicaragua from 1984 to 1990, offers his memoir of the turbulent years that toppled the Samoza dictatorship in 1979 and the triumphs and shortcomings of the Sandinista National Liberation Front that was charged with national reconstruction and social transformation in a country besieged by internal conflicts and foreign aggression.

    subtitle: A Memoir of the Sandinista Revolution
  • Adiós Niño
    Author(s): Levenson, Deborah T.
    Abstract:

    In Adiós Niño: The Gangs of Guatemala City and the Politics of Death, Deborah T. Levenson examines transformations in the Guatemalan gangs called Maras from their emergence in the 1980s to the early 2000s. A historical study, Adiós Niño describes how fragile spaces of friendship and exploration turned into rigid and violent ones in which youth, and especially young men, came to employ death as a natural way of living for the short period that they expected to survive. Levenson relates the stark changes in the Maras to global, national, and urban deterioration; transregional gangs that intersect with the drug trade; and the Guatemalan military's obliteration of radical popular movements and of social imaginaries of solidarity. Part of Guatemala City's reconfigured social, political, and cultural milieu, with their members often trapped in Guatemala's growing prison system, the gangs are used to justify remilitarization in Guatemala's contemporary postwar, post-peace era. Portraying the Maras as microcosms of broader tragedies, and pointing out the difficulties faced by those youth who seek to escape the gangs, Levenson poses important questions about the relationship between trauma, memory, and historical agency.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822395621
    Publication Date: 2013-03-18
    contrib-author: Deborah T. Levenson
    copyright-year: 2013
    eisbn: 9780822395621
    illustrations-note: 30 photographs
    isbn-cloth: 9780822352990
    isbn-paper: 9780822353157
    short-abstract:

    This ethnohistory examines how the Guatemalan gangs that emerged from the country's strong populist movement in the 1980s had become perpetrators of nihilist violence by the early 2000s.

    subtitle: The Gangs of Guatemala City and the Politics of Death
  • Adopted Territory
    Author(s): Kim, Eleana J.
    Abstract:

    Since the end of the Korean War, an estimated 200,000 children from South Korea have been adopted into white families in North America, Europe, and Australia. While these transnational adoptions were initiated as an emergency measure to find homes for mixed-race children born in the aftermath of the war, the practice grew exponentially from the 1960s through the 1980s. At the height of South Korea’s “economic miracle,” adoption became an institutionalized way of dealing with poor and illegitimate children. Most of the adoptees were raised with little exposure to Koreans or other Korean adoptees, but as adults, through global flows of communication, media, and travel, they have come into increasing contact with each other, Korean culture, and the South Korean state. Since the 1990s, as Korean children have continued to leave to be adopted in the West, a growing number of adult adoptees have been returning to Korea to seek their cultural and biological origins. In this fascinating ethnography, Eleana J. Kim examines the history of Korean adoption, the emergence of a distinctive adoptee collective identity, and adoptee returns to Korea in relation to South Korean modernity and globalization. Kim draws on interviews with adult adoptees, social workers, NGO volunteers, adoptee activists, scholars, and journalists in the U.S., Europe, and South Korea, as well as on observations at international adoptee conferences, regional organization meetings, and government-sponsored motherland tours.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822392668
    Publication Date: 2010-11-09
    contrib-author: Eleana J. Kim
    copyright-year: 2010
    eisbn: 9780822392668
    illustrations-note: 15 photographs, 4 tables
    isbn-cloth: 9780822346838
    isbn-paper: 9780822346951
    short-abstract:

    An ethnography examining the history of Korean adoption to West, the emergence of a distinctive adoptee collective identity, and adoptee returns to Korea in relation to South Korean modernity and globalization.

    subtitle: Transnational Korean Adoptees and the Politics of Belonging
  • Adoptive Migration
    Author(s): Leinaweaver, Jessaca B.
    Abstract:

    Spain has one of the highest per capita international adoption rates in the world. Internationally adopted kids are coming from many of the same countries as do the many immigrants who are radically transforming Spain's demographics. Based on interviews with adoptive families, migrant families, and adoption professionals, Jessaca B. Leinaweaver examines the experiences of Latin American children adopted into a rapidly multiculturalizing society. She focuses on Peruvian adoptees and immigrants in Madrid, but her conclusions apply more broadly, to any pairing of adoptees and migrants from the same country. Leinaweaver finds that international adoption, particularly in a context of high rates of transnational migration, is best understood as both a privileged and unusual form of migration, and a crucial and contested method of family formation. Adoptive Migration is a fascinating study of the implications for adopted children of growing up in a country that discriminates against their fellow immigrants.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822377511
    Publication Date: 2013-08-12
    contrib-author: Jessaca B. Leinaweaver
    copyright-year: 2013
    eisbn: 9780822377511
    illustrations-note: 6 illustrations
    isbn-cloth: 9780822354925
    isbn-paper: 9780822355076
    short-abstract:

    Focused on Peruvian adoptees and immigrants in Spain, this ethnography explores the adopted children's experience of growing up in a country that discriminates against their fellow immigrants.

    subtitle: Raising Latinos in Spain
  • Adrian Piper
    Author(s): Bowles, John P.
    Abstract:

    In 1972 the artist Adrian Piper began periodically dressing as a persona called the Mythic Being, striding the streets of New York in a mustache, Afro wig, and mirrored sunglasses with a cigar in the corner of her mouth. Her Mythic Being performances critically engaged with popular representations of race, gender, sexuality, and class; they challenged viewers to accept personal responsibility for xenophobia and discrimination and the conditions that allowed them to persist. Piper’s work confronts viewers and forces them to reconsider assumptions about the social construction of identity. Adrian Piper: Race, Gender, and Embodiment is an in-depth analysis of this pioneering artist’s work, illustrated with more than ninety images, including twenty-one in color.

    Over the course of a decade, John P. Bowles and Piper conversed about her art and its meaning, reception, and relation to her scholarship on Kant’s philosophy. Drawing on those conversations, Bowles locates Piper’s work at the nexus of Conceptual and feminist art of the late 1960s and 1970s. Piper was the only African American woman associated with the Conceptual artists of the 1960s and one of only a few African Americans to participate in exhibitions of the nascent feminist art movement in the early 1970s. Bowles contends that Piper’s work is ultimately about our responsibility for the world in which we live.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822393733
    Publication Date: 2011-04-01
    contrib-author: John P. Bowles
    copyright-year: 2011
    eisbn: 9780822393733
    illustrations-note: 69 illustrations, incl. 17 in color
    isbn-cloth: 9780822348962
    isbn-paper: 9780822349204
    short-abstract:

    This in-depth analysis of Adrian Piper s art locates her groundbreaking work at the nexus of Conceptual and feminist art of the late 1960s and 1970s.

    subtitle: Race, Gender, and Embodiment
  • Aesthetics and Marxism
    Author(s): Liu, Kang; Fish, Stanley; Jameson, Fredric
    Abstract:

    Although Chinese Marxism—primarily represented by Maoism—is generally seen by Western intellectuals as monolithic, Liu Kang argues that its practices and projects are as diverse as those in Western Marxism, particularly in the area of aesthetics. In this comparative study of European and Chinese Marxist traditions, Liu reveals the extent to which Chinese Marxists incorporate ideas about aesthetics and culture in their theories and practices. In doing so, he constructs a wholly new understanding of Chinese Marxism.

    Far from being secondary considerations in Chinese Marxism, aesthetics and culture are in fact principal concerns. In this respect, such Marxists are similar to their Western counterparts, although Europeans have had little understanding of the Chinese experience. Liu traces the genealogy of aesthetic discourse in both modern China and the West since the era of classical German thought, showing where conceptual modifications and divergences have occurred in the two traditions. He examines the work of Mao Zedong, Lu Xun, Li Zehou, Qu Qiubai, and others in China, and from the West he discusses Kant, Schiller, Schopenhauer, and Marxist theorists including Horkheimer, Adorno, Benjamin, and Marcuse. While stressing the diversity of Marxist positions within China as well as in the West, Liu explains how ideas of culture and aesthetics have offered a constructive vision for a postrevolutionary society and have affected a wide field of issues involving the problems of modernity.

    Forcefully argued and theoretically sophisticated, this book will appeal to students and scholars of contemporary Marxism, cultural studies, aesthetics, and modern Chinese culture, politics, and ideology.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822380535
    Publication Date: 2000-02-18
    contrib-author: Kang Liu
    contrib-series-editor: Stanley Fish; Fredric Jameson
    copyright-year: 2000
    eisbn: 9780822380535
    isbn-cloth: 9780822324256
    isbn-paper: 9780822324485
    series: Post-Contemporary Interventions
    short-abstract:

    Liu’s study examines writers, philosophers, and political leaders in China and the West and reveals the extent to which they incorporate ideas about “culture” and “aesthetics” in their theories and practices.

    subtitle: Chinese Aesthetic Marxists and Their Western Contemporaries
  • Affective Communities
    Author(s): Gandhi, Leela; Adams, Julia; Steinmetz, George
    Abstract:

    “If I had to choose between betraying my country and betraying my friend, I hope I should have the guts to betray my country.” So E. M. Forster famously observed in his Two Cheers for Democracy. Forster’s epigrammatic manifesto, where the idea of the “friend” stands as a metaphor for dissident cross-cultural collaboration, holds the key, Leela Gandhi argues in Affective Communities, to the hitherto neglected history of western anti-imperialism. Focusing on individuals and groups who renounced the privileges of imperialism to elect affinity with victims of their own expansionist cultures, she uncovers the utopian-socialist critiques of empire that emerged in Europe, specifically in Britain, at the end of the nineteenth century. Gandhi reveals for the first time how those associated with marginalized lifestyles, subcultures, and traditions—including homosexuality, vegetarianism, animal rights, spiritualism, and aestheticism—united against imperialism and forged strong bonds with colonized subjects and cultures.

    Gandhi weaves together the stories of a number of South Asian and European friendships that flourished between 1878 and 1914, tracing the complex historical networks connecting figures like the English socialist and homosexual reformer Edward Carpenter and the young Indian barrister M. K. Gandhi, or the Jewish French mystic Mirra Alfassa and the Cambridge-educated Indian yogi and extremist Sri Aurobindo. In a global milieu where the battle lines of empire are reemerging in newer and more pernicious configurations, Affective Communities challenges homogeneous portrayals of “the West” and its role in relation to anticolonial struggles. Drawing on Derrida’s theory of friendship, Gandhi puts forth a powerful new model of the political: one that finds in friendship a crucial resource for anti-imperialism and transnational collaboration.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822387657
    Publication Date: 2005-12-21
    contrib-author: Leela Gandhi
    contrib-series-editor: Julia Adams; George Steinmetz
    copyright-year: 2006
    eisbn: 9780822387657
    isbn-cloth: 9780822337034
    isbn-paper: 9780822337157
    series: Politics, History, and Culture
    short-abstract:

    Investigates friendships between anti-colonial Indians and anti-imperial 'westerners' in late-19th and early 20th centuries, claiming that such inter-cultural collaborations need to be added to annals of non-violent historiography.

    subtitle: Anticolonial Thought, Fin-de-Siècle Radicalism, and the Politics of Friendship
  • Affirmative Reaction
    Author(s): Carroll, Hamilton; Pease, Donald E.
    Abstract:

    Affirmative Reaction explores the cultural politics of heteronormative white masculine privilege in the United States. Through close readings of texts ranging from the popular television drama 24 to the Marvel Comics miniseries The Call of Duty, and from the reality show American Chopper to the movie Million Dollar Baby, Hamilton Carroll argues that the true privilege of white masculinity—and its defining strategy—is not to be unmarked, universal, or invisible, but to be mobile and mutable. He describes how, in response to the perceived erosions of privilege produced by post–civil rights era identity politics, white masculinity has come to rely on the very discourses of difference that unsettled its claims on the universal; it has redefined itself as a marginalized identity.

    Throughout Affirmative Reaction, Carroll examines the kinds of difference white masculinity claims for itself as it attempts to hold onto or maintain majority privilege. Whether these are traditional sites of minority difference—such as Irishness, white trash, or domestic melodrama—or reworked sites of masculinist investment—including laboring bodies, public-sphere politics, and vigilantism—the outcome is the same: the foregrounding of white masculinity over and against women, people of color, and the non-heteronormative. By revealing the strategies through which white masculinity is produced as a formal difference, Carroll sheds new light on the ways that privilege is accrued and maintained.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822393870
    Publication Date: 2011-01-04
    contrib-author: Hamilton Carroll
    contrib-series-editor: Donald E. Pease
    copyright-year: 2011
    eisbn: 9780822393870
    illustrations-note: 12 illustrations
    isbn-cloth: 9780822349297
    isbn-paper: 9780822349488
    series: New Americanists
    short-abstract:

    Affirmative Reaction explores the cultural politics of heteronormative white masculine privilege in the United States.

    subtitle: New Formations of White Masculinity
  • African Rhythms
    Author(s): Weston, Randy; Jenkins, Willard; Radano, Ronald; Kun, Josh
    Abstract:

    The pianist, composer, and bandleader Randy Weston is one of the world’s most influential jazz musicians and a remarkable storyteller whose career has spanned five continents and more than six decades. Packed with fascinating anecdotes, African Rhythms is Weston’s life story, as told by him to the music journalist Willard Jenkins. It encompasses Weston’s childhood in Brooklyn’s Bedford-Stuyvesant neighborhood—where his parents and other members of their generation imbued him with pride in his African heritage—and his introduction to jazz and early years as a musician in the artistic ferment of mid-twentieth-century New York. His music has taken him around the world: he has performed in eighteen African countries, in Buddhist temples and Shinto shrines, in the Canterbury Cathedral, and at the grand opening of the Bibliotheca Alexandrina: The New Library of Alexandria. Africa is at the core of Weston’s music and spirituality. He has traversed the continent on a continuous quest to learn about its musical traditions, produced its first major jazz festival, and lived for years in Morocco, where he opened a popular jazz club, the African Rhythms Club, in Tangier.

    Weston’s narrative is replete with tales of the people he has met and befriended, and with whom he has worked. He describes his unique partnerships with Langston Hughes, the musician and arranger Melba Liston, and the jazz scholar Marshall Stearns, as well as his friendships and collaborations with Duke Ellington, Dizzy Gillespie, Coleman Hawkins, Thelonious Monk, Billy Strayhorn, Max Roach, Charlie Parker, Miles Davis, the novelist Paul Bowles, the Cuban percussionist Candido Camero, the Ghanaian jazz artist Kofi Ghanaba, the Gnawa musicians of Morocco, and many others. With African Rhythms, an international jazz virtuoso continues to create cultural history.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822393108
    Publication Date: 2010-09-14
    contrib-author: Randy Weston; Willard Jenkins
    contrib-series-editor: Ronald Radano; Josh Kun
    copyright-year: 2010
    eisbn: 9780822393108
    illustrations-note: 51 b&w photos
    isbn-cloth: 9780822347842
    series: a John Hope Franklin Center Book
    short-abstract:

    The autobiography of the pianist, composer, and bandleader Randy Weston, one of the world s most influential jazz musicians and a remarkable storyteller.

    subtitle: The Autobiography of Randy Weston
  • Africanizing Anthropology
    Author(s): Schumaker, Lyn
    Abstract:

    Africanizing Anthropology tells the story of the anthropological fieldwork centered at the Rhodes-Livingstone Institute in Northern Rhodesia (now Zambia) during the mid-twentieth century. Focusing on collaborative processes rather than on the activity of individual researchers, Lyn Schumaker gives the assistants and informants of anthropologists a central role in the making of anthropological knowledge.

    Schumaker shows how local conditions and local ideas about culture and history, as well as previous experience of outsiders’ interest, shape local people’s responses to anthropological fieldwork and help them, in turn, to influence the construction of knowledge about their societies and lives. Bringing to the fore a wide range of actors—missionaries, administrators, settlers, the families of anthropologists—Schumaker emphasizes the daily practices of researchers, demonstrating how these are as centrally implicated in the making of anthropological knowlege as the discipline’s methods. Selecting a prominent group of anthropologists—The Manchester School—she reveals how they achieved the advances in theory and method that made them famous in the 1950s and 1960s.

    This book makes important contributions to anthropology, African history, and the history of science.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822380795
    Publication Date: 2001-06-21
    contrib-author: Lyn Schumaker
    copyright-year: 2001
    eisbn: 9780822380795
    illustrations-note: 23 b&w photographs
    isbn-cloth: 9780822326786
    isbn-paper: 9780822326731
    short-abstract:

    An innovative cultural study of a major site of British anthropology, done with methods from the history of science, detailing the development of methods, practices, and work culture in the colonial context.

    subtitle: Fieldwork, Networks, and the Making of Cultural Knowledge in Central Africa
  • Afro Asia
    Author(s): Ho, Fred; Mullen, Bill V.; Yun, Lisa Li Shen
    Abstract:

    With contributions from activists, artists, and scholars, Afro Asia is a groundbreaking collection of writing on the historical alliances, cultural connections, and shared political strategies linking African Americans and Asian Americans. Bringing together autobiography, poetry, scholarly criticism, and other genres, this volume represents an activist vanguard in the cultural struggle against oppression.

    Afro Asia opens with analyses of historical connections between people of African and of Asian descent. An account of nineteenth-century Chinese laborers who fought against slavery and colonialism in Cuba appears alongside an exploration of African Americans’ reactions to and experiences of the Korean “conflict.” Contributors examine the fertile period of Afro-Asian exchange that began around the time of the 1955 Bandung Conference, the first meeting of leaders from Asian and African nations in the postcolonial era. One assesses the relationship of two important 1960s Asian American activists to Malcolm X and the Black Panthers. Mao Ze Dong’s 1963 and 1968 statements in support of black liberation are juxtaposed with an overview of the influence of Maoism on African American leftists.

    Turning to the arts, Ishmael Reed provides a brief account of how he met and helped several Asian American writers. A Vietnamese American spoken-word artist describes the impact of black hip-hop culture on working-class urban Asian American youth. Fred Ho interviews Bill Cole, an African American jazz musician who plays Asian double-reed instruments. This pioneering collection closes with an array of creative writing, including poetry, memoir, and a dialogue about identity and friendship that two writers, one Japanese American and the other African American, have performed around the United States.

    Contributors: Betsy Esch, Diane C. Fujino, royal hartigan, Kim Hewitt, Cheryl Higashida, Fred Ho,

    Everett Hoagland, Robin D. G. Kelley, Bill V. Mullen, David Mura, Ishle Park, Alexs Pate, Thien-bao Thuc Phi, Ishmael Reed, Kalamu Ya Salaam, Maya Almachar Santos, JoYin C. Shih, Ron Wheeler, Daniel Widener, Lisa Yun

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822381174
    Publication Date: 2008-06-04
    contrib-editor: Fred Ho; Bill V. Mullen
    contrib-other: Lisa Li Shen Yun
    copyright-year: 2008
    eisbn: 9780822381174
    illustrations-note: 2 photographs, 5 tables
    isbn-cloth: 9780822342588
    isbn-paper: 9780822342816
    short-abstract:

    A collection of writing on the historical alliances, cultural connections, and shared political strategies linking African Americans and Asian Americans.

    subtitle: Revolutionary Political and Cultural Connections between African Americans and Asian Americans
  • After Life
    Author(s): Hecht, Tobias
    Abstract:

    Bruna Veríssimo, a youth from the hardscrabble streets of Recife, in Northeast Brazil, spoke with Tobias Hecht over the course of many years, reliving her early childhood in a raging and destitute home, her initiation into the world of prostitution at a time when her contemporaries had scarcely started school, and her coming of age against all odds.

    Hecht had originally intended to write a biography of Veríssimo. But with interviews ultimately spanning a decade, he couldn't ignore that much of what he had been told wasn’t, strictly speaking, true. In Veríssimo’s recounting of her life, a sister who had never been born died tragically, while the very same rape that shattered the body and mind of an acquaintance occurred a second time, only with a different victim and several years later. At night, with the anthropologist’s tape recorder in hand, she became her own ethnographer, inventing informants, interviewing herself, and answering in distinct voices.

    With truth impossible to disentangle from invention, Hecht followed the lead of Veríssimo, his would-be informant, creating characters, rendering a tale that didn’t happen but that might have, probing at what it means to translate a life into words.

    A call and response of truth and invention, mental illness and yearning, After Life is a tribute to and reinterpretation of the Latin American testimonio genre. Desire, melancholy, longing, regret, and the hunger to live beyond the confines of past and future meet in this debut novel by Tobias Hecht.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822387725
    Publication Date: 2006-03-15
    contrib-author: Tobias Hecht
    copyright-year: 2006
    eisbn: 9780822387725
    illustrations-note: 17 b&w photos
    isbn-cloth: 9780822337508
    isbn-paper: 9780822337881
    short-abstract:

    Ethnographic novel based on research in Northeast Brazil, centered around interviews with a 17-year old transgendered youth who subsisted on the street for eight years through begging and prostitution.

    subtitle: An Ethnographic Novel
  • After Love
    Author(s): Stout, Noelle M.
    Abstract:

    Focused on the intimate effects of large-scale economic transformations, After Love illuminates the ways that everyday efforts to imagine, resist, and enact market reforms shape sexual desires and subjectivities. Anthropologist Noelle M. Stout arrived in Havana in 2002 to study the widely publicized emergence of gay tolerance in Cuba but discovered that the sex trade was dominating everyday discussions among gays, lesbians, and travestis. Largely eradicated after the Revolution, sex work, including same-sex prostitution, exploded in Havana when the island was opened to foreign tourism in the early 1990s. The booming sex trade led to unprecedented encounters between Cuban gays and lesbians, and straight male sex workers and foreign tourists. As many gay Cuban men in their thirties and forties abandoned relationships with other gay men in favor of intimacies with straight male sex workers, these bonds complicated ideas about "true love" for queer Cubans at large. From openly homophobic hustlers having sex with urban gays for room and board, to lesbians disparaging sex workers but initiating relationships with foreign men for money, to gay tourists espousing communist rhetoric while handing out Calvin Klein bikini briefs, the shifting economic terrain raised fundamental questions about the boundaries between labor and love in late-socialist Cuba.

     

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822376590
    Publication Date: 2014-04-02
    contrib-author: Noelle M. Stout
    copyright-year: 2014
    eisbn: 9780822376590
    illustrations-note: 11 photographs
    isbn-cloth: 9780822356738
    isbn-paper: 9780822356851
    subtitle: Queer Intimacy and Erotic Economies in Post-Soviet Cuba
  • After Sex?
    Author(s): Halley, Janet; Parker, Andrew; Barale, Michèle Aina; Goldberg, Jonathan; Moon, Michael; Sedgwick, Eve Kosofsky
    Abstract:

    Since queer theory originated in the early 1990s, its insights and modes of analysis have been taken up by scholars across the humanities and social sciences. In After Sex? prominent contributors to the development of queer studies offer personal reflections on the field’s history, accomplishments, potential, and limitations. They consider the purpose of queer theory and the extent to which it is or is not defined by its engagement with sex and sexuality. For many of the contributors, a broad notion of sexuality is essential to queer thought. At the same time, some of them caution against creating an all-embracing idea of queerness, because it empties the term “queer” of meaning and assumes the universality of ideas developed in the North American academy. Some essays recall the political urgency of the late 1980s and early 1990s, when gay and lesbian activist and queer theory projects converged in response to the AIDS crisis. Other pieces exemplify more recent trends in queer critique, including the turn to affect and the debates surrounding the “antisocial thesis,” which associates queerness with the repudiation of heteronormative forms of belonging. Contributors discuss queer theory’s engagement with questions of transnationality and globalization, temporality and historical periodization. Meditating on the past and present of queer studies, After Sex? illuminates its future.

    Contributors. Lauren Berlant, Leo Bersani, Michael Cobb, Ann Cvetkovich, Lee Edelman, Richard Thompson Ford, Carla Freccero, Elizabeth Freeman, Jonathan Goldberg, Janet Halley, Neville Hoad, Joseph Litvak, Heather Love, Michael Lucey, Michael Moon, José Esteban Muñoz, Jeff Nunokawa, Andrew Parker, Elizabeth A. Povinelli, Richard Rambuss, Erica Rand, Bethany Schneider, Eve Kosofsky Sedgwick, Kate Thomas

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822393627
    Publication Date: 2010-12-28
    contrib-editor: Janet Halley; Andrew Parker
    contrib-other: Michèle Aina Barale; Jonathan Goldberg; Michael Moon; Eve Kosofsky Sedgwick
    copyright-year: 2011
    eisbn: 9780822393627
    illustrations-note: 2 illustrations
    isbn-cloth: 9780822348863
    isbn-paper: 9780822349099
    series: Series Q
    short-abstract:

    Prominent participants in the development of queer theory explore the field in relation to their own intellectual itineraries, reflecting on its accomplishments, limitations, and critical potential.

    subtitle: On Writing since Queer Theory
  • After Spanish Rule
    Author(s): Thurner, Mark; Guerrero, Andrés; Mignolo, Walter D.; Silverblatt, Irene; Saldívar-Hull, Sonia; Amin, Shahid
    Abstract:

    Insisting on the critical value of Latin American histories for recasting theories of postcolonialism, After Spanish Rule is the first collection of essays by Latin Americanist historians and anthropologists to engage postcolonial debates from the perspective of the Americas. These essays extend and revise the insights of postcolonial studies in diverse Latin American contexts, ranging from the narratives of eighteenth-century travelers and clerics in the region to the status of indigenous intellectuals in present-day Colombia. The editors argue that the construction of an array of singular histories at the intersection of particular colonialisms and nationalisms must become the critical project of postcolonial history-writing.

    Challenging the universalizing tendencies of postcolonial theory as it has developed in the Anglophone academy, the contributors are attentive to the crucial ways in which the histories of Latin American countries—with their creole elites, hybrid middle classes, subordinated ethnic groups, and complicated historical relationships with Spain and the United States—differ from those of other former colonies in the southern hemisphere. Yet, while acknowledging such differences, the volume suggests a host of provocative, critical connections to colonial and postcolonial histories around the world.

    Contributors

    Thomas Abercrombie

    Shahid Amin

    Jorge Cañizares-Esguerra

    Peter Guardino

    Andrés Guerrero

    Marixa Lasso

    Javier Morillo-Alicea

    Joanne Rappaport

    Mauricio Tenorio-Trillo

    Mark Thurner

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822385332
    Publication Date: 2003-10-27
    contrib-editor: Mark Thurner; Andrés Guerrero
    contrib-other: Shahid Amin
    contrib-series-editor: Walter D. Mignolo; Irene Silverblatt; Sonia Saldívar-Hull
    copyright-year: 2003
    eisbn: 9780822385332
    illustrations-note: 5 illustrations
    isbn-cloth: 9780822331575
    isbn-paper: 9780822331940
    series: Latin America Otherwise
    short-abstract:

    The first collection of essays to make a historically grounded, specifically Latin Americanist, intervention in postcolonial studies.

    subtitle: Postcolonial Predicaments of the Americas
  • After the End
    Author(s): Scott, James M.; Crothers, A. Lane; Rosati, Jerel; Twing, Stephen; Jones, Christopher M.
    Abstract:

    In the political landscape emerging from the end of the Cold War, making U.S. foreign policy has become more difficult, due in part to less clarity and consensus about threats and interests. In After the End James M. Scott brings together a group of scholars to explore the changing international situation since 1991 and to examine the characteristics and patterns of policy making that are emerging in response to a post–Cold War world.

    These essays examine the recent efforts of U.S. policymakers to recast the roles, interests, and purposes of the United States both at home and abroad in a political environment where policy making has become increasingly decentralized and democratized. The contributors suggest that foreign policy leadership has shifted from White House and executive branch dominance to an expanded group of actors that includes the president, Congress, the foreign policy bureaucracy, interest groups, the media, and the public. The volume includes case studies that focus on China, Russia, Bosnia, Somalia, democracy promotion, foreign aid, and NAFTA. Together, these chapters describe how policy making after 1991 compares to that of other periods and suggest how foreign policy will develop in the future.

    This collection provides a broad, balanced evaluation of U.S. foreign policy making in the post–Cold War setting for scholars, teachers, and students of U.S. foreign policy, political science, history, and international studies.

    Contributors. Ralph G. Carter, Richard Clark, A. Lane Crothers, I. M. Destler, Ole R. Holsti, Steven W. Hook, Christopher M. Jones, James M. McCormick, Jerel Rosati, Jeremy Rosner, John T. Rourke, Renee G. Scherlen, Peter J. Schraeder, James M. Scott, Jennifer Sterling-Folker, Rick Travis, Stephen Twing

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822382157
    Publication Date: 1998-12-31
    contrib-editor: James M. Scott
    contrib-other: A. Lane Crothers; Jerel Rosati; Stephen Twing; Christopher M. Jones
    copyright-year: 1998
    eisbn: 9780822382157
    illustrations-note: 15 tables, 7 figures
    isbn-cloth: 9780822321347
    isbn-paper: 9780822322665
    short-abstract:

    Investigates the international and domestic political landscapes in order to understand the constraints and imperatives of U.S. post-Cold War foreign policy.

    subtitle: Making U.S. Foreign Policy in the Post-Cold War World
  • After the Imperial Turn
    Author(s): Burton, Antoinette; Pennybacker, Susan D.; Ward, Stuart; Streets, Heather; Curthoys, Ann
    Abstract:

    From a variety of historically grounded perspectives, After the Imperial Turn assesses the fate of the nation as a subject of disciplinary inquiry. In light of the turn toward scholarship focused on imperialism and postcolonialism, this provocative collection investigates whether the nation remains central, adequate, or even possible as an analytical category for studying history. These twenty essays, primarily by historians, exemplify cultural approaches to histories of nationalism and imperialism even as they critically examine the implications of such approaches.

    While most of the contributors discuss British imperialism and its repercussions, the volume also includes, as counterpoints, essays on the history and historiography of France, Germany, Spain, and the United States. Whether looking at the history of the passport or the teaching of history from a postnational perspective, this collection explores such vexed issues as how historians might resist the seduction of national narratives, what—if anything—might replace the nation’s hegemony, and how even history-writing that interrogates the idea of the nation remains ideologically and methodologically indebted to national narratives. Placing nation-based studies in international and interdisciplinary contexts, After the Imperial Turn points toward ways of writing history and analyzing culture attentive both to the inadequacies and endurance of the nation as an organizing rubric.

    Contributors. Tony Ballantyne, Antoinette Burton, Ann Curthoys, Augusto Espiritu, Karen Fang, Ian Christopher Fletcher, Robert Gregg, Terri Hasseler, Clement Hawes, Douglas M. Haynes, Kristin Hoganson, Paula Krebs, Lara Kriegel, Radhika Viyas Mongia, Susan Pennybacker, John Plotz, Christopher Schmidt-Nowara, Heather Streets, Hsu-Ming Teo, Stuart Ward, Lora Wildenthal, Gary Wilder

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822384397
    Publication Date: 2003-05-08
    contrib-other: Antoinette Burton; Susan D. Pennybacker; Stuart Ward; Heather Streets; Ann Curthoys
    copyright-year: 2003
    eisbn: 9780822384397
    isbn-cloth: 9780822331063
    isbn-paper: 9780822331421
    short-abstract:

    Essays in this collection assess "the nation" as a subject of disciplinary inquiry, considering both its enduring relevance and its inadequacy as an analytical category for studying history, literature, and culture.

    subtitle: Thinking with and through the Nation
  • Against Normalization
    Author(s): O'Brien, Anthony; Fish, Stanley; Jameson, Fredric
    Abstract:

    At the end of apartheid, under pressure from local and transnational capital and the hegemony of Western-style parliamentary democracy, South Africans felt called upon to normalize their conceptions of economics, politics, and culture in line with these Western models. In Against Normalization, however, Anthony O’Brien examines recent South African literature and theoretical debate which take a different line, resisting this neocolonial outcome, and investigating the role of culture in the formation of a more radically democratic society.

    O’Brien brings together an unusual array of contemporary South African writing: cultural theory and debate, worker poetry, black and white feminist writing, Black Consciousness drama, the letters of exiled writers, and postapartheid fiction and film. Paying subtle attention to well-known figures like Nadine Gordimer, Bessie Head, and Njabulo Ndebele, but also foregrounding less-studied writers like Ingrid de Kok, Nise Malange, Maishe Maponya, and the Zimbabwean Dambudzo Marechera, he reveals in their work the construction of a political aesthetic more radically democratic than the current normalization of nationalism, ballot-box democracy, and liberal humanism in culture could imagine. Juxtaposing his readings of these writers with the theoretical traditions of postcolonial thinkers about race, gender, and nation like Paul Gilroy, bell hooks, and Gayatri Spivak, and with others such as Samuel Beckett and Vaclav Havel, O’Brien adopts a uniquely comparatist and internationalist approach to understanding South African writing and its relationship to the cultural settlement after apartheid.

    With its appeal to specialists in South African fiction, poetry, history, and politics, to other Africanists, and to those in the fields of colonial, postcolonial, race, and gender studies, Against Normalization will make a significant intervention in the debates about cultural production in the postcolonial areas of global capitalism.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822380634
    Publication Date: 2001-03-23
    contrib-author: Anthony O'Brien
    contrib-series-editor: Stanley Fish; Fredric Jameson
    copyright-year: 2001
    eisbn: 9780822380634
    isbn-cloth: 9780822325529
    isbn-paper: 9780822325710
    series: Post-Contemporary Interventions
    short-abstract:

    A literary study of South African cultural changes since the end of apartheid from 1980 to present.

    subtitle: Writing Radical Democracy in South Africa
  • Against the Closet
    Author(s): Abdur-Rahman, Aliyyah
    Abstract:

    In Against the Closet, Aliyyah I. Abdur-Rahman interrogates and challenges cultural theorists' interpretations of sexual transgression in African American literature. She argues that, from the mid-nineteenth century through the twentieth, black writers used depictions of erotic transgression to contest popular theories of identity, pathology, national belonging, and racial difference in American culture. Connecting metaphors of sexual transgression to specific historical periods, Abdur-Rahman explains how tropes such as sadomasochism and incest illuminated the psychodynamics of particular racial injuries and suggested forms of social repair and political redress from the time of slavery, through post-Reconstruction and the civil rights and black power movements, to the late twentieth century.

    Abdur-Rahman brings black feminist, psychoanalytic, critical race, and poststructuralist theories to bear on literary genres from slave narratives to science fiction. Analyzing works by African American writers, including Frederick Douglass, Pauline Hopkins, Harriet Jacobs, James Baldwin, and Octavia Butler, she shows how literary representations of transgressive sexuality expressed the longings of African Americans for individual and collective freedom. Abdur-Rahman contends that those representations were fundamental to the development of African American forms of literary expression and modes of political intervention and cultural self-fashioning.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822391883
    Publication Date: 2012-08-21
    contrib-author: Aliyyah Abdur-Rahman
    copyright-year: 2012
    eisbn: 9780822391883
    illustrations-note: 1 illustration
    isbn-cloth: 9780822352242
    isbn-paper: 9780822352419
    short-abstract:

    Aliyyah I. Abdur-Rahman argues that from the mid-nineteenth century through the twentieth, black writers used depictions of transgressive sexuality to express African Americans' longings for individual and collective freedom.

    subtitle: identity, political longing, and black figuration
  • Against War
    Author(s): Maldonado-Torres, Nelson; Mignolo, Walter D.; Silverblatt, Irene; Saldívar-Hull, Sonia
    Abstract:

    Nelson Maldonado-Torres argues that European modernity has become inextricable from the experience of the warrior and conqueror. In Against War, he develops a powerful critique of modernity, and he offers a critical response combining ethics, political theory, and ideas rooted in Christian and Jewish thought. Maldonado-Torres focuses on the perspectives of those who inhabit the underside of western modernity, particularly Jewish, black, and Latin American theorists. He analyzes the works of the Jewish Lithuanian-French philosopher and religious thinker Emmanuel Levinas, the Martiniquean psychiatrist and political thinker Frantz Fanon, and the Catholic Argentinean-Mexican philosopher, historian, and theologian Enrique Dussel.

    Considering Levinas’s critique of French liberalism and Nazi racial politics, and the links between them, Maldonado-Torres identifies a “master morality” of dominion and control at the heart of western modernity. This master morality constitutes the center of a warring paradigm that inspires and legitimizes racial policies, imperial projects, and wars of invasion. Maldonado-Torres refines the description of modernity’s war paradigm and the Levinasian critique through Fanon’s phenomenology of the colonized and racial self and the politics of decolonization, which he reinterprets in light of the Levinasian conception of ethics. Drawing on Dussel’s genealogy of the modern imperial and warring self, Maldonado-Torres theorizes race as the naturalization of war’s death ethic. He offers decolonial ethics and politics as an antidote to modernity’s master morality and the paradigm of war. Against War advances the de-colonial turn, showing how theory and ethics cannot be conceived without politics, and how they all need to be oriented by the imperative of decolonization in the modern/colonial and postmodern world.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822388999
    Publication Date: 2008-03-19
    contrib-author: Nelson Maldonado-Torres
    contrib-series-editor: Walter D. Mignolo; Irene Silverblatt; Sonia Saldívar-Hull
    copyright-year: 2008
    eisbn: 9780822388999
    isbn-cloth: 9780822341468
    isbn-paper: 9780822341703
    series: Latin America Otherwise
    short-abstract:

    An analysis of Western attitudes toward war from a subaltern perspective that brings new insights into Western philosophical paradigms.

    subtitle: Views from the Underside of Modernity
  • Airborne Dreams
    Author(s): Yano, Christine R.
    Abstract:

    In 1955 Pan American World Airways began recruiting Japanese American women to work as stewardesses on its Tokyo-bound flights and eventually its round-the-world flights as well. Based in Honolulu, these women were informally known as Pan Am’s “Nisei”—second-generation Japanese Americans—even though not all of them were Japanese American or second-generation. They were ostensibly hired for their Japanese-language skills, but few spoke Japanese fluently. This absorbing account of Pan Am’s “Nisei” stewardess program suggests that the Japanese American (and later other Asian and Asian American) stewardesses were meant to enhance the airline’s image of exotic cosmopolitanism and worldliness. As its corporate archives demonstrate, Pan Am marketed itself as an iconic American company pioneering new frontiers of race, language, and culture. Christine R. Yano juxtaposes the airline’s strategies and practices with the recollections of former “Nisei” flight attendants. In interviews with the author, these women proudly recall their experiences as young women who left home to travel the globe with Pan American World Airways, forging their own cosmopolitan identities in the process. Airborne Dreams is the story of an unusual personnel program implemented by an American corporation intent on expanding and dominating the nascent market for international air travel. That program reflected the Jet Age dreams of global mobility that excited postwar Americans, as well as the inequalities of gender, class, race, and ethnicity that constrained many of them.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822393368
    Publication Date: 2011-01-04
    contrib-author: Christine R. Yano
    copyright-year: 2011
    eisbn: 9780822393368
    illustrations-note: 12 photographs
    isbn-cloth: 9780822348368
    isbn-paper: 9780822348504
    short-abstract:

    An account of Pan Am s Nisei stewardess program (1955–1972), through which the airline hired Japanese American (and later other Asian and Asian American) stewardesses, ostensibly for their Asian-language skills.

    subtitle: “Nisei” Stewardesses and Pan American World Airways
  • Aircraft Stories
    Author(s): Law, John; Smith, Barbara Herrnstein; Weintraub, E. Roy
    Abstract:

    In Aircraft Stories noted sociologist of technoscience John Law tells “stories” about a British attempt to build a military aircraft—the TSR2. The intertwining of these stories demonstrates the ways in which particular technological projects can be understood in a world of complex contexts.Law works to upset the binary between the modernist concept of knowledge, subjects, and objects as having centered and concrete essences and the postmodernist notion that all is fragmented and centerless. The structure and content of Aircraft Stories reflect Law’s contention that knowledge, subjects, and—particularly— objects are “fractionally coherent”: that is, they are drawn together without necessarily being centered. In studying the process of this particular aircraft’s design, construction, and eventual cancellation, Law develops a range of metaphors to describe both its fractional character and the ways its various aspects interact with each other. Offering numerous insights into the way we theorize the working of systems, he explores the overlaps between singularity and multiplicity and reveals rich new meaning in such concepts as oscillation, interference, fractionality, and rhizomatic networks.

    The methodology and insights of Aircraft Stories will be invaluable to students in science and technology studies and will engage others who are interested in the ways that contemporary paradigms have limited our ability to see objects in their true complexity.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822383543
    Publication Date: 2002-04-03
    contrib-author: John Law
    contrib-series-editor: Barbara Herrnstein Smith; E. Roy Weintraub
    copyright-year: 2002
    eisbn: 9780822383543
    illustrations-note: 23 illustrations
    isbn-cloth: 9780822328124
    isbn-paper: 9780822328247
    series: Science and Cultural Theory
    short-abstract:

    A case study of a large military aircraft (TSR 2 from British Aircraft Corporation) which explores modernism and postmodernism and how we might think past the limits that these set to our ways of thinking.

    subtitle: Decentering the Object in Technoscience
  • Alien Encounters
    Author(s): Nguyen, Mimi Thi; Tu, Thuy Linh Nguyen; Tu, Thuy Linh Nguyen; Fellezs, Kevin
    Abstract:

    Alien Encounters showcases innovative directions in Asian American cultural studies. In essays exploring topics ranging from pulp fiction to multimedia art to import-car subcultures, contributors analyze Asian Americans’ interactions with popular culture as both creators and consumers. Written by a new generation of cultural critics, these essays reflect post-1965 Asian America; the contributors pay nuanced attention to issues of gender, sexuality, transnationality, and citizenship, and they unabashedly take pleasure in pop culture.

    This interdisciplinary collection brings together contributors working in Asian American studies, English, anthropology, sociology, and art history. They consider issues of cultural authenticity raised by Asian American participation in hip hop and jazz, the emergence of an orientalist “Indo-chic” in U.S. youth culture, and the circulation of Vietnamese music variety shows. They examine the relationship between Chinese restaurants and American culture, issues of sexuality and race brought to the fore in the video performance art of a Bruce Lee–channeling drag king, and immigrant television viewers’ dismayed reactions to a Chinese American chef who is “not Chinese enough.” The essays in Alien Encounters demonstrate the importance of scholarly engagement with popular culture. Taking popular culture seriously reveals how people imagine and express their affective relationships to history, identity, and belonging.

    Contributors. Wendy Hui Kyong Chun, Kevin Fellezs, Vernadette Vicuña Gonzalez, Joan Kee, Nhi T. Lieu, Sunaina Maira, Martin F. Manalansan IV, Mimi Thi Nguyen, Robyn Magalit Rodriguez, Sukhdev Sandhu, Christopher A. Shinn, Indigo Som, Thuy Linh Nguyen Tu, Oliver Wang

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822389835
    Publication Date: 2007-03-27
    contrib-editor: Mimi Thi Nguyen; Thuy Linh Nguyen Tu; Thuy Linh Nguyen Tu
    contrib-other: Kevin Fellezs
    copyright-year: 2007
    eisbn: 9780822389835
    illustrations-note: 16 b&w illustrations, 1 table
    isbn-cloth: 9780822339106
    isbn-paper: 9780822339229
    short-abstract:

    A collection of essays that examine the production and consumption of Asian American popular culture, from musical expression to television cooking shows.

    subtitle: Popular Culture in Asian America
  • Alimentary Tracts
    Author(s): Roy, Parama; Grewal, Inderpal; Kaplan, Caren; Wiegman, Robyn
    Abstract:

    In Alimentary Tracts Parama Roy argues that who eats and with whom, who starves, and what is rejected as food are questions fundamental to empire, decolonization, and globalization. In crucial ways, she suggests, colonialism reconfigured the sensorium of colonizer and colonized, generating novel experiences of desire, taste, and appetite as well as new technologies of the embodied self. For colonizers, Indian nationalists, diasporic persons, and others in the colonial and postcolonial world orders, the alimentary tract functioned as an important corporeal, psychoaffective, and ethicopolitical contact zone, in which questions of identification, desire, difference, and responsibility were staged.

    Interpreting texts that have addressed cooking, dining, taste, hungers, excesses, and aversions in South Asia and its diaspora since the mid-nineteenth century, Roy relates historical events and literary figures to tropes of disgust, abstention, dearth, and appetite. She analyzes the fears of pollution and deprivation conveyed in British accounts of the so-called Mutiny of 1857, complicates understandings of Mohandas K. Gandhi’s vegetarianism, examines the “famine fictions” of the novelist-actor Mahasweta Devi, and reflects on the diasporic cookbooks and screen performances of Madhur Jaffrey. This account of richly visceral global modernity furnishes readers with a new idiom for understanding historical action and cultural transformation.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822393146
    Publication Date: 2010-10-18
    contrib-author: Parama Roy
    contrib-series-editor: Inderpal Grewal; Caren Kaplan; Robyn Wiegman
    copyright-year: 2010
    eisbn: 9780822393146
    isbn-cloth: 9780822347880
    isbn-paper: 9780822348023
    series: Next Wave: New Directions in Women's Studies
    short-abstract:

    Interpreting South Asian and diasporic texts, Parama Roy argues that who eats and with whom, who starves, and what is rejected as food are questions fundamental to empire, decolonization, and globalization.

    subtitle: Appetites, Aversions, and the Postcolonial
  • All in the Family
    Author(s): Ferguson, Kennan
    Abstract:

    Western political philosophers since Plato have used the family as a model for harmonious political and social relations. Yet, far from being an uncontentious domain for shared interests and common values, the family is often the scene of intense interpersonal conflict and disagreement. In All in the Family, the political theorist Kennan Ferguson reconsiders the family, in its varied forms, as an exemplar of democratic politics and suggests how real rather than idealized family dynamics can help us to better understand and navigate political conflict.

    By closely observing the attachments that arise in families despite profound disagreements and incommensurabilities, Ferguson argues, we can imagine a political engagement that accommodates radical differences without sacrificing community. After examining how the concept of the family has been deployed and misused in political philosophy, Ferguson turns to the ways in which families actually operate: the macropolitical significance of family coping strategies such as silence and the impact that disability and caregiving have on conceptions of spatiality, sameness, and disparity. He also considers the emotional attachment between humans and their pets as an acknowledgment that compassion and community can exist even under conditions of profound difference.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822395102
    Publication Date: 2012-06-05
    contrib-author: Kennan Ferguson
    copyright-year: 2012
    eisbn: 9780822395102
    isbn-cloth: 9780822351764
    isbn-paper: 9780822351900
    short-abstract:

    Ferguson starts with the commonplace assumption within political philosophy that the family provides the ideal model for political association. Yet families are not necessarily harmonious units. Ferguson takes up several situations to think about how familial attachments can offer insight into the creation of a pluralistic and democratic society.

    subtitle: On Community and Incommensurability
  • Aloha America
    Author(s): Imada, Adria L.
    Abstract:

    Winner, 2013 Best First Book in Women's, Gender, and/or Sexuality History by the Berkshire Conference of Women HistoriansWinner, 2013 Lawrence W. Levine Award, Organization of American HistoriansWinner, 2013 Congress on Research in Dance Outstanding Publication AwardAloha America reveals the role of hula in legitimating U.S. imperial ambitions in Hawai'i. Hula performers began touring throughout the continental United States and Europe in the late nineteenth century. These "hula circuits" introduced hula, and Hawaiians, to U.S. audiences, establishing an "imagined intimacy," a powerful fantasy that enabled Americans to possess their colony physically and symbolically. Meanwhile, in the early years of American imperialism in the Pacific, touring hula performers incorporated veiled critiques of U.S. expansionism into their productions.

    At vaudeville theaters, international expositions, commercial nightclubs, and military bases, Hawaiian women acted as ambassadors of aloha, enabling Americans to imagine Hawai'i as feminine and benign, and the relation between colonizer and colonized as mutually desired. By the 1930s, Hawaiian culture, particularly its music and hula, had enormous promotional value. In the 1940s, thousands of U.S. soldiers and military personnel in Hawai'i were entertained by hula performances, many of which were filmed by military photographers. Yet, as Adria L. Imada shows, Hawaiians also used hula as a means of cultural survival and countercolonial political praxis. In Aloha America, Imada focuses on the years between the 1890s and the 1960s, examining little-known performances and films before turning to the present-day reappropriation of hula by the Hawaiian self-determination movement.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822395164
    Publication Date: 2012-07-09
    contrib-author: Adria L. Imada
    copyright-year: 2012
    eisbn: 9780822395164
    illustrations-note: 80 illustrations
    isbn-cloth: 9780822351962
    isbn-paper: 9780822352075
    short-abstract:

    Paying particular attention to hula performances that toured throughout the U.S. beginning in the late nineteenth century, Adria L. Imada investigates the role of hula in the American colonization of Hawai'i.

    subtitle: Hula Circuits through the U.S. Empire
  • Aloha Betrayed
    Author(s): Silva, Noenoe K.; Joseph, Gilbert M.; Rosenberg, Emily S.
    Abstract:

    In 1897, as a white oligarchy made plans to allow the United States to annex Hawai'i, native Hawaiians organized a massive petition drive to protest. Ninety-five percent of the native population signed the petition, causing the annexation treaty to fail in the U.S. Senate. This event was unknown to many contemporary Hawaiians until Noenoe K. Silva rediscovered the petition in the process of researching this book. With few exceptions, histories of Hawai'i have been based exclusively on English-language sources. They have not taken into account the thousands of pages of newspapers, books, and letters written in the mother tongue of native Hawaiians. By rigorously analyzing many of these documents, Silva fills a crucial gap in the historical record. In so doing, she refutes the long-held idea that native Hawaiians passively accepted the erosion of their culture and loss of their nation, showing that they actively resisted political, economic, linguistic, and cultural domination. Drawing on Hawaiian-language texts, primarily newspapers produced in the nineteenth century and early twentieth, Silva demonstrates that print media was central to social communication, political organizing, and the perpetuation of Hawaiian language and culture. A powerful critique of colonial historiography, Aloha Betrayed provides a much-needed history of native Hawaiian resistance to American imperialism.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822386223
    Publication Date: 2004-08-17
    contrib-author: Noenoe K. Silva
    contrib-series-editor: Gilbert M. Joseph; Emily S. Rosenberg
    copyright-year: 2004
    eisbn: 9780822386223
    illustrations-note: 13 illus., 2 tables
    isbn-cloth: 9780822333500
    isbn-paper: 9780822333494
    series: a John Hope Franklin Center Book
    short-abstract:

    An historical account of native Hawaiian encounters with and resistance to American colonialism, based on little-read Hawaiian-language sources.

    subtitle: Native Hawaiian Resistance to American Colonialism
  • Alone Before God
    Author(s): Voekel, Pamela
    Abstract:

    Focusing on cemetery burials in late-eighteenth-century Mexico, Alone Before God provides a window onto the contested origins of modernity in Mexico. By investigating the religious and political debates surrounding the initiative to transfer the burials of prominent citizens from urban to suburban cemeteries, Pamela Voekel challenges the characterization of Catholicism in Mexico as an intractable and monolithic institution that had to be forcibly dragged into the modern world.

    Drawing on the archival research of wills, public documents, and other texts from late-colonial and early-republican Mexico, Voekel describes the marked scaling-down of the pomp and display that had characterized baroque Catholic burials and the various devices through which citizens sought to safeguard their souls in the afterlife. In lieu of these baroque practices, the new enlightened Catholics, claims Voekel, expressed a spiritually and hygienically motivated preference for extremely simple burial ceremonies, for burial outside the confines of the church building, and for leaving their earthly goods to charity. Claiming that these changes mirrored a larger shift from an external, corporate Catholicism to a more interior piety, she demonstrates how this new form of Catholicism helped to initiate a cultural and epistemic shift that placed the individual at the center of knowledge.

    Breaking with the traditional historiography to argue that Mexican liberalism had deeply religious roots, Alone Before God will be of interest to specialists in Latin American history, modernity, and religion.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822384298
    Publication Date: 2002-08-09
    contrib-author: Pamela Voekel
    copyright-year: 2002
    eisbn: 9780822384298
    isbn-cloth: 9780822329275
    isbn-paper: 9780822329435
    short-abstract:

    Posits an underlying religious impetus for modernity in Mexico, claiming that the Catholic Church nursed a reform movement that ultimately effected many of the same changes as the Protestant Reformation.

    subtitle: The Religious Origins of Modernity in Mexico
  • Alternative Medicine
    Author(s): Campo, Rafael
    Abstract:

    In his sixth collection of poetry, the celebrated poet-physician Rafael Campo examines the primal relationship between language, empathy, and healing. As masterfully crafted as they are viscerally powerful, these poems propose voice itself as a kind of therapeutic medium. For all that most ails us, Alternative Medicine offers the balm of song and the salve of the imagination: from the wounds of our stubborn differences of identity, to the pain of alienation in a world of unfeeling technologies, to the shame of the persistent injustices in our society, Campo's poetry displays a deep understanding of hurt as the possibility for healing. Demonstrating an abiding faith in our survival, this stunning, heartfelt book ultimately embraces the great diversity of our ways of knowing and dreaming, of needing and loving, and of living and dying.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822377139
    Publication Date: 2013-10-02
    contrib-author: Rafael Campo
    copyright-year: 2013
    eisbn: 9780822377139
    isbn-cloth: 9780822355731
    isbn-paper: 9780822355878
    short-abstract:

    In this new collection of poetry, the acclaimed gay Latino physician author Rafael Campo continues his nuanced examination of the primal relationship between language, empathy, and healing.

    subtitle:
  • Althusser and His Contemporaries
    Author(s): Montag, Warren
    Abstract:

    Althusser and His Contemporaries alters and expands understanding of Louis Althusser and French philosophy of the 1960s and 1970s. Thousands of pages of previously unpublished work from different periods of Althusser's career have been made available in French since his death in 1990. Based on meticulous study of the philosopher's posthumous publications, as well as his unpublished manuscripts, lecture notes, letters, and marginalia, Warren Montag provides a thoroughgoing reevaluation of Althusser's philosophical project. Montag shows that the theorist was intensely engaged with the work of his contemporaries, particularly Foucault, Derrida, Deleuze, and Lacan. Examining Althusser's philosophy as a series of encounters with his peers' thought, Montag contends that Althusser's major philosophical confrontations revolved around three themes: structure, subject, and beginnings and endings. Reading Althusser reading his contemporaries, Montag sheds new light on structuralism, poststructuralism, and the extraordinary moment of French thought in the 1960s and 1970s.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822399049
    Publication Date: 2013-04-15
    contrib-author: Warren Montag
    copyright-year: 2013
    eisbn: 9780822399049
    isbn-cloth: 9780822353867
    isbn-paper: 9780822354000
    series: Post-Contemporary Interventions
    short-abstract:

    This thoroughgoing reevaluation of Louis Althusser's philosophical project shows that the theorist was intensely engaged with the work of his contemporaries, particularly Foucault, Derrida, Deleuze, and Lacan.

    subtitle: Philosophy’s Perpetual War
  • Always More Than One
    Author(s): Manning, Erin
    Abstract:

    In Always More Than One, the philosopher, visual artist, and dancer Erin Manning explores the concept of the "more than human" in the context of movement, perception, and experience. Working from Whitehead's process philosophy and Simondon's theory of individuation, she extends the concepts of movement and relation developed in her earlier work toward the notion of "choreographic thinking." Here, she uses choreographic thinking to explore a mode of perception prior to the settling of experience into established categories. Manning connects this to the concept of "autistic perception," described by autistics as the awareness of a relational field prior to the so-called neurotypical tendency to "chunk" experience into predetermined subjects and objects. Autistics explain that, rather than immediately distinguishing objects—such as chairs and tables and humans—from one another on entering a given environment, they experience the environment as gradually taking form. Manning maintains that this mode of awareness underlies all perception. What we perceive is never first a subject or an object, but an ecology. From this vantage point, she proposes that we consider an ecological politics where movement and relation take precedence over predefined categories, such as the neurotypical and the neurodiverse, or the human and the nonhuman. What would it mean to embrace an ecological politics of collective individuation?

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822395829
    Publication Date: 2012-12-20
    contrib-author: Erin Manning
    copyright-year: 2012
    eisbn: 9780822395829
    illustrations-note: 33 illustrations
    isbn-cloth: 9780822353331
    isbn-paper: 9780822353348
    short-abstract:

    The philosopher, visual artist, and dancer Erin Manning explores the concept of the "more than human" in the context of movement, perception, and experience.

    subtitle: Individuation’s Dance
  • Ambient Television
    Author(s): McCarthy, Anna
    Abstract:

    Although we tend to think of television primarily as a household fixture, TV monitors outside the home are widespread: in bars, laundromats, and stores; conveying flight arrival and departure times in airports; uniting crowds at sports events and allaying boredom in waiting rooms; and helping to pass the time in workplaces of all kinds. In Ambient Television Anna McCarthy explores the significance of this pervasive phenomenon, tracing the forms of conflict, commerce, and community that television generates outside the home.

    Discussing the roles television has played in different institutions from 1945 to the present day, McCarthy draws on a wide array of sources. These include retail merchandising literature, TV industry trade journals, and journalistic discussions of public viewing, as well as the work of cultural geographers, architectural theorists, media scholars, and anthropologists. She also uses photography as a research tool, documenting the uses and meanings of television sets in the built environment, and focuses on such locations as the tavern and the department store to show how television is used to support very different ideas about gender, class, and consumption. Turning to contemporary examples, McCarthy discusses practices such as Turner Private Networks’ efforts to transform waiting room populations into advertising audiences and the use of point-of-sale video that influences brand visibility and consumer behavior. Finally, she inquires into the activist potential of out-of-home television through a discussion of the video practices of two contemporary artists in everyday public settings.

    Scholars and students of cultural, visual, urban, American, film, and television studies will be interested in this thought-provoking, interdisciplinary book.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822383130
    Publication Date: 2001-02-23
    contrib-author: Anna McCarthy
    copyright-year: 2001
    eisbn: 9780822383130
    illustrations-note: 32 b&w photographs, 15 figures
    isbn-cloth: 9780822326830
    isbn-paper: 9780822326922
    series: Console-ing Passions
    short-abstract:

    Examines the role of television in public space at different points in the history of the medium and how that differs from the normal assumptions of domestic viewing space.

    subtitle: Visual Culture and Public Space
  • American Empire and the Politics of Meaning
    Author(s): Go, Julian; Adams, Julia; Steinmetz, George
    Abstract:

    When the United States took control of the Philippines and Puerto Rico in the wake of the Spanish-American War, it declared that it would transform its new colonies through lessons in self-government and the ways of American-style democracy. In both territories, U.S. colonial officials built extensive public school systems, and they set up American-style elections and governmental institutions. The officials aimed their lessons in democratic government at the political elite: the relatively small class of the wealthy, educated, and politically powerful within each colony. While they retained ultimate control for themselves, the Americans let the elite vote, hold local office, and formulate legislation in national assemblies.

    American Empire and the Politics of Meaning is an examination of how these efforts to provide the elite of Puerto Rico and the Philippines a practical education in self-government played out on the ground in the early years of American colonial rule, from 1898 until 1912. It is the first systematic comparative analysis of these early exercises in American imperial power. The sociologist Julian Go unravels how American authorities used “culture” as both a tool and a target of rule, and how the Puerto Rican and Philippine elite received, creatively engaged, and sometimes silently subverted the Americans’ ostensibly benign intentions. Rather than finding that the attempt to transplant American-style democracy led to incommensurable “culture clashes,” Go assesses complex processes of cultural accommodation and transformation. By combining rich historical detail with broader theories of meaning, culture, and colonialism, he provides an innovative study of the hidden intersections of political power and cultural meaning-making in America’s earliest overseas empire.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822389323
    Publication Date: 2008-02-22
    contrib-author: Julian Go
    contrib-series-editor: Julia Adams; George Steinmetz
    copyright-year: 2007
    eisbn: 9780822389323
    illustrations-note: 14 tables, 3 figures
    isbn-cloth: 9780822342113
    isbn-paper: 9780822342298
    series: Politics, History, and Culture
    short-abstract:

    An assessment of Americans efforts to provide the elite of Puerto Rico and the Philippines an education in self-government in the early years of U.S. colonial rule.

    subtitle: Elite Political Cultures in the Philippines and Puerto Rico during U.S. Colonialism
  • America’s Miracle Man in Vietnam
    Author(s): Jacobs, Seth; Joseph, Gilbert M.; Rosenberg, Emily S.
    Abstract:

    America’s Miracle Man in Vietnam rethinks the motivations behind one of the most ruinous foreign-policy decisions of the postwar era: America’s commitment to preserve an independent South Vietnam under the premiership of Ngo Dinh Diem. The so-called Diem experiment is usually ascribed to U.S. anticommunism and an absence of other candidates for South Vietnam’s highest office. Challenging those explanations, Seth Jacobs utilizes religion and race as categories of analysis to argue that the alliance with Diem cannot be understood apart from America’s mid-century religious revival and policymakers’ perceptions of Asians. Jacobs contends that Diem’s Catholicism and the extent to which he violated American notions of “Oriental” passivity and moral laxity made him a more attractive ally to Washington than many non-Christian South Vietnamese with greater administrative experience and popular support.

    A diplomatic and cultural history, America’s Miracle Man in Vietnam draws on government archives, presidential libraries, private papers, novels, newspapers, magazines, movies, and television and radio broadcasts. Jacobs shows in detail how, in the 1950s, U.S. policymakers conceived of Cold War anticommunism as a crusade in which Americans needed to combine with fellow Judeo-Christians against an adversary dangerous as much for its atheism as for its military might. He describes how racist assumptions that Asians were culturally unready for democratic self-government predisposed Americans to excuse Diem’s dictatorship as necessary in “the Orient.” By focusing attention on the role of American religious and racial ideologies, Jacobs makes a crucial contribution to our understanding of the disastrous commitment of the United States to “sink or swim with Ngo Dinh Diem.”

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822386087
    Publication Date: 2005-01-06
    contrib-author: Seth Jacobs
    contrib-series-editor: Gilbert M. Joseph; Emily S. Rosenberg
    copyright-year: 2004
    eisbn: 9780822386087
    illustrations-note: 28 b&w photos
    isbn-cloth: 9780822334293
    isbn-paper: 9780822334408
    series: American Encounters/Global Interactions
    short-abstract:

    Argues that American cultural conceptions of religion and race during the 1950s played a crucial role in framing an ideology through which U.S. policymakers understood their options in Vietnam.

    subtitle: Ngo Dinh Diem, Religion, Race, and U.S. Intervention in Southeast Asia
  • An Absent Presence
    Author(s): Simpson, Caroline Chung
    Abstract:

    There have been many studies on the forced relocation and internment of nearly 120,000 Japanese Americans during World War II. But An Absent Presence is the first to focus on how popular representations of this unparalleled episode in U.S. history affected the formation of Cold War culture. Caroline Chung Simpson shows how the portrayal of this economic and social disenfranchisement haunted—and even shaped—the expression of American race relations and national identity throughout the middle of the twentieth century.

    Simpson argues that when popular journals or social theorists engaged the topic of Japanese American history or identity in the Cold War era they did so in a manner that tended to efface or diminish the complexity of their political and historical experience. As a result, the shadowy figuration of Japanese American identity often took on the semblance of an “absent presence.” Individual chapters feature such topics as the case of the alleged Tokyo Rose, the Hiroshima Maidens Project, and Japanese war brides. Drawing on issues of race, gender, and nation, Simpson connects the internment episode to broader themes of postwar American culture, including the atomic bomb, McCarthyism, the crises of racial integration, and the anxiety over middle-class gender roles.

    By recapturing and reexamining these vital flashpoints in the projection of Japanese American identity, Simpson fills a critical and historical void in a number of fields including Asian American studies, American studies, and Cold War history.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822380832
    Publication Date: 2001-12-17
    contrib-author: Caroline Chung Simpson
    copyright-year: 2001
    eisbn: 9780822380832
    illustrations-note: 4 b&w photos
    isbn-cloth: 9780822327561
    isbn-paper: 9780822327462
    series: New Americanists
    short-abstract:

    Discusses the social and political disenfranchisement of Japanese Americans after WWII.

    subtitle: Japanese Americans in Postwar American Culture, 1945–1960
  • An Account of the Antiquities of the Indians
    Author(s): Pané, Fray Ramon; Arrom, José Juan; Griswold, Susan
    Abstract:

    Accompanying Columbus on his second voyage to the New World in 1494 was a young Spanish friar named Ramón Pané. The friar’s assignment was to live among the “Indians” whom Columbus had “discovered” on the island of Hispaniola (today the island shared by Haiti and the Dominican Republic), to learn their language, and to write a record of their lives and beliefs. While the culture of these indigenous people—who came to be known as the Taíno—is now extinct, the written record completed by Pané around 1498 has survived. This volume makes Pané’s landmark Account—the first book written in a European language on American soil—available in an annotated English edition.

    Edited by the noted Hispanist José Juan Arrom, Pané’s report is the only surviving direct source of information about the myths, ceremonies, and lives of the New World inhabitants whom Columbus first encountered. The friar’s text contains many linguistic and cultural observations, including descriptions of the Taíno people’s healing rituals and their beliefs about their souls after death. Pané provides the first known description of the use of the hallucinogen cohoba, and he recounts the use of idols in ritual ceremonies. The names, functions, and attributes of native gods; the mythological origin of the aboriginal people’s attitudes toward sex and gender; and their rich stories of creation are described as well.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822382546
    Publication Date: 1999-10-25
    contrib-author: Fray Ramon Pané
    contrib-editor: José Juan Arrom
    contrib-other: Susan Griswold
    copyright-year: 1999
    eisbn: 9780822382546
    illustrations-note: 3 maps
    isbn-cloth: 9780822323259
    isbn-paper: 9780822323471
    series: Chronicles of the New World Encounter
    short-abstract:

    The first book written in the Americas in a European language, giving Pane’s fifteenth-century account of the native inhabitants he encountered during the Spanish conquest of the Antilles.

    subtitle: A New Edition, with an Introductory Study, Notes, and Appendices by José Juan Arrom
  • An Aesthetic Occupation
    Author(s): Monk, Daniel Bertand
    Abstract:

    In An Aesthetic Occupation Daniel Bertrand Monk unearths the history of the unquestioned political immediacy of “sacred” architecture in the conflict between Palestinians and Israelis. Monk combines groundbreaking archival research with theoretical insights to examine in particular the Mandate era—the period in the first half of the twentieth century when Britain held sovereignty over Palestine. While examining the relation between monuments and mass violence in this context, he documents Palestinian, Zionist, and British attempts to advance competing arguments concerning architecture’s utility to politics.

    Succumbing neither to the view that monuments are autonomous figures onto which political meaning has been projected, nor to the obverse claim that in Jerusalem shrines are immediate manifestations of the political, Monk traces the reciprocal history of both these positions as well as describes how opponents in the conflict debated and theorized their own participation in its self-representation. Analyzing controversies over the authenticity of holy sites, the restorations of the Dome of the Rock, and the discourse of accusation following the Buraq, or Wailing Wall, riots of 1929, Monk discloses for the first time that, as combatants looked to architecture and invoked the transparency of their own historical situation, they simultaneously advanced—and normalized—the conflict’s inability to account for itself.

    This balanced and unique study will appeal to anyone interested in Israel or Zionism, the Palestinians, the Middle East conflict, Jerusalem, or its monuments. Scholars of architecture, political theory, and religion, as well as cultural and critical studies will also be informed by its arguments.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822383307
    Publication Date: 2002-02-25
    contrib-author: Daniel Bertand Monk
    copyright-year: 2002
    eisbn: 9780822383307
    illustrations-note: 9 b&w photos
    isbn-cloth: 9780822328032
    isbn-paper: 9780822328148
    short-abstract:

    The contested politics of space and architecture in Mandate Palestine.

    subtitle: The Immediacy of Architecture and the Palestine Conflict
  • An African Voice
    Author(s): July, Robert W.
    Abstract:

    Through the work of leading African writers, artists, musicians and educators—from Nobel prizewinner Wole Soyinka to names hardly known outside their native lands—An African Voice describes the contributions of the humanities to the achievement of independence for the peoples of black Africa following the Second World War. While concentrating on cultural independence, these leading humanists also demonstrate the intimate connection between cultural freedom and genuine political economic liberty.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822382973
    Publication Date: 1987-04-10
    contrib-author: Robert W. July
    copyright-year: 1987
    eisbn: 9780822382973
    isbn-cloth: 9780822307174
    isbn-paper: 9780822307693
    series: Duke University Center for International Studies Publications
    subtitle: The Role of the Humanities in African Independence
  • An Archive of Feelings
    Author(s): Cvetkovich, Ann
    Abstract:

    In this bold new work of cultural criticism, Ann Cvetkovich develops a queer approach to trauma. She argues for the importance of recognizing—and archiving—accounts of trauma that belong as much to the ordinary and everyday as to the domain of catastrophe. An Archive of Feelings contends that the field of trauma studies, limited by too strict a division between the public and the private, has overlooked the experiences of women and queers. Rejecting the pathologizing understandings of trauma that permeate medical and clinical discourses on the subject, Cvetkovich develops instead a sex-positive approach missing even from most feminist work on trauma.She challenges the field to engage more fully with sexual trauma and the wide range of feelings in its vicinity, including those associated with butch-femme sex and aids activism and caretaking. 

    An Archive of Feelings brings together oral histories from lesbian activists involved in act up/New York; readings of literature by Dorothy Allison, Leslie Feinberg, Cherríe Moraga, and Shani Mootoo; videos by Jean Carlomusto and Pratibha Parmar; and performances by Lisa Kron, Carmelita Tropicana, and the bandsLe Tigre andTribe 8. Cvetkovich reveals how activism, performance, and literature give rise to public cultures that work through trauma and transform the conditions producing it. By looking closely at connections between sexuality, trauma, and the creation of lesbian public cultures, Cvetkovich makes those experiences that have been pushed to the peripheries of trauma culture the defining principles of a new construction of sexual trauma—one in which trauma catalyzes the creation of cultural archives and political communities.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822384434
    Publication Date: 2003-02-21
    contrib-author: Ann Cvetkovich
    copyright-year: 2003
    eisbn: 9780822384434
    illustrations-note: 41 illus.
    isbn-cloth: 9780822330769
    isbn-paper: 9780822330882
    series: Series Q
    short-abstract:

    Examines trauma in many forms of lesbian popular culture in cultural, political, and depathologized ways.

    subtitle: Trauma, Sexuality, and Lesbian Public Cultures
  • An Empire of Indifference
    Author(s): Martin, Randy; Gray, Chris Hables; Ross, Andrew
    Abstract:

    In this significant Marxist critique of contemporary American imperialism, the cultural theorist Randy Martin argues that a finance-based logic of risk control has come to dominate Americans’ everyday lives as well as U.S. foreign and domestic policy. Risk management—the ability to adjust for risk and to leverage it for financial gain—is the key to personal finance as well as the defining element of the massive global market in financial derivatives. The United States wages its amorphous war on terror by leveraging particular interventions (such as Iraq) to much larger ends (winning the war on terror) and by deploying small numbers of troops and targeted weaponry to achieve broad effects. Both in global financial markets and on far-flung battlegrounds, the multiplier effects are difficult to foresee or control.

    Drawing on theorists including Michel Foucault, Giorgio Agamben, Michael Hardt, Antonio Negri, and Achille Mbembe, Martin illuminates a frightening financial logic that must be understood in order to be countered. Martin maintains that finance divides the world between those able to avail themselves of wealth opportunities through risk taking (investors) and those who cannot do so, who are considered “at risk.” He contends that modern-day American imperialism differs from previous models of imperialism, in which the occupiers engaged with the occupied to “civilize” them, siphon off wealth, or both. American imperialism, by contrast, is an empire of indifference: a massive flight from engagement. The United States urges an embrace of risk and self-management on the occupied and then ignores or dispossesses those who cannot make the grade.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822389804
    Publication Date: 2007-02-21
    contrib-author: Randy Martin; Chris Hables Gray
    contrib-series-editor: Andrew Ross
    copyright-year: 2007
    eisbn: 9780822389804
    isbn-cloth: 9780822339793
    isbn-paper: 9780822339960
    series: a Social Text book
    short-abstract:

    Analyzes imperial ambitions in the context of the dominance of finance, not simply as a form of capital, but also as a set of protocols for organzing daily life.

    subtitle: American War and the Financial Logic of Risk Management
  • An Epistemology of the Concrete
    Author(s): Rheinberger, Hans-Jörg; Dumit, Joseph; Lenoir, Timothy
    Abstract:

    An Epistemology of the Concrete brings together case studies and theoretical reflections on the history and epistemology of the life sciences by Hans-Jörg Rheinberger, one of the world’s foremost philosophers of science. In these essays, he examines the history of experiments, concepts, model organisms, instruments, and the gamut of epistemological, institutional, political, and social factors that determine the actual course of the development of knowledge. Building on ideas from his influential book Toward a History of Epistemic Things, Rheinberger first considers ways of historicizing scientific knowledge, and then explores different configurations of genetic experimentation in the first half of the twentieth century and the interaction between apparatuses, experiments, and concept formation in molecular biology in the second half of the twentieth century. He delves into fundamental epistemological issues bearing on the relationship between instruments and objects of knowledge, laboratory preparations as a special class of epistemic objects, and the note-taking and write-up techniques used in research labs. He takes up topics ranging from the French “historical epistemologists” Gaston Bachelard and Georges Canguilhem to the liquid scintillation counter, a radioactivity measuring device that became a crucial tool for molecular biology and biomedicine in the 1960s and 1970s. Throughout An Epistemology of the Concrete, Rheinberger shows how assemblages—historical conjunctures—set the conditions for the emergence of epistemic novelty, and he conveys the fascination of scientific things: those organisms, spaces, apparatuses, and techniques that are transformed by research and that transform research in turn.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822391333
    Publication Date: 2010-08-16
    contrib-author: Hans-Jörg Rheinberger
    contrib-other: Timothy Lenoir
    contrib-series-editor: Joseph Dumit
    copyright-year: 2010
    eisbn: 9780822391333
    illustrations-note: 43 illustrations, 2 tables
    isbn-cloth: 9780822345602
    isbn-paper: 9780822345756
    series: Experimental futures : technological lives, scientific arts, anthropological voices
    short-abstract:

    Brings together case studies and theoretical reflections on the history and epistemology of the life sciences by Hans-Jörg Rheinberger, one of the foremost philosophers of science.

    subtitle: Twentieth-Century Histories of Life
  • An Eye for the Tropics
    Author(s): Thompson, Krista A.; Thomas, Nicholas
    Abstract:

    Images of Jamaica and the Bahamas as tropical paradises full of palm trees, white sandy beaches, and inviting warm water seem timeless. Surprisingly, the origins of those images can be traced back to the roots of the islands’ tourism industry in the 1880s. As Krista A. Thompson explains, in the late nineteenth century, tourism promoters, backed by British colonial administrators, began to market Jamaica and the Bahamas as picturesque “tropical” paradises. They hired photographers and artists to create carefully crafted representations, which then circulated internationally via postcards and illustrated guides and lectures.

    Illustrated with more than one hundred images, including many in color, An Eye for the Tropics is a nuanced evaluation of the aesthetics of the “tropicalizing images” and their effects on Jamaica and the Bahamas. Thompson describes how representations created to project an image to the outside world altered everyday life on the islands. Hoteliers imported tropical plants to make the islands look more like the images. Many prominent tourist-oriented spaces, including hotels and famous beaches, became off-limits to the islands’ black populations, who were encouraged to act like the disciplined, loyal colonial subjects depicted in the pictures.

    Analyzing the work of specific photographers and artists who created tropical representations of Jamaica and the Bahamas between the 1880s and the 1930s, Thompson shows how their images differ from the English picturesque landscape tradition. Turning to the present, she examines how tropicalizing images are deconstructed in works by contemporary artists—including Christopher Cozier, David Bailey, and Irénée Shaw—at the same time that they remain a staple of postcolonial governments’ vigorous efforts to attract tourists.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822388562
    Publication Date: 2007-02-22
    contrib-author: Krista A. Thompson
    contrib-series-editor: Nicholas Thomas
    copyright-year: 2006
    eisbn: 9780822388562
    illustrations-note: 65 b&w illustrations, 38 color plates
    isbn-cloth: 9780822337515
    isbn-paper: 9780822337645
    series: Objects/Histories
    short-abstract:

    A beautifully illustrated look at the aesthetics and implications of the visual images used to sell Jamaica and the Bahamas to tourists as "tropical paradises" from the 1880s through the 1930s.

    subtitle: Tourism, Photography, and Framing the Caribbean Picturesque
  • An Historical Account of the Black Empire of Hayti
    Author(s): Rainsford, Marcus; Youngquist, Paul; Pierrot, Grégory
    Abstract:

    As the first complete narrative in English of the Haitian Revolution, Marcus Rainsford's An Historical Account of the Black Empire of Hayti was highly influential in establishing nineteenth-century world opinion of this momentous event. This new edition is the first to appear since the original publication in 1805. Rainsford, a career officer in the British army, went to Haiti to recruit black soldiers for the British. By publishing his observations of the prowess of black troops, and recounting his meetings with Toussaint Louverture, Rainsford offered eyewitness testimonial that acknowledged the intelligence and effectiveness of the Haitian rebels. Although not an abolitionist, Rainsford nonetheless was supportive of the independent state of Haiti, which he argued posed no threat to British colonial interests in the West Indies, an extremely unusual stance at the time. Rainsford's account made an immediate impact upon publication; it was widely reviewed, and translated twice in its first year. Paul Youngquist's and Grégory Pierrot's critical introduction to this new edition provides contextual and historical details, as well as new biographical information about Rainsford. Of particular interest is a newly discovered miniature painting of Louverture attributed to Rainsford, which is reproduced along with the twelve engravings that accompanied his original account.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822395560
    Publication Date: 2013-01-03
    contrib-author: Marcus Rainsford
    contrib-editor: Paul Youngquist; Grégory Pierrot
    copyright-year: 2013
    eisbn: 9780822395560
    illustrations-note: 17 illustrations, 1 map
    isbn-cloth: 9780822352785
    isbn-paper: 9780822352884
    short-abstract:

    A new edition of the earliest English-language account of the Haitian Revolution. Originally published in 1805, the narrative played a significant role in establishing nineteenth-century world opinion of that momentous event.

    subtitle:
  • An Improper Profession
    Author(s): Norton, Barbara T.; Gheith, Jehanne M.; Remnek, Miranda Beaven; Ruane, Christine
    Abstract:

    Journalism has long been a major factor in defining the opinions of Russia’s literate classes. Although women participated in nearly every aspect of the journalistic process during the nineteenth and early twentieth centuries, female editors, publishers, and writers have been consistently omitted from the history of journalism in Imperial Russia. An Improper Profession offers a more complete and accurate picture of this history by examining the work of these under-appreciated professionals and showing how their involvement helped to formulate public opinion.

    In this collection, contributors explore how early women journalists contributed to changing cultural understandings of women’s roles, as well as how class and gender politics meshed in the work of particular individuals. They also examine how female journalists adapted to—or challenged—censorship as political structures in Russia shifted. Over the course of this volume, contributors discuss the attitudes of female Russian journalists toward socialism, Russian nationalism, anti-Semitism, women’s rights, and suffrage. Covering the period from the early 1800s to 1917, this collection includes essays that draw from archival as well as published materials and that range from biography to literary and historical analysis of journalistic diaries.

    By disrupting conventional ideas about journalism and gender in late Imperial Russia, An Improper Profession should be of vital interest to scholars of women’s history, journalism, and Russian history.

    Contributors. Linda Harriet Edmondson, June Pachuta Farris, Jehanne M Gheith, Adele Lindenmeyr, Carolyn Marks, Barbara T. Norton, Miranda Beaven Remnek, Christine Ruane, Rochelle Ruthchild, Mary Zirin

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822380627
    Publication Date: 2001-05-02
    contrib-editor: Barbara T. Norton; Jehanne M. Gheith
    contrib-other: Miranda Beaven Remnek; Christine Ruane
    copyright-year: 2001
    eisbn: 9780822380627
    isbn-cloth: 9780822325567
    isbn-paper: 9780822325857
    short-abstract:

    A contribution to understanding life in Imperial Russia through the work of contemporary women journalists.

    subtitle: Women, Gender, and Journalism in Late Imperial Russia
  • Animacies
    Author(s): Chen, Mel
    Abstract:

    In Animacies, Mel Y. Chen draws on recent debates about sexuality, race, and affect to examine how matter that is considered insensate, immobile, or deathly animates cultural lives. Toward that end, Chen investigates the blurry division between the living and the dead, or that which is beyond the human or animal. Within the field of linguistics, animacy has been described variously as a quality of agency, awareness, mobility, sentience, or liveness. Chen turns to cognitive linguistics to stress how language habitually differentiates the animate and the inanimate. Expanding this construct, Chen argues that animacy undergirds much that is pressing and indeed volatile in contemporary culture, from animal rights debates to biosecurity concerns.

    Chen's book is the first to bring the concept of animacy together with queer of color scholarship, critical animal studies, and disability theory. Through analyses of dehumanizing insults, the meanings of queerness, animal protagonists in recent Asian/American art and film, the lead in toys panic in 2007, and the social lives of environmental illness, Animacies illuminates a hierarchical politics infused by race, sexuality, and ability. In this groundbreaking book, Chen rethinks the criteria governing agency and receptivity, health and toxicity, productivity and stillness—and demonstrates how attention to the affective charge of matter challenges commonsense orderings of the world.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822395447
    Publication Date: 2012-07-02
    contrib-author: Mel Chen
    copyright-year: 2012
    eisbn: 9780822395447
    illustrations-note: 20 illustrations
    isbn-cloth: 9780822352549
    isbn-paper: 9780822352723
    series: Perverse modernities
    short-abstract:

    Mel Y. Chen draws on studies of sexuality, race, and affect to consider how matter that is considered insensate, immobile, deathly, or otherwise "wrong," animates cultural life in important ways.

    subtitle: Biopolitics, Racial Mattering, and Queer Affect
  • Animals and Women
    Author(s): Adams, Carol J.; Donovan, Josephine; Dunayer, Joan; Birke, Lynda; Kheel, Marti
    Abstract:

    Animals and Women is a collection of pioneering essays that explores the theoretical connections between feminism and animal defense. Offering a feminist perspective on the status of animals, this unique volume argues persuasively that both the social construction and oppressions of women are inextricably connected to the ways in which we comprehend and abuse other species. Furthermore, it demonstrates that such a focus does not distract from the struggle for women’s rights, but rather contributes to it.

    This wide-ranging multidisciplinary anthology presents original material from scholars in a variety of fields, as well as a rare, early article by Virginia Woolf. Exploring the leading edge of the species/gender boundary, it addresses such issues as the relationship between abortion rights and animal rights, the connection between woman-battering and animal abuse, and the speciesist basis for much sexist language. Also considered are the ways in which animals have been regarded by science, literature, and the environmentalist movement. A striking meditation on women and wolves is presented, as is an examination of sexual harassment and the taxonomy of hunters and hunting. Finally, this compelling collection suggests that the subordination and degradation of women is a prototype for other forms of abuse, and that to deny this connection is to participate in the continued mistreatment of animals and women.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822381952
    Publication Date: 1995-11-14
    contrib-editor: Carol J. Adams; Josephine Donovan
    contrib-other: Joan Dunayer; Lynda Birke; Marti Kheel
    copyright-year: 1995
    eisbn: 9780822381952
    isbn-cloth: 9780822316558
    isbn-paper: 9780822316671
    subtitle: Feminist Theoretical Explorations
  • Animating Film Theory
    Author(s): Beckman, Karen
    Abstract:

    Animating Film Theory provides an enriched understanding of the relationship between two of the most unwieldy and unstable organizing concepts in cinema and media studies: animation and film theory. For the most part, animation has been excluded from the purview of film theory. The contributors to this collection consider the reasons for this marginalization while also bringing attention to key historical contributions across a wide range of animation practices, geographic and linguistic terrains, and historical periods. They delve deep into questions of how animation might best be understood, as well as how it relates to concepts such as the still, the moving image, the frame, animism, and utopia. The contributors take on the kinds of theoretical questions that have remained underexplored because, as Karen Beckman argues, scholars of cinema and media studies have allowed themselves to be constrained by too narrow a sense of what cinema is. This collection reanimates and expands film studies by taking the concept of animation seriously.

    Contributors. Karen Beckman, Suzanne Buchan, Scott Bukatman, Alan Cholodenko, Yuriko Furuhata, Alexander R. Galloway, Oliver Gaycken, Bishnupriya Ghosh, Tom Gunning, Andrew R. Johnston, Hervé Joubert-Laurencin, Gertrud Koch, Thomas LaMarre, Christopher P. Lehman, Esther Leslie, John MacKay, Mihaela Mihailova, Marc Steinberg, Tess Takahashi

     

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822376811
    Publication Date: 2014-03-07
    contrib-editor: Karen Beckman
    copyright-year: 2014
    eisbn: 9780822376811
    illustrations-note: 49 illustrations
    isbn-cloth: 9780822356400
    isbn-paper: 9780822356523
    subtitle:
  • Another Face of Empire
    Author(s): Castro, Daniel; Mignolo, Walter D.; Silverblatt, Irene; Saldívar-Hull, Sonia
    Abstract:

    The Spanish cleric Bartolomé de Las Casas is a key figure in the history of Spain’s conquest of the Americas. Las Casas condemned the torture and murder of natives by the conquistadores in reports to the Spanish royal court and in tracts such as A Short Account of the Destruction of the Indies (1552). For his unrelenting denunciation of the colonialists’ atrocities, Las Casas has been revered as a noble protector of the Indians and as a pioneering anti-imperialist. He has become a larger-than-life figure invoked by generations of anticolonialists in Europe and Latin America.

    Separating historical reality from myth, Daniel Castro provides a nuanced, revisionist assessment of the friar’s career, writings, and political activities. Castro argues that Las Casas was very much an imperialist. Intent on converting the Indians to Christianity, the religion of the colonizers, Las Casas simply offered the natives another face of empire: a paternalistic, ecclesiastical imperialism. Castro contends that while the friar was a skilled political manipulator, influential at what was arguably the world’s most powerful sixteenth-century imperial court, his advocacy on behalf of the natives had little impact on their lives. Analyzing Las Casas’s extensive writings, Castro points out that in his many years in the Americas, Las Casas spent very little time among the indigenous people he professed to love, and he made virtually no effort to learn their languages. He saw himself as an emissary from a superior culture with a divine mandate to impose a set of ideas and beliefs on the colonized. He differed from his compatriots primarily in his antipathy to violence as the means for achieving conversion.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822389590
    Publication Date: 2007-01-03
    contrib-author: Daniel Castro
    contrib-series-editor: Walter D. Mignolo; Irene Silverblatt; Sonia Saldívar-Hull
    copyright-year: 2007
    eisbn: 9780822389590
    isbn-cloth: 9780822339304
    isbn-paper: 9780822339397
    series: Latin America Otherwise
    short-abstract:

    Investigates role that Las Casas played in the evolution of Spanish imperialism and 16th century arguments about human rights, and claims that scholars have overestimated the extent to which he helped indigenous people.

    subtitle: Bartolomé de Las Casas, Indigenous Rights, and Ecclesiastical Imperialism
  • Anthropological Futures
    Author(s): Fischer, Michael M. J.; Dumit, Joseph
    Abstract:

    In Anthropological Futures, Michael M. J. Fischer explores the uses of anthropology as a mode of philosophical inquiry, an evolving academic discipline, and a means for explicating the complex and shifting interweaving of human bonds and social interactions on a global level. Through linked essays, which are both speculative and experimental, Fischer seeks to break new ground for anthropology by illuminating the field’s broad analytical capacity and its attentiveness to emergent cultural systems.

    Fischer is particularly concerned with cultural anthropology’s interactions with science studies, and throughout the book he investigates how emerging knowledge formations in molecular biology, environmental studies, computer science, and bioengineering are transforming some of anthropology’s key concepts including nature, culture, personhood, and the body. In an essay on culture, he uses the science studies paradigm of “experimental systems” to consider how the social scientific notion of culture has evolved as an analytical tool since the nineteenth century. Charting anthropology’s role in understanding and analyzing the production of knowledge within the sciences since the 1990s, he highlights anthropology’s aptitude for tracing the transnational collaborations and multisited networks that constitute contemporary scientific practice. Fischer investigates changing ideas about cultural inscription on the human body in a world where genetic engineering, robotics, and cybernetics are constantly redefining our understanding of biology. In the final essay, Fischer turns to Kant’s philosophical anthropology to reassess the object of study for contemporary anthropology and to reassert the field’s primacy for answering the largest questions about human beings, societies, culture, and our interactions with the world around us. In Anthropological Futures, Fischer continues to advance what Clifford Geertz, in reviewing Fischer’s earlier book Emergent Forms of Life and the Anthropological Voice, called “a broad new agenda for cultural description and political critique.”

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822390794
    Publication Date: 2009-06-05
    contrib-author: Michael M. J. Fischer
    contrib-series-editor: Joseph Dumit
    copyright-year: 2009
    eisbn: 9780822390794
    illustrations-note: 38 illustrations
    isbn-cloth: 9780822344612
    isbn-paper: 9780822344766
    series: Experimental Futures
    short-abstract:

    A leading anthropological theorist investigates how emerging knowledge formations in molecular biology, environmental studies, computer science, and bioengineering are transforming some of anthropology s key concepts.

    subtitle:
  • Anthropological Intelligence
    Author(s): Price, David H.
    Abstract:

    By the time the United States officially entered World War II, more than half of American anthropologists were using their professional knowledge and skills to advance the war effort. The range of their war-related work was extraordinary. They helped gather military intelligence, pinpointed possible social weaknesses in enemy nations, and contributed to the army’s regional Pocket Guide booklets. They worked for dozens of government agencies, including the Office of Strategic Services (OSS) and the Office of War Information. At a moment when social scientists are once again being asked to assist in military and intelligence work, David H. Price examines anthropologists’ little-known contributions to the Second World War.

    Anthropological Intelligence is based on interviews with anthropologists as well as extensive archival research involving many Freedom of Information Act requests. Price looks at the role played by the two primary U.S. anthropological organizations, the American Anthropological Association and the Society for Applied Anthropology (which was formed in 1941), in facilitating the application of anthropological methods to the problems of war. He chronicles specific projects undertaken on behalf of government agencies, including an analysis of the social effects of postwar migration, the design and implementation of OSS counterinsurgency campaigns, and the study of Japanese social structures to help tailor American propaganda efforts. Price discusses anthropologists’ work in internment camps, their collection of intelligence in Central and South America for the FBI’s Special Intelligence Service, and their help forming foreign language programs to assist soldiers and intelligence agents. Evaluating the ethical implications of anthropological contributions to World War II, Price suggests that by the time the Cold War began, the profession had set a dangerous precedent regarding what it would be willing to do on behalf of the U.S. government.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822389125
    Publication Date: 2008-05-19
    contrib-author: David H. Price
    copyright-year: 2008
    eisbn: 9780822389125
    illustrations-note: 2 tables
    isbn-cloth: 9780822342199
    isbn-paper: 9780822342373
    short-abstract:

    Cultural history of anthropologists' involvement with U.S. intelligence agencies--as spies and informants--during World War II.

    subtitle: The Deployment and Neglect of American Anthropology in the Second World War
  • Anthropology and Social Theory
    Author(s): Ortner, Sherry B.
    Abstract:

    In Anthropology and Social Theory the award-winning anthropologist Sherry B. Ortner draws on her longstanding interest in theories of cultural practice to rethink key concepts of culture, agency, and subjectivity for the social sciences of the twenty-first century. The seven theoretical and interpretive essays in this volume each advocate reconfiguring, rather than abandoning, the concept of culture. Similarly, they all suggest that a theory which depends on the interested action of social beings—specifically practice theory, associated especially with the work of Pierre Bourdieu—requires a more developed notion of human agency and a richer conception of human subjectivity. Ortner shows how social theory must both build upon and move beyond classic practice theory in order to understand the contemporary world.

    Some of the essays reflect explicitly on theoretical concerns: the relationship between agency and power, the problematic quality of ethnographic studies of resistance, and the possibility of producing an anthropology of subjectivity. Others are ethnographic studies that apply Ortner’s theoretical framework. In these, she investigates aspects of social class, looking at the relationship between race and middle-class identity in the United States, the often invisible nature of class as a cultural identity and as an analytical category in social inquiry, and the role that public culture and media play in the creation of the class anxieties of Generation X. Written with Ortner’s characteristic lucidity, these essays constitute a major statement about the future of social theory from one of the leading anthropologists of our time.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822388456
    Publication Date: 2006-11-09
    contrib-author: Sherry B. Ortner
    copyright-year: 2006
    eisbn: 9780822388456
    isbn-cloth: 9780822338116
    isbn-paper: 9780822338642
    series: a John Hope Franklin Center Book
    short-abstract:

    The award-winning anthropologist Sherry B. Ortner draws on her longstanding interest in theories of cultural practice to rethink key concepts of culture, agency, and subjectivity.

    subtitle: Culture, Power, and the Acting Subject
  • Anthropology and the Racial Politics of Culture
    Author(s): Baker, Lee D.
    Abstract:

    In the late nineteenth century, if ethnologists in the United States recognized African American culture, they often perceived it as something to be overcome and left behind. At the same time, they were committed to salvaging “disappearing” Native American culture by curating objects, narrating practices, and recording languages. In Anthropology and the Racial Politics of Culture, Lee D. Baker examines theories of race and culture developed by American anthropologists during the late nineteenth century and early twentieth. He investigates the role that ethnologists played in creating a racial politics of culture in which Indians had a culture worthy of preservation and exhibition while African Americans did not.

    Baker argues that the concept of culture developed by ethnologists to understand American Indian languages and customs in the nineteenth century formed the basis of the anthropological concept of race eventually used to confront “the Negro problem” in the twentieth century. As he explores the implications of anthropology’s different approaches to African Americans and Native Americans, and the field’s different but overlapping theories of race and culture, Baker delves into the careers of prominent anthropologists and ethnologists, including James Mooney Jr., Frederic W. Putnam, Daniel G. Brinton, and Franz Boas. His analysis takes into account not only scientific societies, journals, museums, and universities, but also the development of sociology in the United States, African American and Native American activists and intellectuals, philanthropy, the media, and government entities from the Bureau of Indian Affairs to the Supreme Court. In Anthropology and the Racial Politics of Culture, Baker tells how anthropology has both responded to and helped shape ideas about race and culture in the United States, and how its ideas have been appropriated (and misappropriated) to wildly different ends.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822392699
    Publication Date: 2010-02-10
    contrib-author: Lee D. Baker
    copyright-year: 2010
    eisbn: 9780822392699
    isbn-cloth: 9780822346869
    isbn-paper: 9780822346982
    short-abstract:

    An account of how anthropology has responded to and helped shape ideas about race and culture in the United States, and how its ideas have been appropriated to different ends.

    subtitle:
  • Anti-Crisis
    Author(s): Roitman, Janet
    Abstract:

    Crisis is everywhere: in Iraq, Afghanistan, Syria, and the Congo; in housing markets, money markets, financial systems, state budgets, and sovereign currencies. In Anti-Crisis, Janet Roitman steps back from the cycle of crisis production to ask not just why we declare so many crises but also what sort of analytical work the concept of crisis enables. What, she asks, are the stakes of crisis? Taking responses to the so-called subprime mortgage crisis of 2007–2008 as her case in point, Roitman engages with the work of thinkers ranging from Reinhart Koselleck to Michael Lewis, and from Thomas Hobbes to Robert Shiller. In the process, she questions the bases for claims to crisis and shows how crisis functions as a narrative device, or how the invocation of crisis in contemporary accounts of the financial meltdown enables particular narratives, raising certain questions while foreclosing others.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822377436
    Publication Date: 2013-10-30
    contrib-author: Janet Roitman
    copyright-year: 2013
    eisbn: 9780822377436
    isbn-cloth: 9780822355120
    isbn-paper: 9780822355274
    short-abstract:

    Taking the so-called subprime mortgage crisis as her case study, Janet Roitman analyzes "crisis" as a narrative device, explaining how the term enables some narratives and questions while foreclosing others.

    subtitle:
  • Antinomies of Art and Culture
    Author(s): Smith, Terry; Enwezor, Okwui; Condee, Nancy; Negri, Antonio; Kapur, Geeta; Krauss, Rosalind
    Abstract:

    In this landmark collection, world-renowned theorists, artists, critics, and curators explore new ways of conceiving the present and understanding art and culture in relation to it. They revisit from fresh perspectives key issues regarding modernity and postmodernity, including the relationship between art and broader social and political currents, as well as important questions about temporality and change. They also reflect on whether or not broad categories and terms such as modernity, postmodernity, globalization, and decolonization are still relevant or useful. Including twenty essays and seventy-seven images, Antinomies of Art and Culture is a wide-ranging yet incisive inquiry into how to understand, describe, and represent what it is to live in the contemporary moment.

    In the volume’s introduction the theorist Terry Smith argues that predictions that postmodernity would emerge as a global successor to modernity have not materialized as anticipated. Smith suggests that the various situations of decolonized Africa, post-Soviet Europe, contemporary China, the conflicted Middle East, and an uncertain United States might be better characterized in terms of their “contemporaneity,” a concept which captures the frictions of the present while denying the inevitability of all currently competing universalisms. Essays range from Antonio Negri’s analysis of contemporaneity in light of the concept of multitude to Okwui Enwezor’s argument that the entire world is now in a postcolonial constellation, and from Rosalind Krauss’s defense of artistic modernism to Jonathan Hay’s characterization of contemporary developments in terms of doubled and even para-modernities. The volume’s centerpiece is a sequence of photographs from Zoe Leonard’s Analogue project. Depicting used clothing, both as it is bundled for shipment in Brooklyn and as it is displayed for sale on the streets of Uganda, the sequence is part of a striking visual record of new cultural forms and economies emerging as others are left behind.

    Contributors: Monica Amor, Nancy Condee, Okwui Enwezor, Boris Groys, Jonathan Hay, Wu Hung, Geeta Kapur, Rosalind Krauss, Bruno Latour, Zoe Leonard, Lev Manovich, James Meyer, Gao Minglu, Helen Molesworth, Antonio Negri, Sylvester Okwunodu Ogbechie, Nikos Papastergiadis, Colin Richards, Suely Rolnik, Terry Smith, McKenzie Wark

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822389330
    Publication Date: 2008-12-26
    contrib-editor: Terry Smith; Okwui Enwezor; Nancy Condee
    contrib-other: Antonio Negri; Geeta Kapur; Rosalind Krauss
    copyright-year: 2008
    eisbn: 9780822389330
    illustrations-note: 77 illustrations
    isbn-cloth: 9780822341864
    isbn-paper: 9780822342038
    short-abstract:

    Collection of essays by art historians and cultural theorists on what it means for art to be contemporary in the wake of postmodernism.

    subtitle: Modernity, Postmodernity, Contemporaneity
  • Antinomies of Modernity
    Author(s): Kaiwar, Vasant; Mazumdar, Sucheta; Barnes, Andrew E.
    Abstract:

    Antinomies of Modernity asserts that concepts of race, Orient, and nation have been crucial to efforts across the world to create a sense of place, belonging, and solidarity in the midst of the radical discontinuities wrought by global capitalism. Emphasizing the continued salience at the beginning of the twenty-first century of these supposedly nineteenth-century ideas, the essays in this volume stress the importance of tracking the dynamic ways that race, Orient, and nation have been reworked and used over time and in particular geographic locations.

    Drawing on archival sources and fieldwork, the contributors explore aspects of modernity within societies of South Asia, the Middle East, and Africa. Whether considering how European ideas of Orientalism became foundational myths of Indian nationalism; how racial caste systems between blacks, South Asians, and whites operate in post-apartheid South Africa; or how Indian immigrants to the United States negotiate their identities, these essays demonstrate that the contours of cultural and identity politics did not simply originate in metropolitan centers and get adopted wholesale in the colonies. Colonial and postcolonial modernisms have emerged via the active appropriation of, or resistance to, far-reaching European ideas. Over time, Orientalism and nationalist and racialized knowledges become indigenized and acquire, for all practical purposes, a completely "Third World" patina. Antinomies of Modernity shows that people do make history, constrained in part by political-economic realities and in part by the categories they marshal in doing so.

    Contributors. Neville Alexander, Andrew Barnes, Vasant Kaiwar, Sucheta Mazumdar, Minoo Moallem, Mohamad Tavakoli-Targhi, A. R. Venkatachalapathy, Michael O. West

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822384564
    Publication Date: 2003-03-31
    contrib-editor: Vasant Kaiwar; Sucheta Mazumdar
    contrib-other: Andrew E. Barnes
    copyright-year: 2003
    eisbn: 9780822384564
    isbn-cloth: 9780822330110
    isbn-paper: 9780822330462
    short-abstract:

    A collection of essays arguing for a global and economically based modernity driven by capitalist development.

    subtitle: Essays on Race, Orient, Nation
  • Anxious Intellects
    Author(s): Michael, John
    Abstract:

    Intellectuals occupy a paradoxical position in contemporary American culture as they struggle both to maintain their critical independence and to connect to the larger society. In Anxious Intellects John Michael discusses how critics from the right and the left have conceived of the intellectual’s role in a pluralized society, weighing intellectual authority against public democracy, universal against particularistic standards, and criticism against the respect of popular movements. Michael asserts that these Enlightenment-born issues, although not “resolvable,” are the very grounds from which real intellectual work must proceed.

    As part of his investigation of intellectuals’ self-conceptions and their roles in society, Michael concentrates on several well-known contemporary African American intellectuals, including Henry Louis Gates Jr. and Cornel West. To illuminate public debates over pedagogy and the role of university, he turns to the work of Todd Gitlin, Michael Bérubé, and Allan Bloom. Stanley Fish’s pragmatic tome, Doing What Comes Naturally, along with a juxtaposition of Fredric Jameson and Samuel Huntington’s work, proves fertile ground for Michael’s argument that democratic politics without intellectuals is not possible. In the second half of Anxious Intellects, Michael relies on three popular conceptions of the intellectual—as critic, scientist, and professional—to discuss the work of scholars Constance Penley, Henry Jenkins, the celebrated physicist Stephen Hawking, and others, insisting that ambivalence, anxiety, projection, identification, hybridity, and various forms of psychosocial complexity constitute the real meaning of Enlightenment intellectuality. As a new and refreshing contribution to the recently emergent culture and science wars, Michael’s take on contemporary intellectuals and their place in society will enliven and redirect these ongoing debates.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822381396
    Publication Date: 2000-04-03
    contrib-author: John Michael
    copyright-year: 2000
    eisbn: 9780822381396
    isbn-cloth: 9780822324607
    isbn-paper: 9780822324966
    short-abstract:

    A critical examination of the complex role of intellectuals in contemporary society, including the often contradictory definitions of such roles advocated by intellectuals themselves.

    subtitle: Academic Professionals, Public Intellectuals, and Enlightenment Values
  • Appetites
    Author(s): Farquhar, Judith; Appadurai, Arjun; Comaroff, John L.
    Abstract:

    Judith Farquhar’s innovative study of medicine and popular culture in modern China reveals the thoroughly political and historical character of pleasure. Ranging over a variety of cultural terrains--fiction, medical texts, film and television, journalism, and observations of clinics and urban daily life in Beijing—Appetites challenges the assumption that the mundane enjoyments of bodily life are natural and unvarying. Farquhar analyzes modern Chinese reflections on embodied existence to show how contemporary appetites are grounded in history.

    From eating well in improving economic times to memories of the late 1950s famine, from the flavors of traditional Chinese medicine to modernity’s private sexual passions, this book argues that embodiment in all its forms must be invented and sustained in public reflections about personal and national life. As much at home in science studies and social theory as in the details of life in Beijing, this account uses anthropology, cultural studies, and literary criticism to read contemporary Chinese life in a materialist and reflexive mode. For both Maoist and market reform periods, this is a story of high culture in appetites, desire in collective life, and politics in the body and its dispositions.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822383451
    Publication Date: 2002-04-05
    contrib-author: Judith Farquhar
    contrib-series-editor: Arjun Appadurai; John L. Comaroff
    copyright-year: 2002
    eisbn: 9780822383451
    illustrations-note: 12 illustrations
    isbn-cloth: 9780822329060
    isbn-paper: 9780822329213
    series: Body, Commodity, Text
    short-abstract:

    An experimental ethnography of food, sex, and health in post-socialist China

    subtitle: Food and Sex in Post-Socialist China
  • Appropriately Indian
    Author(s): Radhakrishnan, Smitha
    Abstract:

    Appropriately Indian is an ethnographic analysis of the class of information technology professionals at the symbolic helm of globalizing India. Comprising a small but prestigious segment of India’s labor force, these transnational knowledge workers dominate the country’s economic and cultural scene, as do their notions of what it means to be Indian. Drawing on the stories of Indian professionals in Mumbai, Bangalore, Silicon Valley, and South Africa, Smitha Radhakrishnan explains how these high-tech workers create a “global Indianness” by transforming the diversity of Indian cultural practices into a generic, mobile set of “Indian” norms. Female information technology professionals are particularly influential. By reconfiguring notions of respectable femininity and the “good” Indian family, they are reshaping ideas about what it means to be Indian.

    Radhakrishnan explains how this transnational class creates an Indian culture that is self-consciously distinct from Western culture, yet compatible with Western cosmopolitan lifestyles. She describes the material and symbolic privileges that accrue to India’s high-tech workers, who often claim ordinary middle-class backgrounds, but are overwhelmingly urban and upper caste. They are also distinctly apolitical and individualistic. Members of this elite class practice a decontextualized version of Hinduism, and they absorb the ideas and values that circulate through both Indian and non-Indian multinational corporations. Ultimately, though, global Indianness is rooted and configured in the gendered sphere of home and family.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822393436
    Publication Date: 2011-01-21
    contrib-author: Smitha Radhakrishnan
    copyright-year: 2011
    eisbn: 9780822393436
    illustrations-note: 13 illustrations, 1 table
    isbn-cloth: 9780822348436
    isbn-paper: 9780822348702
    short-abstract:

    An ethnography analyzing India s class of transnational information technology professionals and their influential ideas about what it means to be Indian.

    subtitle: Gender and Culture in a New Transnational Class
  • Appropriating Blackness
    Author(s): Johnson, E. Patrick
    Abstract:

    Performance artist and scholar E. Patrick Johnson’s provocative study examines how blackness is appropriated and performed—toward widely divergent ends—both within and outside African American culture. Appropriating Blackness develops from the contention that blackness in the United States is necessarily a politicized identity—avowed and disavowed, attractive and repellent, fixed and malleable. Drawing on performance theory, queer studies, literary analysis, film criticism, and ethnographic fieldwork, Johnson describes how diverse constituencies persistently try to prescribe the boundaries of "authentic" blackness and how performance highlights the futility of such enterprises.

    Johnson looks at various sites of performed blackness, including Marlon Riggs’s influential documentary Black Is . . . Black Ain’t and comedic routines by Eddie Murphy, David Alan Grier, and Damon Wayans. He analyzes nationalist writings by Amiri Baraka and Eldridge Cleaver, the vernacular of black gay culture, an oral history of his grandmother’s experience as a domestic worker in the South, gospel music as performed by a white Australian choir, and pedagogy in a performance studies classroom. By exploring the divergent aims and effects of these performances—ranging from resisting racism, sexism, and homophobia to excluding sexual dissidents from the black community—Johnson deftly analyzes the multiple significations of blackness and their myriad political implications. His reflexive account considers his own complicity, as ethnographer and teacher, in authenticating narratives of blackness.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822385103
    Publication Date: 2003-07-23
    contrib-author: E. Patrick Johnson
    copyright-year: 2003
    eisbn: 9780822385103
    illustrations-note: 16 b&w photos
    isbn-cloth: 9780822331544
    isbn-paper: 9780822331919
    short-abstract:

    A consideration of the performance of Blackness and race in general, in relation to sexuality and critiques of authenticity.

    subtitle: Performance and the Politics of Authenticity
  • Architecture in Translation
    Author(s): Akcan, Esra
    Abstract:

    In Architecture in Translation, Esra Akcan offers a way to understand the global circulation of culture that extends the notion of translation beyond language to visual fields. She shows how members of the ruling Kemalist elite in Turkey further aligned themselves with Europe by choosing German-speaking architects to oversee much of the design of modern cities. Focusing on the period from the 1920s through the 1950s, Akcan traces the geographical circulation of modern residential models, including the garden city—which emphasized green spaces separating low-density neighborhoods of houses surrounded by gardens—and mass housing built first for the working-class residents in industrial cities and, later, more broadly for mixed-income residents. She shows how the concept of translation—the process of change that occurs with transportation of people, ideas, technology, information, and images from one or more countries to another—allows for consideration of the sociopolitical context and agency of all parties in cultural exchanges. Moving beyond the indistinct concepts of hybrid and transculturation and avoiding passive metaphors such as import, influence, or transfer, translation offers a new approach relevant to many disciplines. Akcan advocates a commitment to a new culture of translatability from below for a truly cosmopolitan ethics in a globalizing world.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822395577
    Publication Date: 2012-07-09
    contrib-author: Esra Akcan
    copyright-year: 2012
    eisbn: 9780822395577
    illustrations-note: 143 illustrations
    isbn-cloth: 9780822352945
    isbn-paper: 9780822353089
    short-abstract:

    Esra Akcan describes the introduction of modern architecture into Turkey after the Kemalist political elite took power in 1923 and invited German architects to redesign the new capital of Ankara.

    subtitle: Germany, Turkey, and the Modern House
  • Archive Stories
    Author(s): Burton, Antoinette; Ghosh, Durba; Sahadeo, Jeff; Robertson, Craig; Ballantyne, Tony
    Abstract:

    Despite the importance of archives to the profession of history, there is very little written about actual encounters with them—about the effect that the researcher’s race, gender, or class may have on her experience within them or about the impact that archival surveillance, architecture, or bureaucracy might have on the histories that are ultimately written. This provocative collection initiates a vital conversation about how archives around the world are constructed, policed, manipulated, and experienced. It challenges the claims to objectivity associated with the traditional archive by telling stories that illuminate its power to shape the narratives that are “found” there.

    Archive Stories brings together ethnographies of the archival world, most of which are written by historians. Some contributors recount their own experiences. One offers a moving reflection on how the relative wealth and prestige of Western researchers can gain them entry to collections such as Uzbekistan’s newly formed Central State Archive, which severely limits the access of Uzbek researchers. Others explore the genealogies of specific archives, from one of the most influential archival institutions in the modern West, the Archives nationales in Paris, to the significant archives of the Bakunin family in Russia, which were saved largely through the efforts of one family member. Still others explore the impact of current events on the analysis of particular archives. A contributor tells of researching the 1976 Soweto riots in the politically charged atmosphere of the early 1990s, just as apartheid in South Africa was coming to an end. A number of the essays question what counts as an archive—and what counts as history—as they consider oral histories, cyberspace, fiction, and plans for streets and buildings that were never built, for histories that never materialized.

    Contributors. Tony Ballantyne, Marilyn Booth, Antoinette Burton, Ann Curthoys, Peter Fritzsche, Durba Ghosh, Laura Mayhall, Jennifer S. Milligan, Kathryn J. Oberdeck, Adele Perry, Helena Pohlandt-McCormick, John Randolph, Craig Robertson, Horacio N. Roque Ramírez, Jeff Sahadeo, Reneé Sentilles

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822387046
    Publication Date: 2006-01-04
    contrib-editor: Antoinette Burton
    contrib-other: Durba Ghosh; Jeff Sahadeo; Craig Robertson; Tony Ballantyne
    copyright-year: 2005
    eisbn: 9780822387046
    illustrations-note: 10 b+w photos, 1 map
    isbn-cloth: 9780822336778
    isbn-paper: 9780822336884
    short-abstract:

    This anthology compares scholarly findings from around the world to comment on the creation, definition, and use of archival evidence in the writing of history.

    subtitle: Facts, Fictions, and the Writing of History
  • Archives of Empire
    Author(s): Harlow, Barbara; Carter, Mia
    Abstract:

    A rich collection of primary materials, the multivolume Archives of Empire provides a documentary history of nineteenth-century British imperialism from the Indian subcontinent to the Suez Canal to southernmost Africa. Barbara Harlow and Mia Carter have carefully selected a diverse range of texts that track the debates over imperialism in the ranks of the military, the corridors of political power, the lobbies of missionary organizations, the halls of royal geographic and ethnographic societies, the boardrooms of trading companies, the editorial offices of major newspapers, and far-flung parts of the empire itself. Focusing on a particular region and historical period, each volume in Archives of Empire is organized into sections preceded by brief introductions. Documents including mercantile company charters, parliamentary records, explorers’ accounts, and political cartoons are complemented by timelines, maps, and bibligraphies. Unique resources for teachers and students, these volumes reveal the complexities of nineteenth-century colonialism and emphasize its enduring relevance to the “global markets” of the twenty-first century.

    While focusing on the expansion of the British Empire, The Scramble for Africa illuminates the intense nineteenth-century contest among European nations over Africa’s land, people, and resources. Highlighting the 1885 Berlin Conference in which Britain, France, Germany, Portugal, and Italy partitioned Africa among themselves, this collection follows British conflicts with other nations over different regions as well as its eventual challenge to Leopold of Belgium’s rule of the Congo. The reports, speeches, treatises, proclamations, letters, and cartoons assembled here include works by Henry M. Stanley, David Livingstone, Joseph Conrad, G. W. F. Hegel, Winston Churchill, Charles Darwin, and Arthur Conan Doyle. A number of pieces highlight the proliferation of companies chartered to pursue Africa’s gold, diamonds, and oil—particularly Cecil J. Rhodes’s British South Africa Company and Frederick Lugard’s Royal Niger Company. Other documents describe debacles on the continent—such as the defeat of General Gordon in Khartoum and the Anglo-Boer War—and the criticism of imperial maneuvers by proto-human rights activists including George Washington Williams, Mark Twain, Olive Schreiner, and E.D. Morel.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822385035
    Publication Date: 2003-12-17
    contrib-other: Barbara Harlow; Mia Carter
    copyright-year: 2004
    eisbn: 9780822385035
    illustrations-note: 34 illus. (10 lineart, 17 b&w photos, 6 maps, 1 table)
    isbn-cloth: 9780822331520
    isbn-paper: 9780822331896
    series: Archives of empire ;
    short-abstract:

    A collection of original writings and documents from British colonialism in Africa.

    subtitle: Volume 2. The Scramble for Africa
  • Archives of Empire
    Author(s): Harlow, Barbara; Carter, Mia
    Abstract:

    A rich collection of primary materials, the multivolume Archives of Empire provides a documentary history of nineteenth-century British imperialism from the Indian subcontinent to the Suez Canal to southernmost Africa. Barbara Harlow and Mia Carter have carefully selected a diverse range of texts that track the debates over imperialism in the ranks of the military, the corridors of political power, the lobbies of missionary organizations, the halls of royal geographic and ethnographic societies, the boardrooms of trading companies, the editorial offices of major newspapers, and far-flung parts of the empire itself. Focusing on a particular region and historical period, each volume in Archives of Empire is organized into sections preceded by brief introductions. Documents including mercantile company charters, parliamentary records, explorers’ accounts, and political cartoons are complemented by timelines, maps, and bibligraphies. Unique resources for teachers and students, these books reveal the complexities of nineteenth-century colonialism and emphasize its enduring relevance to the “global markets” of the twenty-first century.

    Tracing the beginnings of the British colonial enterprise in South Asia and the Middle East, From the Company to the Canal brings together key texts from the era of the privately owned British East India Company through the crises that led to the company’s takeover by the Crown in 1858. It ends with the momentous opening of the Suez Canal in 1869. Government proclamations, military reports, and newspaper articles are included here alongside pieces by Rudyard Kipling, Charles Dickens, John Stuart Mill, Karl Marx, Benjamin Disraeli, and many others. A number of documents chronicle arguments between mercantilists and free trade advocates over the competing interests of the nation and the East India Company. Others provide accounts of imperial crises—including the trial of Warren Hastings, the Indian Rebellion (Sepoy Mutiny), and the Arabi Uprising—that highlight the human, political, and economic costs of imperial domination and control.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822385042
    Publication Date: 2003-12-10
    contrib-other: Barbara Harlow; Mia Carter
    copyright-year: 2003
    eisbn: 9780822385042
    illustrations-note: 28 illus., 1 map
    isbn-cloth: 9780822331766
    isbn-paper: 9780822331643
    series: Archives of Empire ;
    short-abstract:

    A collection of original writings and documents from British colonialism in the Middle East.

    subtitle: Volume I. From The East India Company to the Suez Canal
  • Ariel Dorfman
    Author(s): McClennen, Sophia
    Abstract:

    Ariel Dorfman: An Aesthetics of Hope is a critical introduction to the life and work of the internationally renowned writer, activist, and intellectual Ariel Dorfman. It is the first book about the author in English and the first in any language to address the full range of his writing to date. Consistently challenging assumptions and refusing preconceived categories, Dorfman has published in every major literary genre (novel, short story, poetry, drama); adopted literary forms including the picaresque, epic, noir, and theater of the absurd; and produced a vast amount of cultural criticism. His works are read as part of the Latin American literary canon, as examples of human rights literature, as meditations on exile and displacement, and within the tradition of bilingual, cross-cultural, and ethnic writing. Yet, as Sophia A. McClennen shows, when Dorfman’s extensive writings are considered as an integrated whole, a cohesive aesthetic emerges, an “aesthetics of hope” that foregrounds the arts as vital to our understanding of the world and our struggles to change it.

    To illuminate Dorfman’s thematic concerns, McClennen chronicles the writer’s life, including his experiences working with Salvador Allende and his exile from Chile during the dictatorship of Augusto Pinochet, and she provides a careful account of his literary and cultural influences. Tracing his literary career chronologically, McClennen interprets Dorfman’s less-known texts alongside his most well-known works, which include How to Read Donald Duck, the pioneering critique of Western ideology and media culture co-authored with Armand Mattelart, and the award-winning play Death and the Maiden. In addition, McClennen provides two valuable appendices: a chronology documenting important dates and events in Dorfman’s life, and a full bibliography of his work in English and in Spanish.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822391951
    Publication Date: 2009-12-28
    contrib-author: Sophia McClennen
    copyright-year: 2010
    eisbn: 9780822391951
    isbn-cloth: 9780822345862
    isbn-paper: 9780822346043
    short-abstract:

    A critical introduction to the life and work of the internationally renowned writer, activist, and intellectual Ariel Dorfman.

    subtitle: An Aesthetics of Hope
  • Around Quitting Time
    Author(s): Seguin, Robert; Pease, Donald E.
    Abstract:

    Virtually since its inception, the United States has nurtured a dreamlike and often delirious image of itself as an essentially classless society. Given the stark levels of social inequality that have actually existed and that continue today, what sustains this at once hopelessly ideological and breathlessly utopian mirage? In Around Quitting Time Robert Seguin investigates this question, focusing on a series of modern writers who were acutely sensitive to the American web of ideology and utopic vision in order to argue that a pervasive middle-class imaginary is the key to the enigma of class in America.

    Tracing connections between the reconstruction of the labor process and the aesthetic dilemmas of modernism, between the emergence of the modern state and the structure of narrative, Seguin analyzes the work of Nathanael West, Ernest Hemingway, Willa Cather, John Barth, and others. These fictional narratives serve to demonstrate for Seguin the pattern of social sites and cultural phenomenon that have emerged where work and leisure, production and consumption, and activity and passivity coincide. He reveals how, by creating pathways between these seemingly opposed domains, the middle-class imaginary at once captures and suspends the dynamics of social class and opens out onto a political and cultural terrain where class is both omnipresent and invisible. Aroung Quitting Time will interest critics and historians of modern U.S. culture, literary scholars, and those who explore the interaction between economic and cultural forms.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822380818
    Publication Date: 2001-05-30
    contrib-author: Robert Seguin
    contrib-series-editor: Donald E. Pease
    copyright-year: 2001
    eisbn: 9780822380818
    isbn-cloth: 9780822326755
    isbn-paper: 9780822326700
    series: New Americanists
    short-abstract:

    Posits social class as the American political unconscious, showing (in an analysis of 19th and 20th century novels) how class exerts pressure on the American cultural imagination, and claiming that what is desired is ultimately the liberation from work.

    subtitle: Work and Middle-Class Fantasy in American Fiction
  • Arrested Histories
    Author(s): McGranahan, Carole
    Abstract:

    In the 1950s, thousands of ordinary Tibetans rose up to defend their country and religion against Chinese troops. Their citizen army fought through 1974 with covert support from the Tibetan exile government and the governments of India, Nepal, and the United States. Decades later, the story of this resistance is only beginning to be told and has not yet entered the annals of Tibetan national history. In Arrested Histories, the anthropologist and historian Carole McGranahan shows how and why histories of this resistance army are “arrested” and explains the ensuing repercussions for the Tibetan refugee community.

    Drawing on rich ethnographic and historical research, McGranahan tells the story of the Tibetan resistance and the social processes through which this history is made and unmade, and lived and forgotten in the present. Fulfillment of veterans’ desire for recognition hinges on the Dalai Lama and “historical arrest,” a practice in which the telling of certain pasts is suspended until an undetermined time in the future. In this analysis, struggles over history emerge as a profound pain of belonging. Tibetan cultural politics, regional identities, and religious commitments cannot be disentangled from imperial histories, contemporary geopolitics, and romanticized representations of Tibet. Moving deftly from armed struggle to nonviolent hunger strikes, and from diplomatic offices to refugee camps, Arrested Histories provides powerful insights into the stakes of political engagement and the cultural contradictions of everyday life.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822392972
    Publication Date: 2010-09-10
    contrib-author: Carole McGranahan
    copyright-year: 2010
    eisbn: 9780822392972
    illustrations-note: 36 photographs, 5 maps
    isbn-cloth: 9780822347514
    isbn-paper: 9780822347712
    short-abstract:

    Argues that some histories, including Tibetans armed resistance against the Chinese, are arrested, deliberately left untold until some future moment when changed circumstances favor their telling.

    subtitle: Tibet, the CIA, and Memories of a Forgotten War
  • Arrogant Beggar
    Author(s): Yezierska, Anzia
    Abstract:

    The target of intense critical comment when it was first published in 1927, Arrogant Beggar’s scathing attack on charity-run boardinghouses remains one of Anzia Yezierska’s most devastating works of social criticism. The novel follows the fortunes of its young Jewish narrator, Adele Lindner, as she leaves the impoverished conditions of New York’s Lower East Side and tries to rise in the world. Portraying Adele’s experiences at the Hellman Home for Working Girls, the first half of the novel exposes the “sickening farce” of institutionalized charity while portraying the class tensions that divided affluent German American Jews from more recently arrived Russian American Jews.

    The second half of the novel takes Adele back to her ghetto origins as she explores an alternative model of philanthropy by opening a restaurant that combines the communitarian ideals of Old World shtetl tradition with the contingencies of New World capitalism. Within the context of this radical message, Yezierska revisits the themes that have made her work famous, confronting complex questions of ethnic identity, assimilation, and female self-realization.

    Katherine Stubbs’s introduction provides a comprehensive and compelling historical, social, and literary context for this extraordinary novel and discusses the critical reaction to its publication in light of Yezierska’s biography and the once much-publicized and mythologized version of her life story. Unavailable for over sixty years, Arrogant Beggar will be enjoyed by general readers of fiction and be of crucial importance for feminist critics, students of ethnic literature. It will also prove an exciting and richly rewarding text for students and scholars of Jewish studies, immigrant literature, women’s writing, American history, and working-class fiction.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822382010
    Publication Date: 1996-02-12
    contrib-author: Anzia Yezierska
    copyright-year: 1996
    eisbn: 9780822382010
    isbn-cloth: 9780822317524
    isbn-paper: 9780822317494
    short-abstract:

    The target of intense critical comment when it was first published in 1927, Arrogant Beggar’s scathing attack on charity-run boardinghouses remains one of Anzia Yezierska’s most devastating works of social criticism. The novel follows the fortunes of its young Jewish narrator, Adele Lindner, as she leaves the impoverished conditions of New York’s Lower East Side and tries to rise in the world. Portraying Adele’s experiences at the Hellman Home for Working Girls, the first half of the novel exposes the “sickening farce” of institutionalized charity while portraying the class tensions that divided affluent German American Jews from more recently arrived Russian American Jews.

    The second half of the novel takes Adele back to her ghetto origins as she explores an alternative model of philanthropy by opening a restaurant that combines the communitarian ideals of Old World shtetl tradition with the contingencies of New World capitalism. Within the context of this radical message, Yezierska revisits the themes that have made her work famous, confronting complex questions of ethnic identity, assimilation, and female self-realization.

    Katherine Stubbs’s introduction provides a comprehensive and compelling historical, social, and literary context for this extraordinary novel and discusses the critical reaction to its publication in light of Yezierska’s biography and the once much-publicized and mythologized version of her life story. Unavailable for over sixty years, Arrogant Beggar will be enjoyed by general readers of fiction and be of crucial importance for feminist critics, students of ethnic literature. It will also prove an exciting and richly rewarding text for students and scholars of Jewish studies, immigrant literature, women’s writing, American history, and working-class fiction.

    subtitle:
  • Art and Social Movements
    Author(s): McCaughan, Edward J.
    Abstract:

    Art and Social Movements offers a comparative, cross-border analysis of the role of visual artists in three social movements from the late 1960s through the early 1990s: the 1968 student movement and related activist art collectives in Mexico City, a Zapotec indigenous struggle in Oaxaca, and the Chicano movement in California. Based on extensive archival research and interviews, Edward J. McCaughan explores how artists helped to shape the identities and visions of a generation of Mexican and Chicano activists by creating new visual discourses.

    McCaughan argues that the social power of activist artists emanates from their ability to provoke people to see, think, and act in innovative ways. Artists, he claims, help to create visual languages and spaces through which activists can imagine and perform new collective identities and forms of meaningful citizenship. The artists' work that he discusses remains vital today—in movements demanding fuller democratic rights and social justice for working people, women, ethnic communities, immigrants, and sexual minorities throughout Mexico and the United States. Integrating insights from scholarship on the cultural politics of representation with structural analyses of specific historical contexts, McCaughan expands our understanding of social movements.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822395027
    Publication Date: 2012-03-26
    contrib-author: Edward J. McCaughan
    copyright-year: 2012
    eisbn: 9780822395027
    illustrations-note: 42 illustratons
    isbn-cloth: 9780822351689
    isbn-paper: 9780822351825
    subtitle: Cultural Politics in Mexico and Aztlán
  • Art beyond Itself
    Author(s): Gárcia Canclini, Néstor; Frye, David
    Abstract:

    First published in Spanish in 2010, Art beyond Itself is Néstor García Canclini's deft assessment of contemporary art. The renowned cultural critic suggests that, ideally, art is the place of imminence, the place where we glimpse something just about to happen. Yet, as he demonstrates, defining contemporary art and its role in society is an ever more complicated endeavor. Museums, auction houses, artists, and major actors in economics, politics, and the media are increasingly chummy and interdependent. Art is expanding into urban development and the design and tourism industries. Art practices based on objects are displaced by practices based on contexts. Aesthetic distinctions dissolve as artworks are inserted into the media, urban spaces, digital networks, and social forums. Oppositional artists are adrift in a society without a clear story line. What, after all, counts as transgression in a world of diverse and fragmentary narratives? Seeking a new analytic framework for understanding contemporary art, García Canclini is attentive to particular artworks; to artists including Francis Alÿs, León Ferrari, Teresa Margolles, Antoni Muntadas, and Gabriel Orozco; and to efforts to preserve, for art and artists, some degree of independence from religion, politics, the media, and the market.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822376972
    Publication Date: 2014-04-09
    contrib-author: Néstor Gárcia Canclini
    contrib-translator: David Frye
    copyright-year: 2014
    eisbn: 9780822376972
    illustrations-note: 22 illustrations
    isbn-cloth: 9780822356097
    isbn-paper: 9780822356233
    short-abstract:

    First published in Spanish in 2010, Art beyond Itself is Néstor García Canclini's deft assessment of contemporary art. The renowned cultural critic is attentive to particular artworks; to artists including Francis Alÿs, León Ferrari, Teresa Margolles, Antoni Muntadas, and Gabriel Orozco; and to efforts to preserve, for art and artists, some degree of independence from religion, politics, the media, and the market.

    subtitle: Anthropology for a Society without a Story Line
  • Art for a Modern India, 1947-1980
    Author(s): Brown, Rebecca; Thomas, Nicholas
    Abstract:

    Following India’s independence in 1947, Indian artists creating modern works of art sought to maintain a local idiom, an “Indianness” representative of their newly independent nation, while connecting to modernism, an aesthetic then understood as both universal and presumptively Western. These artists depicted India’s precolonial past while embracing aspects of modernism’s pursuit of the new, and they challenged the West’s dismissal of non-Western places and cultures as sources of primitivist imagery but not of modernist artworks. In Art for a Modern India, Rebecca M. Brown explores the emergence of a self-conscious Indian modernism—in painting, drawing, sculpture, architecture, film, and photography—in the years between independence and 1980, by which time the Indian art scene had changed significantly and postcolonial discourse had begun to complicate mid-century ideas of nationalism.

    Through close analyses of specific objects of art and design, Brown describes how Indian artists engaged with questions of authenticity, iconicity, narrative, urbanization, and science and technology. She explains how the filmmaker Satyajit Ray presented the rural Indian village as a socially complex space rather than as the idealized site of “authentic India” in his acclaimed Apu Trilogy, how the painter Bhupen Khakhar reworked Indian folk idioms and borrowed iconic images from calendar prints in his paintings of urban dwellers, and how Indian architects developed a revivalist style of bold architectural gestures anchored in India’s past as they planned the Ashok Hotel and the Vigyan Bhavan Conference Center, both in New Delhi. Discussing these and other works of art and design, Brown chronicles the mid-twentieth-century trajectory of India’s modern visual culture.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822392262
    Publication Date: 2009-01-01
    contrib-author: Rebecca Brown
    contrib-series-editor: Nicholas Thomas
    copyright-year: 2009
    eisbn: 9780822392262
    illustrations-note: 27 illustrations (incl. 10 in color)
    isbn-cloth: 9780822343554
    isbn-paper: 9780822343752
    series: Objects/Histories
    short-abstract:

    A look at how prominent Indian visual artists created modern art for the postcolonial nation in the years between India's independence in 1947 and 1980.

    subtitle:
  • Art from a Fractured Past
    Author(s): Milton, Cynthia E.
    Abstract:

    Peru's Truth and Reconciliation Commission not only documented the political violence of the 1980s and 1990s but also gave Peruvians a unique opportunity to examine the causes and nature of that violence. In Art from a Fractured Past, scholars and artists expand on the commission's work, arguing for broadening the definition of the testimonial to include various forms of artistic production as documentary evidence. Their innovative focus on representation offers new and compelling perspectives on how Peruvians experienced those years and how they have attempted to come to terms with the memories and legacies of violence. Their findings about Peru offer insight into questions of art, memory, and truth that resonate throughout Latin America in the wake of "dirty wars" of the last half century. Exploring diverse works of art, including memorials, drawings, theater, film, songs, painted wooden retablos (three-dimensional boxes), and fiction, including an acclaimed graphic novel, the contributors show that art, not constrained by literal truth, can generate new opportunities for empathetic understanding and solidarity.

    Contributors. Ricardo Caro Cárdenas, Jesús Cossio, Ponciano del Pino, Cynthia M. Garza, Edilberto Jímenez Quispe, Cynthia E. Milton, Jonathan Ritter, Luis Rossell, Steve J. Stern, María Eugenia Ulfe, Víctor Vich, Alfredo Villar

     

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822377467
    Publication Date: 2014-01-27
    contrib-other: Cynthia E. Milton
    copyright-year: 2013
    eisbn: 9780822377467
    illustrations-note: 51 photos, 2 maps
    isbn-cloth: 9780822355151
    isbn-paper: 9780822355304
    short-abstract:

    Art from a Fractured Past is an interdisciplinary collection examining how Peruvians are representing, and attempting to make sense of, the violence of the 1980s and 1990s through art, including drawings, monuments, fiction, theater, and cinema.

    subtitle: Memory and Truth Telling in Post–Shining Path Peru
  • Arts in Earnest
    Author(s): Patterson, Daniel W.; Zugg III, Charles G.
    Abstract:

    Arts in Earnest explores the unique folklife of North Carolina from ruddy ducks to pranks in the mill. Traversing from Murphy to Manteo, these fifteen essays demonstrate the importance of North Carolina’s continually changing folklife. From decoy carving along the coast, to the music of tobacco chants and the blues of the Piedmont, to the Jack tales of the mountains, Arts in Earnest reflects the story of a people negotiating their rapidly changing social and economic environment.

    Personal interviews are an important element in the book. Laura Lee, an elderly black woman from Chatham County, describes the quilts she made from funeral flower ribbons; witnesses and friends each remember varying details of the Duke University football player who single-handedly vanquished a gang of would-be muggers; Clyde Jones leads a safari through his backyard, which is filled with animals made of wood and cement that represent nontraditional folk art; the songs and sermon of a Primitive Baptist service flow together as one—“it tills you up all over”; Durham bluesman Willie Trice, one of a handful of Durham musicians who recorded in the 1930s and early 1940s, remembers when the active tobacco warehouses offered ready audiences—“They’d tip us a heap of change to play some music”; and Goldsboro tobacco auctioneer H. L. “Speed” Riggs chants 460 words per minute, five to six times faster than a normal conversational rate.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822381617
    Publication Date: 1989-12-13
    contrib-editor: Daniel W. Patterson; Charles G. Zugg III
    copyright-year: 1990
    eisbn: 9780822381617
    isbn-cloth: 9780822309437
    isbn-paper: 9780822310211
    short-abstract:

    Arts in Earnest explores the unique folklife of North Carolina from ruddy ducks to pranks in the mill. Traversing from Murphy to Manteo, these fifteen essays demonstrate the importance of North Carolina’s continually changing folklife. From decoy carving along the coast, to the music of tobacco chants and the blues of the Piedmont, to the Jack tales of the mountains, Arts in Earnest reflects the story of a people negotiating their rapidly changing social and economic environment.

    Personal interviews are an important element in the book. Laura Lee, an elderly black woman from Chatham County, describes the quilts she made from funeral flower ribbons; witnesses and friends each remember varying details of the Duke University football player who single-handedly vanquished a gang of would-be muggers; Clyde Jones leads a safari through his backyard, which is filled with animals made of wood and cement that represent nontraditional folk art; the songs and sermon of a Primitive Baptist service flow together as one—“it tills you up all over”; Durham bluesman Willie Trice, one of a handful of Durham musicians who recorded in the 1930s and early 1940s, remembers when the active tobacco warehouses offered ready audiences—“They’d tip us a heap of change to play some music”; and Goldsboro tobacco auctioneer H. L. “Speed” Riggs chants 460 words per minute, five to six times faster than a normal conversational rate.

    subtitle: North Carolina Folklife
  • Arts of the Political
    Author(s): Amin, Ash; Thrift, Nigel
    Abstract:

    In the West, "the Left," understood as a loose conglomeration of interests centered around the goal of a fairer and more equal society, still struggles to make its voice heard and its influence felt, even amid an overwhelming global recession. In Arts of the Political: New Openings for the Left, Ash Amin and Nigel Thrift argue that only by broadening the domain of what is considered political and what can be made into politics will the Left be able to respond forcefully to injustice and inequality. In particular, the Left requires a more imaginative and experimental approach to the politics of creating a better society. The authors propose three political arts that they consider crucial to transforming the Left: boosting invention, leveraging organization, and mobilizing affect. They maintain that successful Left political movements tend to surpass traditional notions of politics and open up political agency to these kinds of considerations. In other words, rather than providing another blueprint for the future, Amin and Thrift concentrate their attention on a more modest examination of the conduct of politics itself and the ways that it can be made more effective.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822399056
    Publication Date: 2013-02-25
    contrib-author: Ash Amin; Nigel Thrift
    copyright-year: 2013
    eisbn: 9780822399056
    illustrations-note: 2 tables
    isbn-cloth: 9780822353874
    isbn-paper: 9780822354017
    short-abstract:

    Seeking to reinvigorate the political Left, Ash Amin and Nigel Thrift advocate an experimental "world-making" politics that is able to adapt to changing circumstances, shifting categories, and emergent problems.

    subtitle: New Openings for the Left
  • Asia as Method
    Author(s): Chen, Kuan-Hsing
    Abstract:

    Centering his analysis in the dynamic forces of modern East Asian history, Kuan-Hsing Chen recasts cultural studies as a politically urgent global endeavor. He argues that the intellectual and subjective work of decolonization begun across East Asia after the Second World War was stalled by the cold war. At the same time, the work of deimperialization became impossible to imagine in imperial centers such as Japan and the United States. Chen contends that it is now necessary to resume those tasks, and that decolonization, deimperialization, and an intellectual undoing of the cold war must proceed simultaneously. Combining postcolonial studies, globalization studies, and the emerging field of “Asian studies in Asia,” he insists that those on both sides of the imperial divide must assess the conduct, motives, and consequences of imperial histories.

    Chen is one of the most important intellectuals working in East Asia today; his writing has been influential in Taiwan, South Korea, Hong Kong, Japan, Singapore, and mainland China for the past fifteen years. As a founding member of the Inter-Asia Cultural Studies Society and its journal, he has helped to initiate change in the dynamics and intellectual orientation of the region, building a network that has facilitated inter-Asian connections. Asia as Method encapsulates Chen’s vision and activities within the increasingly “inter-referencing” East Asian intellectual community and charts necessary new directions for cultural studies.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822391692
    Publication Date: 2010-03-26
    contrib-author: Kuan-Hsing Chen
    copyright-year: 2010
    eisbn: 9780822391692
    illustrations-note: 1 table
    isbn-cloth: 9780822346647
    isbn-paper: 9780822346760
    short-abstract:

    A leading proponent of knowledge exchanges within East Asia and of an international cultural studies insists that those on both sides of the imperial divide must assess the conduct, motives, and consequences of imperialism.

    subtitle: Toward Deimperialization
  • Asian Biotech
    Author(s): Ong, Aihwa; Chen, Nancy N.; Fischer, Michael M. J.; Dumit, Joseph; Sunder Rajan, Kaushik; Thompson, Charis
    Abstract:

    Providing the first overview of Asia’s emerging biosciences landscape, this timely and important collection brings together ethnographic case studies on biotech endeavors such as genetically modified foods in China, clinical trials in India, blood collection in Singapore and China, and stem-cell research in Singapore, South Korea, and Taiwan. While biotech policies and projects vary by country, the contributors identify a significant trend toward state entrepreneurialism in biotechnology, and they highlight the ways that political thinking and ethical reasoning are converging around the biosciences. As ascendant nations in a region of postcolonial emergence, with an “uncanny surplus” in population and pandemics, Asian countries treat their populations as sources of opportunity and risk. Biotech enterprises are allied to efforts to overcome past humiliations and restore national identity and political ambition, and they are legitimized as solutions to national anxieties about food supplies, diseases, epidemics, and unknown biological crises in the future. Biotechnological responses to perceived risks stir deep feelings about shared fate, and they crystallize new ethical configurations, often re-inscribing traditional beliefs about ethnicity, nation, and race. As many of the essays in this collection illustrate, state involvement in biotech initiatives is driving the emergence of “biosovereignty,” an increasing pressure for state control over biological resources, commercial health products, corporate behavior, and genetic based-identities. Asian Biotech offers much-needed analysis of the interplay among biotechnologies, economic growth, biosecurity, and ethical practices in Asia.

    Contributors

    Vincanne Adams

    Nancy N. Chen

    Stefan Ecks

    Kathleen Erwin

    Phuoc V. Le

    Jennifer Liu

    Aihwa Ong

    Margaret Sleeboom-Faulkner

    Kaushik Sunder Rajan

    Wen-Ching Sung

    Charis Thompson

    Ara Wilson

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822393207
    Publication Date: 2010-10-15
    contrib-editor: Aihwa Ong; Nancy N. Chen
    contrib-other: Kaushik Sunder Rajan; Charis Thompson
    contrib-series-editor: Michael M. J. Fischer; Joseph Dumit
    copyright-year: 2010
    eisbn: 9780822393207
    illustrations-note: 3 illustrations
    isbn-cloth: 9780822347934
    isbn-paper: 9780822348092
    series: Experimental Futures
    short-abstract:

    Ethnographic analyses of emerging bioscientific enterprises in Asia, including genetically modified foods in China, clinical trials in India, and stem-cell research in Singapore, South Korea, and Taiwan.

    subtitle: Ethics and Communities of Fate
  • Assimilating Asians
    Author(s): Chu, Patricia P.; Pease, Donald E.
    Abstract:

    One of the central tasks of Asian American literature, argues Patricia P. Chu, has been to construct Asian American identities in the face of existing, and often contradictory, ideas about what it means to be an American. Chu examines the model of the Anglo-American bildungsroman and shows how Asian American writers have adapted it to express their troubled and unstable position in the United States. By aligning themselves with U.S. democratic ideals while also questioning the historical realities of exclusion, internment, and discrimination, Asian American authors, contends Chu, do two kinds of ideological work: they claim Americanness for Asian Americans, and they create accounts of Asian ethnicity that deploy their specific cultures and histories to challenge established notions of Americanness.

    Chu further demonstrates that Asian American male and female writers engage different strategies in the struggle to adapt, reflecting their particular, gender-based relationships to immigration, work, and cultural representation. While offering fresh perspectives on the well-known writings—both fiction and memoir—of Maxine Hong Kingston, Amy Tan, Bharati Mukherjee, Frank Chin, and David Mura, Assimilating Asians also provides new insight into the work of less recognized but nevertheless important writers like Carlos Bulosan, Edith Eaton, Younghill Kang, Milton Murayama, and John Okada. As she explores this expansive range of texts—published over the course of the last century by authors of Chinese, Japanese, Korean, Filipino, and Indian origin or descent—Chu is able to illuminate her argument by linking it to key historical and cultural events.

    Assimilating Asians makes an important contribution to the fields of Asian American, American, and women’s studies. Scholars of Asian American literature and culture, as well as of ethnicity and assimilation, will find particular interest and value in this book.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822381358
    Publication Date: 2000-03-08
    contrib-author: Patricia P. Chu
    contrib-series-editor: Donald E. Pease
    copyright-year: 2000
    eisbn: 9780822381358
    isbn-cloth: 9780822324300
    isbn-paper: 9780822324652
    series: New Americanists
    short-abstract:

    This work combines social theory with literary analysis to look at how Asian American writers use literature to participate in the critique and analysis of their position in US culture.

    subtitle: Gendered Strategies of Authorship in Asian America
  • At the Edge of Sight
    Author(s): Smith, Shawn Michelle
    Abstract:

    The advent of photography revolutionized perception, making visible what was once impossible to see with the human eye. In At the Edge of Sight, Shawn Michelle Smith engages these dynamics of seeing and not seeing, focusing attention as much on absence as presence, on the invisible as the visible. Exploring the limits of photography and vision, she asks: What fails to register photographically, and what remains beyond the frame? What is hidden by design, and what is obscured by cultural blindness? Smith studies manifestations of photography's brush with the unseen in her own photographic work and across the wide-ranging images of early American photographers, including F. Holland Day, Eadweard Muybridge, Andrew J. Russell, Chansonetta Stanley Emmons, and Augustus Washington. She concludes by showing how concerns raised in the nineteenth century remain pertinent today in the photographs of Abu Ghraib. Ultimately, Smith explores the capacity of photography to reveal what remains beyond the edge of sight.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822378266
    Publication Date: 2013-10-14
    contrib-author: Shawn Michelle Smith
    copyright-year: 2013
    eisbn: 9780822378266
    illustrations-note: 120 photos, incl. 9 in color
    isbn-cloth: 9780822354864
    isbn-paper: 9780822355021
    short-abstract:

    Shawn Michelle Smith examines how the advent of photography revolutionized perception, making what was once invisible visible, while also revealing the limitations of what can be seen.

    subtitle: Photography and the Unseen
  • Authentic Indians
    Author(s): Raibmon, Paige
    Abstract:

    In this innovative history, Paige Raibmon examines the political ramifications of ideas about “real Indians.” Focusing on the Northwest Coast in the late nineteenth century and early twentieth, she describes how government officials, missionaries, anthropologists, reformers, settlers, and tourists developed definitions of Indian authenticity based on such binaries as Indian versus White, traditional versus modern, and uncivilized versus civilized. They recognized as authentic only those expressions of “Indianness” that conformed to their limited definitions and reflected their sense of colonial legitimacy and racial superiority. Raibmon shows that Whites and Aboriginals were collaborators—albeit unequal ones—in the politics of authenticity. Non-Aboriginal people employed definitions of Indian culture that limited Aboriginal claims to resources, land, and sovereignty, while Aboriginals utilized those same definitions to access the social, political, and economic means necessary for their survival under colonialism.

    Drawing on research in newspapers, magazines, agency and missionary records, memoirs, and diaries, Raibmon combines cultural and labor history. She looks at three historical episodes: the participation of a group of Kwakwaka’wakw from Vancouver in the 1893 World’s Columbian Exposition in Chicago; the work of migrant Aboriginal laborers in the hop fields of Puget Sound; and the legal efforts of Tlingit artist Rudolph Walton to have his mixed-race step-children admitted to the white public school in Sitka, Alaska. Together these episodes reveal the consequences of outsiders’ attempts to define authentic Aboriginal culture. Raibmon argues that Aboriginal culture is much more than the reproduction of rituals; it also lies in the means by which Aboriginal people generate new and meaningful ways of identifying their place in a changing modern environment.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822386773
    Publication Date: 2005-06-30
    contrib-author: Paige Raibmon
    copyright-year: 2005
    eisbn: 9780822386773
    illustrations-note: 37 b&w photos, 2 illus.
    isbn-cloth: 9780822335351
    isbn-paper: 9780822335474
    series: a John Hope Franklin Center Book
    short-abstract:

    Analyzes cultural adaptation among aboriginal people in the Pacific Northwest, tracing the colonial origins and political implications of ideas about native "authenticity."

    subtitle: Episodes of Encounter from the Late-Nineteenth-Century Northwest Coast
  • Autobiographical Writing Across the Disciplines
    Author(s): Freedman, Diane P.; Frey, Olivia; Behar, Ruth; Bleich, David
    Abstract:

    Autobiographical Writing Across the Disciplines reveals the extraordinary breadth of the intellectual movement toward self-inclusive scholarship. Presenting exemplary works of criticism incorporating personal narratives, this volume brings together twenty-seven essays from scholars in literary studies and history, mathematics and medicine, philosophy, music, film, ethnic studies, law, education, anthropology, religion, and biology. Pioneers in the development of the hybrid genre of personal scholarship, the writers whose work is presented here challenge traditional modes of inquiry and ways of knowing. In assembling their work, editors Diane P. Freedman and Olivia Frey have provided a rich source of reasons for and models of autobiographical criticism.

    The editors’ introduction presents a condensed history of academic writing, chronicles the origins of autobiographical criticism, and emphasizes the role of feminism in championing the value of personal narrative to disciplinary discourse. The essays are all explicitly informed by the identities of their authors, among whom are a feminist scientist, a Jewish filmmaker living in Germany, a potential carrier of Huntington’s disease, and a doctor pregnant while in medical school. Whether describing how being a professor of ethnic literature necessarily entails being an activist, how music and cooking are related, or how a theology is shaped by cultural identity, the contributors illuminate the relationship between their scholarly pursuits and personal lives and, in the process, expand the boundaries of their disciplines.

    Contributors:

    Kwame Anthony Appiah

    Ruth Behar

    Merrill Black

    David Bleich

    James Cone

    Brenda Daly

    Laura B. DeLind

    Carlos L. Dews

    Michael Dorris

    Diane P. Freedman

    Olivia Frey

    Peter Hamlin

    Laura Duhan Kaplan

    Perri Klass

    Muriel Lederman

    Deborah Lefkowitz

    Eunice Lipton

    Robert D. Marcus

    Donald Murray

    Seymour Papert

    Carla T. Peterson

    David Richman

    Sara Ruddick

    Julie Tharp

    Bonnie TuSmith

    Alex Wexler

    Naomi Weisstein

    Patricia Williams

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822384960
    Publication Date: 2004-01-02
    contrib-editor: Diane P. Freedman; Olivia Frey
    contrib-other: Ruth Behar; David Bleich
    copyright-year: 2003
    eisbn: 9780822384960
    illustrations-note: 7 b&w photos
    isbn-cloth: 9780822332008
    isbn-paper: 9780822332138
    short-abstract:

    An anthology of the personal/autobiographical essays of scholars who have made the life story an important part of their disciplinary research.

    subtitle: A Reader
  • Avant-Garde Fascism
    Author(s): Antliff, Mark
    Abstract:

    Investigating the central role that theories of the visual arts and creativity played in the development of fascism in France, Mark Antliff examines the aesthetic dimension of fascist myth-making within the history of the avant-garde. Between 1909 and 1939, a surprising array of modernists were implicated in this project, including such well-known figures as the symbolist painter Maurice Denis, the architects Le Corbusier and Auguste Perret, the sculptors Charles Despiau and Aristide Maillol, the “New Vision” photographer Germaine Krull, and the fauve Maurice Vlaminck.

    Antliff considers three French fascists: Georges Valois, Philippe Lamour, and Thierry Maulnier, demonstrating how they appropriated the avant-garde aesthetics of cubism, futurism, surrealism, and the so-called Retour à l’Ordre (“Return to Order”), and, in one instance, even defined the “dynamism” of fascist ideology in terms of Soviet filmmaker Sergei Eisenstein’s theory of montage. For these fascists, modern art was the mythic harbinger of a regenerative revolution that would overthrow existing governmental institutions, inaugurate an anticapitalist new order, and awaken the creative and artistic potential of the fascist “new man.”

    In formulating the nexus of fascist ideology, aesthetics, and violence, Valois, Lamour, and Maulnier drew primarily on the writings of the French political theorist Georges Sorel, whose concept of revolutionary myth proved central to fascist theories of cultural and national regeneration in France. Antliff analyzes the impact of Sorel’s theory of myth on Valois, Lamour, and Maulnier. Valois created the first fascist movement in France; Lamour, a follower of Valois, established the short-lived Parti Fasciste Révolutionnaire in 1928 before founding two fascist-oriented journals; Maulnier forged a theory of fascism under the auspices of the journals Combat and Insurgé.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822390473
    Publication Date: 2007-08-13
    contrib-author: Mark Antliff
    copyright-year: 2007
    eisbn: 9780822390473
    illustrations-note: 67 b&w illustrations
    isbn-cloth: 9780822340157
    isbn-paper: 9780822340348
    short-abstract:

    An investigation of the central role that theories of the visual arts and creativity played in the development of fascism in France between 1909 and 1939.

    subtitle: The Mobilization of Myth, Art, and Culture in France, 1909–1939
  • Avant-Garde, Internationalism, and Politics
    Author(s): Giunta, Andrea; Kahn, Peter; Mignolo, Walter D.; Silverblatt, Irene; Saldívar-Hull, Sonia
    Abstract:

    The 1960s were heady years in Argentina. Visual artists, curators, and critics sought to fuse art and politics; to broaden the definition of art to encompass happenings and assemblages; and, above all, to achieve international recognition for new, cutting-edge Argentine art. A bestseller in Argentina, Avant-Garde, Internationalism, and Politics is an examination of the 1960s as a brief historical moment when artists, institutions, and critics joined to promote an international identity for Argentina’s visual arts.

    The renowned Argentine art historian and critic Andrea Giunta analyzes projects specifically designed to internationalize Argentina’s art and avant-garde during the 1960s: the importation of exhibitions of contemporary international art, the sending of Argentine artists abroad to study, the organization of prize competitions involving prestigious international art critics, and the export of exhibitions of Argentine art to Europe and the United States. She looks at the conditions that made these projects possible—not least the Alliance for Progress, a U.S. program of “exchange” and “cooperation” meant to prevent the spread of communism through Latin America in the wake of the Cuban Revolution—as well as the strategies formulated to promote them. She describes the influence of Romero Brest, prominent art critic, supporter of abstract art, and director of the Centro de Artes Visuales del Instituto Tocuato Di Tella (an experimental art center in Buenos Aires); various group programs such as Nueva Figuración and Arte Destructivo; and individual artists including Antonio Berni, Alberto Greco, León Ferrari, Marta Minujin, and Luis Felipe Noé. Giunta’s rich narrative illuminates the contentious postwar relationships between art and politics, Latin America and the United States, and local identity and global recognition.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822389699
    Publication Date: 2007-06-25
    contrib-author: Andrea Giunta
    contrib-series-editor: Walter D. Mignolo; Irene Silverblatt; Sonia Saldívar-Hull
    contrib-translator: Peter Kahn
    copyright-year: 2007
    eisbn: 9780822389699
    illustrations-note: 63 illustrations (22 color/16 pg insert, 41 b&w)
    isbn-cloth: 9780822338772
    isbn-paper: 9780822338932
    series: Latin America Otherwise
    short-abstract:

    An exploration of the impact of the 1960s and the U.S. post-cold war moment on the reception of Latin American art and artists.

    subtitle: Argentine Art in the Sixties
  • Averting the Apocalypse
    Author(s): Bonner, Arthur
    Abstract:

    There are two Indias: the caste and class elite who hold all power and make up 10 to 15 percent of the population, and everyone else. Averting the Apocalypse is about everyone else. Arthur Bonner, a former New York Times reporter with long experience as a foreign correspondent in Asia, conducted interviews over many months while traveling almost 20,000 miles within India seeking out the underclass and social activists who together are beginning to mobilize for social change at the bottom of Indian society. Working in areas torn by violence, Bonner offers a terrifyingly accurate portrait of a society bloodied by decades of unequal social structure and the absence of a civil society and political mechanism capable of responding to the exploitation of the poor and weak.

    Bonner finds that India’s inability or refusal to address its debilitating social structure may be the precursor to an apocalyptic social upheaval unless heed is paid to the social movements that his first-hand investigation reveals.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822381631
    Publication Date: 1990-04-19
    contrib-author: Arthur Bonner
    copyright-year: 1990
    eisbn: 9780822381631
    isbn-cloth: 9780822310297
    isbn-paper: 9780822310488
    subtitle: Social Movements in India Today
  • B Jenkins
    Author(s): Moten, Fred; McGovern, Charles; Kun, Josh
    Abstract:

    The fourth collection of poetry from the literary and cultural critic Fred Moten, B Jenkins is named after the poet’s mother, who passed away in 2000. It is both an elegy and an inquiry into many of the themes that Moten has explored throughout his career: language, music, performance, improvisation, and the black radical aesthetic and political tradition. In Moten’s verse, the arts, scholarship, and activism intertwine. Cadences echo from his mother’s Arkansas home through African American history and avant-garde jazz riffs. Formal innovations suggest the ways that words, sounds, and music give way to one another.

    The first and last poems in the collection are explicitly devoted to Moten’s mother; the others relate more obliquely to her life and legacy. They invoke performers, writers, artists, and thinkers including not only James Baldwin, Roland Barthes, Frederick Douglass, Billie Holiday, Audre Lorde, Charlie Parker, and Cecil Taylor, but also contemporary scholars of race, affect, and queer theory. The book concludes with an interview conducted by Charles Henry Rowell, the editor of the journal Callaloo. Rowell elicits Moten’s thoughts on the relation of his poetry to theory, music, and African American vernacular culture.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822392675
    Publication Date: 2009-12-15
    contrib-author: Fred Moten
    contrib-series-editor: Charles McGovern; Josh Kun
    copyright-year: 2010
    eisbn: 9780822392675
    isbn-cloth: 9780822346845
    isbn-paper: 9780822346968
    series: Refiguring American Music
    short-abstract:

    This fourth collection of poetry from the literary and cultural critic Fred Moten is an elegy to his mother and an inquiry into language, music, performance, improvisation, and the black radical tradition.

    subtitle:
  • Babes in Tomorrowland
    Author(s): Sammond, Nicholas
    Abstract:

    Linking Margaret Mead to the Mickey Mouse Club and behaviorism to Bambi, Nicholas Sammond traces a path back to the early-twentieth-century sources of “the normal American child.” He locates the origins of this hypothetical child in the interplay between developmental science and popular media. In the process, he shows that the relationship between the media and the child has long been much more symbiotic than arguments that the child is irrevocably shaped by the media it consumes would lead one to believe. Focusing on the products of the Walt Disney company, Sammond demonstrates that without a vision of a normal American child and the belief that movies and television either helped or hindered its development, Disney might never have found its market niche as the paragon of family entertainment. At the same time, without media producers such as Disney, representations of the ideal child would not have circulated as freely in American popular culture.

    In vivid detail, Sammond describes how the latest thinking about human development was translated into the practice of child-rearing and how magazines and parenting manuals characterized the child as the crucible of an ideal American culture. He chronicles how Walt Disney Productions’ greatest creation—the image of Walt Disney himself—was made to embody evolving ideas of what was best for the child and for society. Bringing popular child-rearing manuals, periodicals, advertisements, and mainstream sociological texts together with the films, tv programs, ancillary products, and public relations materials of Walt Disney Productions, Babes in Tomorrowland reveals a child that was as much the necessary precursor of popular media as the victim of its excesses.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822386834
    Publication Date: 2005-06-29
    contrib-author: Nicholas Sammond
    copyright-year: 2005
    eisbn: 9780822386834
    illustrations-note: 36 b&w illus.
    isbn-cloth: 9780822334514
    isbn-paper: 9780822334637
    short-abstract:

    Examines the place of Disney in the changing construction of childhood in mid-twentieth-centru America.

    subtitle: Walt Disney and the Making of the American Child, 1930–1960
  • Babylon East
    Author(s): Sterling, Marvin
    Abstract:

    An important center of dancehall reggae performance, sound clashes are contests between rival sound systems: groups of emcees, tune selectors, and sound engineers. In World Clash 1999, held in Brooklyn, Mighty Crown, a Japanese sound system and the only non-Jamaican competitor, stunned the international dancehall community by winning the event. In 2002, the Japanese dancer Junko Kudo became the first non-Jamaican to win Jamaica’s National Dancehall Queen Contest. High-profile victories such as these affirmed and invigorated Japan’s enthusiasm for dancehall reggae. In Babylon East, the anthropologist Marvin D. Sterling traces the history of the Japanese embrace of dancehall reggae and other elements of Jamaican culture, including Rastafari, roots reggae, and dub music.

    Sterling provides a nuanced ethnographic analysis of the ways that many Japanese involved in reggae as musicians and dancers, and those deeply engaged with Rastafari as a spiritual practice, seek to reimagine their lives through Jamaican culture. He considers Japanese performances and representations of Jamaican culture in clubs, competitions, and festivals; on websites; and in song lyrics, music videos, reggae magazines, travel writing, and fiction. He illuminates issues of race, ethnicity, gender, sexuality, and class as he discusses topics ranging from the cultural capital that Japanese dancehall artists amass by immersing themselves in dancehall culture in Jamaica, New York, and England, to the use of Rastafari as a means of critiquing class difference, consumerism, and the colonial pasts of the West and Japan. Encompassing the reactions of Jamaica’s artists to Japanese appropriations of Jamaican culture, as well as the relative positions of Jamaica and Japan in the world economy, Babylon East is a rare ethnographic account of Afro-Asian cultural exchange and global discourses of blackness beyond the African diaspora.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822392736
    Publication Date: 2010-06-08
    contrib-author: Marvin Sterling
    copyright-year: 2010
    eisbn: 9780822392736
    illustrations-note: 5 illustrations
    isbn-cloth: 9780822347057
    isbn-paper: 9780822347224
    short-abstract:

    An ethnographic analysis of the Japanese embrace of dancehall reggae and other elements of Jamaican culture, including Rastafari, roots reggae, and dub music.

    subtitle: Performing Dancehall, Roots Reggae, and Rastafari in Japan
  • Babylon Girls
    Author(s): Brown, Jayna
    Abstract:

    Babylon Girls is a groundbreaking cultural history of the African American women who performed in variety shows—chorus lines, burlesque revues, cabaret acts, and the like—between 1890 and 1945. Through a consideration of the gestures, costuming, vocal techniques, and stagecraft developed by African American singers and dancers, Jayna Brown explains how these women shaped the movement and style of an emerging urban popular culture. In an era of U.S. and British imperialism, these women challenged and played with constructions of race, gender, and the body as they moved across stages and geographic space. They pioneered dance movements including the cakewalk, the shimmy, and the Charleston—black dances by which the “New Woman” defined herself. These early-twentieth-century performers brought these dances with them as they toured across the United States and around the world, becoming cosmopolitan subjects more widely traveled than many of their audiences.

    Investigating both well-known performers such as Ada Overton Walker and Josephine Baker and lesser-known artists such as Belle Davis and Valaida Snow, Brown weaves the histories of specific singers and dancers together with incisive theoretical insights. She describes the strange phenomenon of blackface performances by women, both black and white, and she considers how black expressive artists navigated racial segregation. Fronting the “picaninny choruses” of African American child performers who toured Britain and the Continent in the early 1900s, and singing and dancing in The Creole Show (1890), Darktown Follies (1913), and Shuffle Along (1921), black women variety-show performers of the early twentieth century paved the way for later generations of African American performers. Brown shows not only how these artists influenced transnational ideas of the modern woman but also how their artistry was an essential element in the development of jazz.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822390695
    Publication Date: 2009-01-01
    contrib-author: Jayna Brown
    copyright-year: 2008
    eisbn: 9780822390695
    illustrations-note: 49 illustrations
    isbn-cloth: 9780822341338
    isbn-paper: 9780822341574
    short-abstract:

    Cultural history of African American women's popular performance between 1890 and 1945, focusing on performers from the variety, music hall, and cabaret stages.

    subtitle: Black Women Performers and the Shaping of the Modern
  • Bacchanalian Sentiments
    Author(s): Birth, Kevin K.
    Abstract:

    Trinidad is known for its vibrant musical traditions, which reflect the island’s ethnic diversity. The annual Carnival, far and away the biggest event in Trinidad, is filled with soca and calypso music. Soca is a dance music derived from calypso, a music with African antecedents. In parang, a Venezuelan and Spanish derived folk music that dominates Trinidadian Christmas festivities, groups of singers and musicians progress from house to house, performing for their neighbors. Chutney is also an Indo-Caribbean music. In Bacchanalian Sentiments, Kevin K. Birth argues that these and other Trinidadian musical genres and traditions not only provide a soundtrack to daily life on the southern Caribbean island; they are central to the ways that Trinidadians experience and navigate their social lives and interpret political events.

    Birth draws on fieldwork he conducted in one of Trinidad’s ethnically diverse rural villages to explore the relationship between music and social and political consciousness on the island. He describes how Trinidadians use the affective power of music and the physiological experience of performance to express and work through issues related to identity, ethnicity, and politics. He looks at how the performers and audience members relate to different musical traditions. Turning explicitly to politics, Birth recounts how Trinidadians used music as a means of making sense of the attempted coup d’état in 1990 and the 1995 parliamentary election, which resulted in a tie between the two major political parties. Bacchanalian Sentiments is an innovative ethnographic analysis of the significance of music, and particular musical forms, in the everyday lives of rural Trinidadians.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822388746
    Publication Date: 2007-12-12
    contrib-author: Kevin K. Birth
    copyright-year: 2008
    eisbn: 9780822388746
    illustrations-note: 2 figures
    isbn-cloth: 9780822341413
    isbn-paper: 9780822341659
    short-abstract:

    An ethnographic exploration of the relationship between music and social and political consciousness on the island of Trinidad.

    subtitle: Musical Experiences and Political Counterpoints in Trinidad
  • Backward Glances
    Author(s): Martin, Fran; Chow, Rey; Harootunian, Harry; Miyoshi, Masao
    Abstract:

    Backward Glances reveals that the passionate love one woman feels for another occupies a position of unsuspected centrality in contemporary Chinese mass cultures. By examining representations of erotic and romantic love between women in popular films, elite and pulp fiction, and television dramas, Fran Martin shows how youthful same-sex love is often framed as a universal, even ennobling, feminine experience. She argues that a temporal logic dominates depictions of female homoeroticism, and she traces that logic across texts produced and consumed in mainland China, Hong Kong, and Taiwan during the twentieth century and the early twenty-first. Attentive to both transnational cultural flows and local particularities, Martin shows how loving relations between women in mass culture are usually represented as past experiences. Adult protagonists revel in the repeated, mournful narration of their memories. Yet these portrayals do not simply or finally consign the same-sex loving woman to the past—they also cause her to reappear ceaselessly in the present.

    As Martin explains, memorial schoolgirl love stories are popular throughout contemporary Chinese cultures. The same-sex attracted young woman appears in both openly homophobic and proudly queer-affirmative narratives, as well as in stories whose ideological valence is less immediately clear. Martin demonstrates that the stories, television programs, and films she analyzes are not idiosyncratic depictions of marginal figures, but manifestations of a broader, mainstream cultural preoccupation. Her investigation of representations of same-sex love between women sheds new light on contemporary Chinese understandings of sex, love, gender, marriage, and the cultural ordering of human life.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822392637
    Publication Date: 2010-03-29
    contrib-author: Fran Martin
    contrib-series-editor: Rey Chow; Harry Harootunian; Masao Miyoshi
    copyright-year: 2010
    eisbn: 9780822392637
    illustrations-note: 57 illustrations
    isbn-cloth: 9780822346685
    isbn-paper: 9780822346807
    series: Asia-Pacific: Culture, Politics, and Society
    short-abstract:

    An analysis of the dominant patterns in the representation of erotic and romantic love between women in contemporary film, television, and fiction from China, Hong Kong and Taiwan.

    subtitle: Contemporary Chinese Cultures and the Female Homoerotic Imaginary
  • Bad Modernisms
    Author(s): Mao, Douglas; Walkowitz, Rebecca L.; Love, Heather K.; Puchner, Martin
    Abstract:

    Modernism is hot again. At the dawn of the twenty-first century, poets and architects, designers and critics, teachers and artists are rediscovering the virtues of the previous century’s most vibrant cultural constellation. Yet this widespread embrace raises questions about modernism’s relation to its own success. Modernism’s “badness”—its emphasis on outrageous behavior, its elevation of negativity, its refusal to be condoned—seems essential to its power. But once modernism is accepted as “good” or valuable (as a great deal of modernist art now is), its status as a subversive aesthetic intervention seems undermined. The contributors to Bad Modernisms tease out the contradictions in modernism’s commitment to badness.

    Bad Modernisms thus builds on and extends the “new modernist studies,” recent work marked by the application of diverse methods and attention to texts and artists not usually labeled as modernist. In this collection, these developments are exemplified by essays ranging from a reading of dandyism in 1920s Harlem as a performance of a “bad” black modernist imaginary to a consideration of Filipino American modernism in the context of anticolonialism. The contributors reconsider familiar figures—such as Virginia Woolf, D. H. Lawrence, Josef von Sternberg, Ludwig Wittgenstein, W. H. Auden, and Wyndham Lewis—and bring to light the work of lesser-known artists, including the writer Carlos Bulosan and the experimental filmmaker Len Lye. Examining cultural artifacts ranging from novels to manifestos, from philosophical treatises to movie musicals, and from anthropological essays to advertising campaigns, these essays signal the capaciousness and energy galvanizing the new modernist studies.

    Contributors. Lisa Fluet, Laura Frost, Michael LeMahieu, Heather K. Love, Douglas Mao, Jesse Matz, Joshua L. Miller, Monica L. Miller, Sianne Ngai, Martin Puchner, Rebecca L. Walkowitz

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822387824
    Publication Date: 2010-07-01
    contrib-editor: Douglas Mao; Rebecca L. Walkowitz
    contrib-other: Heather K. Love; Martin Puchner
    copyright-year: 2006
    eisbn: 9780822387824
    illustrations-note: 41 b&w photos
    isbn-cloth: 9780822337843
    isbn-paper: 9780822337973
    short-abstract:

    Collection of essays on the ways in which modernist literature, film, and art transgressed the artistic and cultural norms we associate we "high" modernism.

    subtitle:
  • Bad Souls
    Author(s): Davis, Elizabeth Anne
    Abstract:

    Bad Souls is an ethnographic study of responsibility among psychiatric patients and their caregivers in Thrace, the northeastern borderland of Greece. Elizabeth Anne Davis examines responsibility in this rural region through the lens of national psychiatric reform, a process designed to shift treatment from custodial hospitals to outpatient settings. Challenged to help care for themselves, patients struggled to function in communities that often seemed as much sources of mental pathology as sites of refuge. Davis documents these patients' singular experience of community, and their ambivalent aspirations to health, as they grappled with new forms of autonomy and dependency introduced by psychiatric reform. Planned, funded, and overseen largely by the European Union, this "democratic experiment," one of many reforms adopted by Greece since its accession to the EU in the early 1980s, has led Greek citizens to question the state and its administration of human rights, social welfare, and education. Exploring the therapeutic dynamics of diagnosis, persuasion, healing, and failure in Greek psychiatry, Davis traces the terrains of truth, culture, and freedom that emerge from this questioning of the state at the borders of Europe.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822394624
    Publication Date: 2012-02-08
    contrib-author: Elizabeth Anne Davis
    copyright-year: 2012
    eisbn: 9780822394624
    illustrations-note: 5 photos, 1 map
    isbn-cloth: 9780822350934
    isbn-paper: 9780822351061
    short-abstract:

    As part of the agreement for Greece to join the EU, the country had to undertake a massive psychiatric reform, moving patients out of custodial hospitals and returning them to the community to be treated as outpatients. In this subtle ethnography, Elizabeth Davis shows how this played out at the edge of the nation, in the border region of Thrace.

    subtitle: Madness and Responsibility in Modern Greece
  • Bad Water
    Author(s): Stolz, Robert
    Abstract:

    Bad Water is a sophisticated theoretical analysis of Japanese thinkers and activists' efforts to reintegrate the natural environment into Japan's social and political thought in the late nineteenth century and early twentieth. The need to incorporate nature into politics was revealed by a series of large-scale industrial disasters in the 1890s. The Ashio Copper Mine unleashed massive amounts of copper, arsenic, mercury, and other pollutants into surrounding watersheds. Robert Stolz argues that by forcefully demonstrating the mutual penetration of humans and nature, industrial pollution biologically and politically compromised the autonomous liberal subject underlying the political philosophy of the modernizing Meiji state. In the following decades, socialism, anarchism, fascism, and Confucian benevolence and moral economy were marshaled in the search for new theories of a modern political subject and a social organization adequate to the environmental crisis. With detailed considerations of several key environmental activists, including Tanaka Shōzō, Bad Water is a nuanced account of Japan's environmental turn, a historical moment when, for the first time, Japanese thinkers and activists experienced nature as alienated from themselves and were forced to rebuild the connections.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822376507
    Publication Date: 2014-03-12
    contrib-author: Robert Stolz
    copyright-year: 2014
    eisbn: 9780822376507
    illustrations-note: 1 table, 8 figures
    isbn-cloth: 9780822356905
    isbn-paper: 9780822356998
    series: Asia-Pacific: Culture, Politics, and Society
    subtitle: Nature, Pollution, and Politics in Japan, 1870–1950
  • Badiou and Politics
    Author(s): Bosteels, Bruno
    Abstract:

    Badiou and Politics offers a much-anticipated interpretation of the work of the influential French philosopher Alain Badiou. Countering ideas of the philosopher as a dogmatic, absolutist, or even mystical thinker enthralled by the force of the event as a radical break, Bruno Bosteels reveals Badiou’s deep and ongoing investment in the dialectic. Bosteels draws on all of Badiou’s writings, from the philosopher’s student days in the 1960s to the present, as well as on Badiou’s exchanges with other thinkers, from his avowed “masters” Louis Althusser and Jacques Lacan, to interlocutors including Gilles Deleuze, Slavoj Žižek, Daniel Bensaïd, Jacques Derrida, Ernesto Laclau, and Judith Butler. Bosteels tracks the philosopher’s political activities from the events of May 1968 through his embrace of Maoism and the work he has done since the 1980s, helping to mobilize France’s illegal immigrants or sans-papiers. Ultimately, Bosteels argues for understanding Badiou’s thought as a revival of dialectical materialism, and he illuminates the philosopher’s understanding of the task of theory: to define a conceptual space for thinking emancipatory politics in the present.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822394471
    Publication Date: 2011-07-01
    contrib-author: Bruno Bosteels
    copyright-year: 2011
    eisbn: 9780822394471
    isbn-cloth: 9780822350583
    isbn-paper: 9780822350767
    series: Post-Contemporary Interventions
    short-abstract:

    Examines the political thinking of French philosopher of Alain Badiou, whose theories of ontology and mathematics have set him apart from many of his post-structuralist contemporaries.

    subtitle:
  • Banana Wars
    Author(s): Striffler, Steve; Moberg, Mark; Joseph, Gilbert M.; Rosenberg, Emily S.
    Abstract:

    Over the past century, the banana industry has radically transformed Latin America and the Caribbean and become a major site of United States–Latin American interaction. Banana Wars is a history of the Americas told through the cultural, political, economic, and agricultural processes that brought bananas from the forests of Latin America and the Caribbean to the breakfast tables of the United States and Europe. The first book to examine these processes in all the western hemisphere regions where bananas are grown for sale abroad, Banana Wars advances the growing body of scholarship focusing on export commodities from historical and social scientific perspectives.

    Bringing together the work of anthropologists, sociologists, economists, historians, and geographers, this collection reveals how the banana industry marshaled workers of differing nationalities, ethnicities, and languages and, in so doing, created unprecedented potential for conflict throughout Latin American and the Caribbean. The frequently abusive conditions that banana workers experienced, the contributors point out, gave rise to one of Latin America’s earliest and most militant labor movements. Responding to both the demands of workers’ organizations and the power of U.S. capital, Latin American governments were inevitably affected by banana production. Banana Wars explores how these governments sometimes asserted their sovereignty over foreign fruit companies, but more often became their willing accomplices. With several essays focusing on the operations of the extraordinarily powerful United Fruit Company, the collection also examines the strategies and reactions of the American and European corporations seeking to profit from the sale of bananas grown by people of different cultures working in varied agricultural and economic environments.

    Contributors

    Philippe Bourgois

    Marcelo Bucheli

    Dario Euraque

    Cindy Forster

    Lawrence Grossman

    Mark Moberg

    Laura T. Raynolds

    Karla Slocum

    John Soluri

    Steve Striffler

    Allen Wells

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822385288
    Publication Date: 2003-10-30
    contrib-editor: Steve Striffler; Mark Moberg
    contrib-series-editor: Gilbert M. Joseph; Emily S. Rosenberg
    copyright-year: 2003
    eisbn: 9780822385288
    illustrations-note: 8 illustrations, 16 tables, 11 figures
    isbn-cloth: 9780822331599
    isbn-paper: 9780822331964
    series: American Encounters/Global Interactions
    short-abstract:

    The history of banana cultivation and its huge impact on Latin American, history, politics, and culture.

    subtitle: Power, Production, and History in the Americas
  • Baroque New Worlds
    Author(s): Zamora, Lois Parkinson; Kaup, Monika; Nietzsche, Friedrich; Wolfflin, Heinrich; Benjamin, Walter; d'Ors, Eugenio
    Abstract:

    Baroque New Worlds traces the changing nature of Baroque representation in Europe and the Americas across four centuries, from its seventeenth-century origins as a Catholic and monarchical aesthetic and ideology to its contemporary function as a postcolonial ideology aimed at disrupting entrenched power structures and perceptual categories. Baroque forms are exuberant, ample, dynamic, and porous, and in the regions colonized by Catholic Europe, the Baroque was itself eventually colonized. In the New World, its transplants immediately began to reflect the cultural perspectives and iconographies of the indigenous and African artisans who built and decorated Catholic structures, and Europe’s own cultural products were radically altered in turn. Today, under the rubric of the Neobaroque, this transculturated Baroque continues to impel artistic expression in literature, the visual arts, architecture, and popular entertainment worldwide.

    Since Neobaroque reconstitutions necessarily reference the European Baroque, this volume begins with the reevaluation of the Baroque that evolved in Europe during the late nineteenth century and the early twentieth. Foundational essays by Friedrich Nietzsche, Heinrich Wölfflin, Walter Benjamin, Eugenio d’Ors, René Wellek, and Mario Praz recuperate and redefine the historical Baroque. Their essays lay the groundwork for the revisionist Latin American essays, many of which have not been translated into English until now. Authors including Alejo Carpentier, José Lezama Lima, Severo Sarduy, Édouard Glissant, Haroldo de Campos, and Carlos Fuentes understand the New World Baroque and Neobaroque as decolonizing strategies in Latin America and other postcolonial contexts. This collection moves between art history and literary criticism to provide a rich interdisciplinary discussion of the transcultural forms and functions of the Baroque.

    Contributors. Dorothy Z. Baker, Walter Benjamin, Christine Buci-Glucksmann, José Pascual Buxó, Leo Cabranes-Grant, Haroldo de Campos, Alejo Carpentier, Irlemar Chiampi, William Childers, Gonzalo Celorio, Eugenio d’Ors, Jorge Ruedas de la Serna, Carlos Fuentes, Édouard Glissant, Roberto González Echevarría, Ángel Guido, Monika Kaup, José Lezama Lima, Friedrich Nietzsche, Mario Praz, Timothy J. Reiss, Alfonso Reyes, Severo Sarduy, Pedro Henríquez Ureña, Maarten van Delden, René Wellek, Christopher Winks, Heinrich Wölfflin, Lois Parkinson Zamora

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822392521
    Publication Date: 2009-01-01
    contrib-editor: Lois Parkinson Zamora; Monika Kaup
    contrib-other: Friedrich Nietzsche; Heinrich Wolfflin; Walter Benjamin; Eugenio d'Ors
    copyright-year: 2010
    eisbn: 9780822392521
    illustrations-note: 52 illustrations, 4 figures
    isbn-cloth: 9780822346302
    isbn-paper: 9780822346425
    short-abstract:

    Traces the changing nature of Baroque representation across European and Latin American cultures, from an imperial aesthetic encoding Catholic ideologies, into a means of resistance to colonialism, into a mode of postcolonial self-definition.

    subtitle: Representation, Transculturation, Counterconquest
  • Barrio Libre
    Author(s): Rosas, Gilberto
    Abstract:

    The city of Nogales straddles the border running between Arizona and Sonora, Mexico. On the Mexican side, marginalized youths calling themselves Barrio Libre (Free 'Hood) employ violence, theft, and bribery to survive, often preying on undocumented migrants who navigate the city's sewer system to cross the US-Mexico border. In this book, Gilberto Rosas draws on his in-depth ethnographic research among the members of Barrio Libre to understand why they have embraced criminality and how neoliberalism and security policies on both sides of the border have affected the youths' descent into Barrio Libre.

    Rosas argues that although these youths participate in the victimization of others, they should not be demonized. They are complexly and adversely situated. The effects of NAFTA have forced many of them, as well as other Mexicans, to migrate to Nogales. Moving fluidly with the youths through the spaces that they inhabit and control, he shows how the militarization of the border actually destabilized the region and led Barrio Libre to turn to increasingly violent activities, including drug trafficking. By focusing on these youths and their delinquency, Rosas demonstrates how capitalism and criminality shape perceptions and experiences of race, sovereignty, and resistance along the US-Mexico border.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822391838
    Publication Date: 2012-06-05
    contrib-author: Gilberto Rosas
    copyright-year: 2012
    eisbn: 9780822391838
    illustrations-note: 5 illustrations
    isbn-cloth: 9780822352259
    isbn-paper: 9780822352372
    short-abstract:

    In this book, Gilberto Rosas draws on his in-depth ethnographic research among the members of Barrio Libre to understand why they have embraced criminality and how neoliberalism and security policies on both sides of the border have affected the youths' descent into Barrio Libre.

    subtitle: Criminalizing States and Delinquent Refusals of the New Frontier
  • Battling for Hearts and Minds
    Author(s): Stern, Steve J.; Mignolo, Walter D.; Silverblatt, Irene; Saldívar-Hull, Sonia
    Abstract:

    Battling for Hearts and Minds is the story of the dramatic struggle to define collective memory in Chile during the violent, repressive dictatorship of General Augusto Pinochet, from the 1973 military coup in which he seized power through his defeat in a 1988 plebiscite. Steve J. Stern provides a riveting narration of Chile’s political history during this period. At the same time, he analyzes Chileans’ conflicting interpretations of events as they unfolded. Drawing on testimonios, archives, Truth Commission documents, radio addresses, memoirs, and written and oral histories, Stern identifies four distinct perspectives on life and events under the dictatorship. He describes how some Chileans viewed the regime as salvation from ruin by Leftists (the narrative favored by Pinochet’s junta), some as a wound repeatedly reopened by the state, others as an experience of persecution and awakening, and still others as a closed book, a past to be buried and forgotten.

    In the 1970s, Chilean dissidents were lonely “voices in the wilderness” insisting that state terror and its victims be recognized and remembered. By the 1980s, the dissent had spread, catalyzing a mass movement of individuals who revived public dialogue by taking to the streets, creating alternative media, and demanding democracy and human rights. Despite long odds and discouraging defeats, people of conscience—victims of the dictatorship, priests, youth, women, workers, and others—overcame fear and succeeded in creating truthful public memories of state atrocities. Recounting both their efforts and those of the regime’s supporters to win the battle for Chileans’ hearts and minds, Stern shows how profoundly the struggle to create memories, to tell history, matters.

    Battling for Hearts and Minds is the second volume in the trilogy The Memory Box of Pinochet’s Chile. The third book will examine Chileans’ efforts to achieve democracy while reckoning with Pinochet’s legacy.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822388548
    Publication Date: 2006-09-04
    contrib-author: Steve J. Stern
    contrib-series-editor: Walter D. Mignolo; Irene Silverblatt; Sonia Saldívar-Hull
    copyright-year: 2006
    eisbn: 9780822388548
    illustrations-note: 36 photos, 2 maps
    isbn-cloth: 9780822338277
    isbn-paper: 9780822338413
    series: Latin America Otherwise
    short-abstract:

    The story of the dramatic struggle to define collective memory in Chile during the violent, repressive dictatorship of General Augusto Pinochet.

    subtitle: Memory Struggles in Pinochet’s Chile, 1973–1988
  • Beautiful at All Seasons
    Author(s): Lawrence, Elizabeth; Armstrong, Ann L.; Wilson, Lindie
    Abstract:

    Elizabeth Lawrence (1904–85) is recognized as one of America’s most important gardeners and garden writers. In 1957, Lawrence began a weekly column for the Charlotte Observer, blending gardening lore and horticultural expertise gained from her own gardens in Raleigh and Charlotte, North Carolina, and from her many gardener friends. This book presents 132 of her beloved columns. Never before published in book form, they were chosen from the more than 700 pieces that she wrote for the Observer over fourteen years.

    Lawrence exchanged plants and gardening tips with everyone from southern “farm ladies” trading bulbs in garden bulletins to prominent regional gardeners. She corresponded with nursery owners, everyday backyard gardeners, and literary luminaries such as Katharine White and Eudora Welty. Her books, including A Southern Garden, The Little Bulbs, and Gardens in Winter, inspired several generations of gardeners in the South and beyond.

    The columns in this volume cover specific plants, such as sweet peas, hellebores, peonies, and the bamboo growing outside her living-room window, as well as broader topics including the usefulness of vines, the importance of daily pruning, and organic gardening. Like all of Lawrence’s writing, these columns are peppered with references to conversations with neighbors and quotations from poetry, mythology, and correspondence. They brim with knowledge gained from a lifetime of experimenting in her gardens, from her visits to other gardens, and from her extensive reading.

    Lawrence once wrote, “Dirty fingernails are not the only requirement for growing plants. One must be as willing to study as to dig, for a knowledge of plants is acquired as much from books as from experience.” As inspiring today as when they first appeared in the Charlotte Observer, the columns collected in Beautiful at All Seasons showcase not only Lawrence’s vast knowledge but also her intimate, conversational writing style and her lifelong celebration of gardens and gardening.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822389767
    Publication Date: 2007-02-07
    contrib-author: Elizabeth Lawrence
    contrib-editor: Ann L. Armstrong; Lindie Wilson
    copyright-year: 2007
    eisbn: 9780822389767
    illustrations-note: 9 illustrations, 1 map
    isbn-cloth: 9780822338871
    short-abstract:

    In 1957, the revered garden writer Elizabeth Lawrence began a weekly column for the Charlotte Observer. This book presents 132 of the more than 700 pieces that she wrote for the Observer over fourteen years.

    subtitle: Southern Gardening and Beyond with Elizabeth Lawrence
  • Beautiful Bottom, Beautiful Shame
    Author(s): Stockton, Kathryn Bond; Barale, Michèle Aina; Goldberg, Jonathan; Moon, Michael; Sedgwick, Eve Kosofsky
    Abstract:

    Shame, Kathryn Bond Stockton argues in Beautiful Bottom, Beautiful Shame, has often been a meeting place for the signs “black” and “queer” and for black and queer people—overlapping groups who have been publicly marked as degraded and debased. But when and why have certain forms of shame been embraced by blacks and queers? How does debasement foster attractions? How is it used for aesthetic delight? What does it offer for projects of sorrow and ways of creative historical knowing? How and why is it central to camp?

    Stockton engages the domains of African American studies, queer theory, psychoanalysis, film theory, photography, semiotics, and gender studies. She brings together thinkers rarely, if ever, read together in a single study—James Baldwin, Radclyffe Hall, Jean Genet, Toni Morrison, Robert Mapplethorpe, Eldridge Cleaver, Todd Haynes, Norman Mailer, Leslie Feinberg, David Fincher, and Quentin Tarantino—and reads them with and against major theorists, including Georges Bataille, Sigmund Freud, Eve Kosofsky Sedgwick, Jacques Lacan, Roland Barthes, and Leo Bersani. Stockton asserts that there is no clear, mirrored relation between the terms “black” and “queer”; rather, seemingly definitive associations attached to each are often taken up or crossed through by the other. Stockton explores dramatic switchpoints between these terms: the stigmatized “skin” of some queers’ clothes, the description of blacks as an “economic bottom,” the visual force of interracial homosexual rape, the complicated logic of so-called same-sex miscegenation, and the ways in which a famous depiction of slavery (namely, Morrison’s Beloved) seems bound up with depictions of AIDS. All of the thinkers Stockton considers scrutinize the social nature of shame as they examine the structures that make debasements possible, bearable, pleasurable, and creative, even in their darkness.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822387985
    Publication Date: 2006-06-28
    contrib-author: Kathryn Bond Stockton
    contrib-series-editor: Michèle Aina Barale; Jonathan Goldberg; Michael Moon; Eve Kosofsky Sedgwick
    copyright-year: 2006
    eisbn: 9780822387985
    illustrations-note: 16 b&w photos
    isbn-cloth: 9780822337836
    isbn-paper: 9780822337966
    series: Series Q
    short-abstract:

    The relationship between black queer subjects and debasement as portrayed within popular culture texts and films.

    subtitle: Where “Black” Meets “Queer”
  • Becoming Beside Ourselves
    Author(s): Rotman, Brian; Lenoir, Timothy
    Abstract:

    Becoming Beside Ourselves continues the investigation that the renowned cultural theorist and mathematician Brian Rotman began in his previous books Signifying Nothing and Ad Infinitum...The Ghost in Turing’s Machine: exploring certain signs and the conceptual innovations and subjectivities that they facilitate or foreclose. In Becoming Beside Ourselves, Rotman turns his attention to alphabetic writing or the inscription of spoken language. Contending that all media configure what they mediate, he maintains that alphabetic writing has long served as the West’s dominant cognitive technology. Its logic and limitations have shaped thought and affect from its inception until the present. Now its grip on Western consciousness is giving way to virtual technologies and networked media, which are reconfiguring human subjectivity just as alphabetic texts have done for millennia.

    Alphabetic texts do not convey the bodily gestures of human speech: the hesitations, silences, and changes of pitch that infuse spoken language with affect. Rotman suggests that by removing the body from communication, alphabetic texts enable belief in singular, disembodied, authoritative forms of being such as God and the psyche. He argues that while disembodied agencies are credible and real to “lettered selves,” they are increasingly incompatible with selves and subjectivities formed in relation to new virtual technologies and networked media. Digital motion-capture technologies are restoring gesture and even touch to a prominent role in communication. Parallel computing is challenging the linear thought patterns and ideas of singularity facilitated by alphabetic language. Barriers between self and other are breaking down as the networked self is traversed by other selves to become multiple and distributed, formed through many actions and perceptions at once. The digital self is going plural, becoming beside itself.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822389118
    Publication Date: 2008-06-25
    contrib-author: Brian Rotman
    contrib-other: Timothy Lenoir
    copyright-year: 2008
    eisbn: 9780822389118
    illustrations-note: 1 figure
    isbn-cloth: 9780822341833
    isbn-paper: 9780822342007
    short-abstract:

    Theoretical study of the relationship between technoscience and the human body that examines the ways in which bodies and machines "speak" not just through language but also through gesture, numbers, and other non-alphabetic systems of expressio

    subtitle: The Alphabet, Ghosts, and Distributed Human Being
  • Becoming Black
    Author(s): Wright, Michelle M.
    Abstract:

    Becoming Black is a powerful theorization of Black subjectivity throughout the African diaspora. In this unique comparative study, Michelle M. Wright discusses the commonalties and differences in how Black writers and thinkers from the United States, the Caribbean, Africa, France, Great Britain, and Germany have responded to white European and American claims about Black consciousness. As Wright traces more than a century of debate on Black subjectivity between intellectuals of African descent and white philosophers, she also highlights how feminist writers have challenged patriarchal theories of Black identity.

    Wright argues that three nineteenth-century American and European works addressing race—Thomas Jefferson’s Notes on the State of Virginia, G. W. F. Hegel’s Philosophy of History, and Count Arthur de Gobineau’s Essay on the Inequality of the Human Races—were particularly influential in shaping twentieth-century ideas about Black subjectivity. She considers these treatises in depth and describes how the revolutionary Black thinkers W. E. B. Du Bois, Aimé Césaire, Léopold Sédar Senghor, and Frantz Fanon countered the theories they promulgated. She explains that while Du Bois, Césaire, Senghor, and Fanon rejected the racist ideologies of Jefferson, Hegel, and Gobineau, for the most part they did so within what remained a nationalist, patriarchal framework. Such persistent nationalist and sexist ideologies were later subverted, Wright shows, in the work of Black women writers including Carolyn Rodgers and Audre Lorde and, more recently, the British novelists Joan Riley, Naomi King, Jo Hodges, and Andrea Levy. By considering diasporic writing ranging from Du Bois to Lorde to the contemporary African novelists Simon Njami and Daniel Biyaoula, Wright reveals Black subjectivity as rich, varied, and always evolving.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822385868
    Publication Date: 2003-12-17
    contrib-author: Michelle M. Wright
    copyright-year: 2004
    eisbn: 9780822385868
    isbn-cloth: 9780822332114
    isbn-paper: 9780822332886
    short-abstract:

    A theoretical troubling of the assumptions of uniformity in Blackness, comparing writings by and about African diasporic subjects from the U.S., Britain, France, and Germany.

    subtitle: Creating Identity in the African Diaspora
  • Becoming Imperial Citizens
    Author(s): Banerjee, Sukanya; Grewal, Inderpal; Kaplan, Caren; Wiegman, Robyn
    Abstract:

    In this remarkable account of imperial citizenship, Sukanya Banerjee investigates the ways that Indians formulated notions of citizenship in the British Empire from the late nineteenth century through the early twentieth. Tracing the affective, thematic, and imaginative tropes that underwrote Indian claims to formal equality prior to decolonization, she emphasizes the extralegal life of citizenship: the modes of self-representation it generates even before it is codified and the political claims it triggers because it is deferred. Banerjee theorizes modes of citizenship decoupled from the rights-conferring nation-state; in so doing, she provides a new frame for understanding the colonial subject, who is usually excluded from critical discussions of citizenship.

    Interpreting autobiography, fiction, election speeches, economic analyses, parliamentary documents, and government correspondence, Banerjee foregrounds the narrative logic sustaining the unprecedented claims to citizenship advanced by racialized colonial subjects. She focuses on the writings of figures such as Dadabhai Naoroji, known as the first Asian to be elected to the British Parliament; Surendranath Banerjea, among the earliest Indians admitted into the Indian Civil Service; Cornelia Sorabji, the first woman to study law in Oxford and the first woman lawyer in India; and Mohandas K. Gandhi, who lived in South Africa for nearly twenty-one years prior to his involvement in Indian nationalist politics. In her analysis of the unexpected registers through which they carved out a language of formal equality, Banerjee draws extensively from discussions in both late-colonial India and Victorian Britain on political economy, indentured labor, female professionalism, and bureaucratic modernity. Signaling the centrality of these discussions to the formulations of citizenship, Becoming Imperial Citizens discloses a vibrant transnational space of political action and subjecthood, and it sheds new light on the complex mutations of the category of citizenship.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822391982
    Publication Date: 2010-05-27
    contrib-author: Sukanya Banerjee
    contrib-series-editor: Inderpal Grewal; Caren Kaplan; Robyn Wiegman
    copyright-year: 2010
    eisbn: 9780822391982
    isbn-cloth: 9780822345909
    isbn-paper: 9780822346081
    series: Next Wave: New Directions in Women's Studies
    short-abstract:

    By examining how Indians formulated notions of citizenship across the British empire from the late nineteenth century through the early twentieth, Sujatha Banerjee theorizes modes of citizenship decoupled from the rights-conferring nation-state.

    subtitle: Indians in the Late-Victorian Empire
  • Becoming Reinaldo Arenas
    Author(s): Olivares, Jorge
    Abstract:

    Becoming Reinaldo Arenas explores the life and work of the Cuban writer Reinaldo Arenas (1943–1990), who emerged on the Latin American cultural scene in the 1960s and quickly achieved literary fame. Yet as a political dissident and an openly gay man, Arenas also experienced discrimination and persecution; he produced much of his work amid political controversy and precarious living conditions. In 1980, having survived ostracism and incarceration in Cuba, he arrived in the United States during the Mariel boatlift. Ten years later, after struggling with poverty and AIDS in New York, Arenas committed suicide.

    Through insightful close readings of a selection of Arenas's works, including unpublished manuscripts and correspondence, Olivares examines the writer's personal, political, and artistic trajectory, focusing on his portrayals of family, sexuality, exile, and nostalgia. He documents Arenas's critical engagement with cultural and political developments in revolutionary Cuba and investigates the ways in which Arenas challenged literary and national norms. Olivares's analysis shows how Arenas drew on his life experiences to offer revealing perspectives on the Cuban Revolution, the struggles of Cuban exiles, and the politics of sexuality.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822397588
    Publication Date: 2013-03-20
    contrib-author: Jorge Olivares
    copyright-year: 2013
    eisbn: 9780822397588
    isbn-cloth: 9780822353829
    isbn-paper: 9780822353966
    short-abstract:

    Jorge Olivares connects the personal, political, and artistic trajectories of the Cuban writer Reinaldo Arenas (1943—1990) to Arenas's insights into the Cuban Revolution, the struggles of exiles, and the politics of sexuality.

    subtitle: Family, Sexuality, and The Cuban Revolution
  • Becoming Undone
    Author(s): Grosz, Elizabeth
    Abstract:

    In Becoming Undone, Elizabeth Grosz addresses three related concepts—life, politics, and art—by exploring the implications of Charles Darwin’s account of the evolution of species. Challenging characterizations of Darwin’s work as a form of genetic determinism, Grosz shows that his writing reveals an insistence on the difference between natural selection and sexual selection, the principles that regulate survival and attractiveness, respectively. Sexual selection complicates natural selection by introducing aesthetic factors and the expression of individual will, desire, or pleasure. Grosz explores how Darwin’s theory of sexual selection transforms philosophy, our understanding of humanity in its male and female forms, our ideas of political relations, and our concepts of art. Connecting the naturalist’s work to the writings of Bergson, Deleuze, and Irigaray, she outlines a postmodern Darwinism that understands all of life as forms of competing and coordinating modes of openness. Although feminists have been suspicious of the concepts of nature and biology central to Darwin’s work, Grosz proposes that his writings are a rich resource for developing a more politicized, radical, and far-reaching feminist understanding of matter, nature, biology, time, and becoming.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822394433
    Publication Date: 2011-08-22
    contrib-author: Elizabeth Grosz
    copyright-year: 2011
    eisbn: 9780822394433
    illustrations-note: 1 illustration
    isbn-cloth: 9780822350538
    isbn-paper: 9780822350712
    short-abstract:

    Elizabeth Grosz addresses three related concepts—life, politics, and art—by exploring the implications of Charles Darwin s account of the evolution of species.

    subtitle: Darwinian Reflections on Life, Politics, and Art
  • Before the Nation
    Author(s): Burns, Susan L.; Chow, Rey; Harootunian, Harry; Miyoshi, Masao; Huntington, Madge
    Abstract:

    Exploring the emergence and evolution of theories of nationhood that continue to be evoked in present-day Japan, Susan L. Burns provides a close examination of the late-eighteenth-century intellectual movement kokugaku, which means "the study of our country.” Departing from earlier studies of kokugaku that focused on intellectuals whose work has been valorized by modern scholars, Burns seeks to recover the multiple ways "Japan" as social and cultural identity began to be imagined before modernity.

    Central to Burns's analysis is Motoori Norinaga’s Kojikiden, arguably the most important intellectual work of Japan's early modern period. Burns situates the Kojikiden as one in a series of attempts to analyze and interpret the mythohistories dating from the early eighth century, the Kojiki and Nihon shoki. Norinaga saw these texts as keys to an original, authentic, and idyllic Japan that existed before being tainted by "flawed" foreign influences, notably Confucianism and Buddhism. Hailed in the nineteenth century as the begetter of a new national consciousness, Norinaga's Kojikiden was later condemned by some as a source of Japan's twentieth-century descent into militarism, war, and defeat. Burns looks in depth at three kokugaku writers—Ueda Akinari, Fujitani Mitsue, and Tachibana Moribe—who contested Norinaga's interpretations and produced competing readings of the mythohistories that offered new theories of community as the basis for Japanese social and cultural identity. Though relegated to the footnotes by a later generation of scholars, these writers were quite influential in their day, and by recovering their arguments, Burns reveals kokugaku as a complex debate—involving history, language, and subjectivity—with repercussions extending well into the modern era.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822384908
    Publication Date: 2003-11-11
    contrib-author: Susan L. Burns
    contrib-series-editor: Rey Chow; Harry Harootunian; Masao Miyoshi; Madge Huntington
    copyright-year: 2003
    eisbn: 9780822384908
    isbn-cloth: 9780822331834
    isbn-paper: 9780822331728
    series: Asia-Pacific: Culture, Politics, and Society
    short-abstract:

    Shows how a modern nationalism was constructed in Japan from existing notions of community, at a time before the idea of “nation.”

    subtitle: Kokugaku and the Imagining of Community in Early Modern Japan
  • Belated Travelers
    Author(s): Behdad, Ali; Fish, Stanley; Jameson, Fredric
    Abstract:

    In Belated Travelers, Ali Behdad offers a compelling cultural critique of nineteenth-century travel writing and its dynamic function in European colonialism. Arriving too late to the Orient, at a time when tourism and colonialism had already turned the exotic into the familiar, late nineteenth-century European travelers to the Middle East experienced a sense of belatedness, of having missed the authentic experience once offered by a world that was already disappearing. Behdad argues that this nostalgic desire for the other contains an implicit critique of Western superiority, a split within European discourses of otherness. Working from these insights and using analyses of power derived from Foucault, Behdad engages in a new critique of orientalism. No longer viewed as a coherent and unified phenomenon or a single developmental tradition, it is seen as a complex and shifting field of practices that has relied upon its own ambivalence and moments of discontinuity to ensure and maintain its power as a discourse of dominance.

    Through readings of Flaubert, Nerval, Kipling, Blunt, and Eberhardt, and following the transition in travel literature from travelog to tourist guide, Belated Travelers addresses the specific historical conditions of late nineteenth-century orientalism implicated in the discourses of desire and power. Behdad also views a broad range of issues in addition to nostalgia and tourism, including transvestism and melancholia, to specifically demonstrate the ways in which the heterogeneity of orientalism and the plurality of its practice is an enabling force in the production and transformation of colonial power.

    An exceptional work that provides an important critique of issues at the forefront of critical practice today, Belated Travelers will be eagerly awaited by specialists in nineteenth-century British and French literatures, and all concerned with colonial and post-colonial discourse.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822382638
    Publication Date: 1994-08-12
    contrib-author: Ali Behdad
    contrib-series-editor: Stanley Fish; Fredric Jameson
    copyright-year: 1994
    eisbn: 9780822382638
    illustrations-note: 10 b&w photographs, 2 maps
    isbn-cloth: 9780822314547
    isbn-paper: 9780822314714
    series: Post-Contemporary Interventions
    subtitle: Orientalism in the Age of Colonial Dissolution
  • Below the Line
    Author(s): Mayer, Vicki
    Abstract:

    Below the Line illuminates the hidden labor of people who not only produce things that the television industry needs, such as a bit of content or a policy sound bite, but also produce themselves in the service of capital expansion. Vicki Mayer considers the work of television set assemblers, soft-core cameramen, reality-program casters, and public-access and cable commissioners in relation to the globalized economy of the television industry. She shows that these workers are increasingly engaged in professional and creative work, unsettling the industry’s mythological account of itself as a business driven by auteurs, manned by an executive class, and created by the talented few. As Mayer demonstrates, the new television economy casts a wide net to exploit those excluded from these hierarchies. Meanwhile, television set assemblers in Brazil devise creative solutions to the problems of material production. Soft-core videographers, who sell televised content, develop their own modes of professionalism. Everyday people become casters, who commodify suitable participants for reality programs, or volunteers, who administer local cable television policies. These sponsors and regulators boost media industries’ profits when they commodify and discipline their colleagues, their neighbors, and themselves. Mayer proposes that studies of production acknowledge the changing dynamics of labor to include production workers who identify themselves and their labor with the industry, even as their work remains undervalued or invisible.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822394136
    Publication Date: 2011-04-25
    contrib-author: Vicki Mayer
    copyright-year: 2011
    eisbn: 9780822394136
    illustrations-note: 5 photographs, 1 figure
    isbn-cloth: 9780822349945
    isbn-paper: 9780822350071
    short-abstract:

    This book focuses on the people—such as television set assemblers, talent scouts, and community regulators—who produce television but are not acknowledged as production workers within Hollywood s industrial hierarchies.

    subtitle: Producers and Production Studies in the New Television Economy
  • Bergson, Politics, and Religion
    Author(s): Lefebvre, Alexandre; White, Melanie
    Abstract:

    Henri Bergson is primarily known for his work on time, memory, and creativity. His equally innovative interventions into politics and religion have, however, been neglected or dismissed until now. In the first book in English dedicated to Bergson as a political thinker, leading Bergson scholars illuminate his positions on core concerns within political philosophy: the significance of emotion in moral judgment, the relationship between biology and society, and the entanglement of politics and religion. Ranging across Bergson's writings but drawing mainly on his last book, The Two Sources of Morality and Religion, the contributors consider Bergson's relevance to contemporary discussions of human rights, democratic pluralism, and environmental ethics.

    Contributors. Keith Ansell-Pearson, G. William Barnard, Claire Colebrook, Hisashi Fujita, Suzanne Guerlac, Vladimir Jankélévitch, Frédéric Keck, Leonard Lawlor, Alexandre Lefebvre, Paola Marrati, John Mullarkey, Paulina Ochoa Espejo, Carl Power, Philippe Soulez, Jim Urpeth, Melanie White, Frédéric Worms

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822395423
    Publication Date: 2012-07-19
    contrib-editor: Alexandre Lefebvre; Melanie White
    copyright-year: 2012
    eisbn: 9780822395423
    isbn-cloth: 9780822352563
    isbn-paper: 9780822352754
    short-abstract:

    Bergson, Politics, and Religion examines the political and religious dimensions of the work of philosopher Henri Bergson. Although best known for his ideas on the nature of time, memory, and evolution, in his final book—The Two Sources of Morality and Religion (1932)—Bergson turned his attention to questions of war, moral duty, and spirituality. The essays in this volume reflect on Bergson as a distinctly political thinker and revitalize his ideas for contemporary political philosophy. Contributors include Keith Ansell-Pearson, Claire Colebrook, Leonard Lawlor, Paola Marrati, Philippe Soulez, and Frédéric Worms.

    subtitle:
  • Between Colonialism and Diaspora
    Author(s): Ballantyne, Tony
    Abstract:

    Bringing South Asian and British imperial history together with recent scholarship on transnationalism and postcolonialism, Tony Ballantyne offers a bold reevaluation of constructions of Sikh identity from the late eighteenth century through the early twenty-first. Ballantyne considers Sikh communities and experiences in Punjab, the rest of South Asia, the United Kingdom, and other parts of the world. He charts the shifting, complex, and frequently competing visions of Sikh identity that have been produced in response to the momentous social changes wrought by colonialism and diaspora. In the process, he argues that Sikh studies must expand its scope to take into account not only how Sikhism is figured in religious and political texts but also on the battlefields of Asia and Europe, in the streets of Singapore and Southall, and in the nightclubs of New Delhi and Newcastle.

    Constructing an expansive historical archive, Ballantyne draws on film, sculpture, fiction, and Web sites, as well as private papers, government records, journalism, and travel narratives. He proceeds from a critique of recent historiography on the development of Sikhism to an analysis of how Sikh identity changed over the course of the long nineteenth century. Ballantyne goes on to offer a reading of the contested interpretations of the life of Dalip Singh, the last Maharaja of Punjab. He concludes with an exploration of bhangra, a traditional form of Punjabi dance that diasporic artists have transformed into a globally popular music style. Much of bhangra’s recent evolution stems from encounters of the Sikh and Afro-Caribbean communities, particularly in the United Kingdom. Ballantyne contends that such cross-cultural encounters are central in defining Sikh identity both in Punjab and the diaspora.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822388111
    Publication Date: 2006-07-26
    contrib-author: Tony Ballantyne
    copyright-year: 2006
    eisbn: 9780822388111
    illustrations-note: 4 b&w photographs, 1 map
    isbn-cloth: 9780822338093
    isbn-paper: 9780822338246
    short-abstract:

    A bold historical reevaluation of constructions of Sikh identity from the late eighteenth century through the early twenty-first.

    subtitle: Sikh Cultural Formations in an Imperial World
  • Between Hollywood and Moscow
    Author(s): Gundle, Stephen; Joseph, Gilbert M.; Rosenberg, Emily S.
    Abstract:

    In the postwar years, Italy underwent a far-reaching process of industrialization that transformed the country into a leading industrial power. Throughout most of this period, the Italian Communist Party (PCI) remained a powerful force in local government and civil society. However, as Stephen Gundle observes, the PCI was increasingly faced with challenges posed by modernization, particularly by mass communication, commercial cultural industries, and consumerism. Between Hollywood and Moscow is an analysis of the PCI’s attempts to cope with these problems in an effort to maintain its organization and subculture.

    Gundle focuses on the theme of cultural policy, examining how the PCI’s political strategies incorporated cultural policies and activities that were intended to respond to the Americanization of daily life in Italy. In formulating this policy, Gundle contends, the Italian Communists were torn between loyalty to the alternative values generated by the Communist tradition and adaptation to the dominant influences of Italian modernization. This equilibrium eventually faltered because the attractive aspects of Americanization and pop culture proved more influential than the PCI’s intellectual and political traditions.

    The first analysis in English of the cultural policies and activities of the PCI, this book will appeal to readers with an interest in modern Italy, the European left, political science, and media studies.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822380344
    Publication Date: 2000-11-13
    contrib-author: Stephen Gundle
    contrib-series-editor: Gilbert M. Joseph; Emily S. Rosenberg
    copyright-year: 2000
    eisbn: 9780822380344
    illustrations-note: 14 b&w photographs, 2 figures
    isbn-cloth: 9780822325307
    isbn-paper: 9780822325635
    series: American Encounters/Global Interactions
    short-abstract:

    A study of the cultural policies of the Italian communist party following the collapse of fascismand the struggle with popular consumer culture that led to its demise in 1991.

    subtitle: The Italian Communists and the Challenge of Mass Culture, 1943–1991
  • Between Jesus and the Market
    Author(s): Kintz, Linda
    Abstract:

    Between Jesus and the Market looks at the appeal of the Christian right-wing movement in contemporary American politics and culture. In her discussions of books and videotapes that are widely distributed by the Christian right but little known by mainstream Americans, Linda Kintz makes explicit the crucial need to understand the psychological makeup of born-again Christians as well as the sociopolitical dynamics involved in their cause. She focuses on the role of religious women in right-wing Christianity and asks, for example, why so many women are attracted to what is often seen as an antiwoman philosophy. The result, a telling analysis of the complexity and appeal of the "emotions that matter" to many Americans, highlights how these emotions now determine public policy in ways that are increasingly dangerous for those outside familiarity’s circle.

    With texts from such organizations as the Christian Coalition, the Heritage Foundation, and Concerned Women for America, and writings by Elizabeth Dole, Newt Gingrich, Pat Robertson, and Rush Limbaugh, Kintz traces the usefulness of this activism for the secular claim that conservative political economy is, in fact, simply an expression of the deepest and most admirable elements of human nature itself. The discussion of Limbaugh shows how he draws on the skepticism of contemporary culture to create a sense of absolute truth within his own media performance—its truth guaranteed by the market. Kintz also describes how conservative interpretations of the Holy Scriptures, the U.S. Constitution, and the Declaration of Independence have been used to challenge causes such as feminism, women’s reproductive rights, and gay and lesbian rights. In addition to critiquing the intellectual and political left for underestimating the power of right-wing grassroots organizing, corporate interests, and postmodern media sophistication, Between Jesus and the Market discusses the proliferation of militia groups, Christian entrepreneurship, and the explosive growth and "selling" of the Promise Keepers.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822382102
    Publication Date: 1997-07-02
    contrib-author: Linda Kintz
    copyright-year: 1997
    eisbn: 9780822382102
    isbn-cloth: 9780822319597
    isbn-paper: 9780822319672
    short-abstract:

    Kintz looks at the appeal of the Christian right wing movement in contemporary American politics and culture. She makes explicit the curcial need to understand the psychological makeup of born again Christians as well as the sociopolitical dynamics involv

    subtitle: The Emotions that Matter in Right-Wing America
  • Between Legitimacy and Violence
    Author(s): Palacios, Marco; Stoller, Richard
    Abstract:

    Between Legitimacy and Violence is an authoritative, sweeping history of Colombia’s “long twentieth century,” from the tumultuous civil wars of the late nineteenth century to the drug wars of the late twentieth. Marco Palacios, a leading Latin American historian, skillfully blends political, economic, social, and cultural history. In an expansive chronological narrative full of vivid detail, he explains Colombia’s political history, discussing key leaders, laws, parties, and ideologies; corruption and inefficiency; and the paradoxical nature of government institutions, which, while stable and enduring, are unable to prevent frequent and extreme outbursts of violence. Palacios traces the trajectory of the economy, addressing agriculture (particularly the economic significance of coffee), the development of a communication and transportation infrastructure, industrialization, and labor struggles. Palacios also gives extensive attention to persistent social inequalities, the role of the Catholic Church, demographic shifts such as urbanization and emigration, and Colombia’s relationship with the United States. Offering a comparative perspective, he frequently contrasts Colombia with other Latin American nations. Throughout, Palacios offers a helpful interpretive framework, connecting developments with their causes and consequences. By thoroughly illuminating Colombia’s past, Between Legitimacy and Violence sheds much-needed light on the country’s violent present.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822387893
    Publication Date: 2006-05-16
    contrib-author: Marco Palacios
    contrib-translator: Richard Stoller
    copyright-year: 2006
    eisbn: 9780822387893
    illustrations-note: 7 tables
    isbn-cloth: 9780822337546
    isbn-paper: 9780822337676
    series: Latin America in Translation
    short-abstract:

    Comprehensive overview of modern Colombian history considers why Colombia's long-established, stable political institutions have not been able to prevent frequent and extreme violence.

    subtitle: A History of Colombia, 1875–2002
  • Between the Guerrillas and the State
    Author(s): Ramírez, María Clemencia; Ramírez, María Clemencia
    Abstract:

    Responding to pressure from the United States, the Colombian government in 1996 intensified aerial fumigation of coca plantations in the western Amazon region. This crackdown on illicit drug cultivation sparked an uprising among the region’s cocaleros, small-scale coca producers and harvest workers. More than 200,000 campesinos marched that summer to protest the heightened threat to their livelihoods. Between the Guerrillas and the State is an ethnographic analysis of the cocalero social movement that emerged from the uprising. María Clemencia Ramírez focuses on how the movement unfolded in the department (state) of Putumayo, which has long been subject to the de facto rule of guerrilla and paramilitary armies. The national government portrayed the area as uncivilized and disorderly and refused to see the coca growers as anything but criminals. Ramírez chronicles how the cocaleros demanded that the state recognize campesinos as citizens, provide basic services, and help them to transition from coca growing to legal and sustainable livelihoods.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822394204
    Publication Date: 2011-06-10
    contrib-author: María Clemencia Ramírez
    contrib-other: María Clemencia Ramírez
    copyright-year: 2011
    eisbn: 9780822394204
    illustrations-note: 11 photographs, 8 tables, 8 maps, 4 figures
    isbn-cloth: 9780822350002
    isbn-paper: 9780822350156
    short-abstract:

    Uses 1996 strike by Colombian coca workers as site to study the state and social movements, analyzing how peasants denied full citizenship become political players in a way that defines the Colombian state in the international arena.

    subtitle: The Cocalero Movement, Citizenship, and Identity in the Colombian Amazon
  • Between Two Fires
    Author(s): Lemon, Alaina
    Abstract:

    Since tsarist times, Roma in Russia have been portrayed as both rebellious outlaws and free-spirited songbirds—in each case, as if isolated from society. In Soviet times, Russians continued to harbor these two, only seemingly opposed, views of “Gypsies,” exalting their songs on stage but scorning them on the streets as liars and cheats. Alaina Lemon’s Between Two Fires examines how Roma themselves have negotiated these dual images in everyday interactions and in stage performances.

    Lemon’s ethnographic study is based on extensive fieldwork in 1990s Russia and focuses on Moscow Romani Theater actors as well as Romani traders and metalworkers. Drawing from interviews with Roma and Russians, observations of performances, and conversations, as well as archives, literary texts, and media, Lemon analyzes the role of theatricality and theatrical tropes in Romani life and the everyday linguistics of social relations and of memory. Historically, the way Romani stage performance has been culturally framed and positioned in Russia has served to typecast Gypsies as “natural” performers, she explains. Thus, while theatrical and musical performance may at times empower Roma, more often it has reinforced and rationalized racial and social stereotypes, excluding them from many Soviet and Russian economic and political arenas. Performance, therefore, defines what it means to be Romani in Russia differently than it does elsewhere, Lemon shows. Considering formal details of language as well as broader cultural and social structures, she also discusses how racial categories relate to post-Soviet economic changes, how gender categories and Euro-Soviet notions of civility are connected, and how ontological distinctions between “stage art” and “real life” contribute to the making of social types. This complex study thus serves as a corrective to romantic views of Roma as detached from political forces.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822381327
    Publication Date: 2000-06-29
    contrib-author: Alaina Lemon
    copyright-year: 2000
    eisbn: 9780822381327
    illustrations-note: 18 b&w photographs, 1 table, 1 map
    isbn-cloth: 9780822324560
    isbn-paper: 9780822324935
    short-abstract:

    The gypsies of Russia and the part they have played in both Soviet and Post-Soviet society.

    subtitle: Gypsy Performance and Romani Memory from Pushkin to Post-Socialism
  • Between You and Me
    Author(s): Butt, Gavin
    Abstract:

    In the decades preceding the Stonewall riots—in the wake of the 1948 publication of Alfred Kinsey’s controversial report on male sexuality and in the midst of a cold war culture of suspicion and paranoia—discussions of homosexuality within the New York art world necessarily circulated via gossip and rumor. Between You and Me explores this informal, everyday talk and how it shaped artists’ lives, their work, and its reception. Revealing the “trivial” and “unserious” aspects of the postwar art scene as key to understanding queer subjectivity, Gavin Butt argues for a richer, more expansive concept of historical evidence, one that supplements the verifiable facts of traditional historical narrative with the gossipy fictions of sexual curiosity.

    Focusing on the period from 1948 to 1963, Butt draws on the accusations and denials of homosexuality that appeared in the popular press, on early homophile publications such as One and the Mattachine Review, and on biographies, autobiographies, and interviews. In a stunning exposition of Larry Rivers’s work, he shows how Rivers incorporated gossip into his paintings, just as his friend and lover Frank O’Hara worked it into his poetry. He describes how the stories about Andy Warhol being too “swish” to be taken seriously as an artist changed following his breakthrough success, reconstructing him as an asexual dandy. Butt also speculates on the meanings surrounding a MoMA curator’s refusal in 1958 to buy Jasper Johns’s Target with Plaster Casts on the grounds that it was too scandalous for the museum to acquire. Between You and Me sheds new light on a pivotal moment in American cultural production as it signals new directions for art history.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822387053
    Publication Date: 2005-08-30
    contrib-author: Gavin Butt
    copyright-year: 2005
    eisbn: 9780822387053
    illustrations-note: 48 photos (incl. 4 in color)
    isbn-cloth: 9780822334866
    isbn-paper: 9780822334989
    short-abstract:

    A reconsideration of queer American art culture of the mid-twentieth century.

    subtitle: Queer Disclosures in the New York Art World, 1948–1963
  • Beyond a Boundary
    Author(s): James, C. L. R.
    Abstract:

    This new edition of C. L. R. James's classic Beyond a Boundary celebrates the fiftieth anniversary of one of the greatest books on sport and culture ever written.

    Named one of the Top 50 Sports Books of All Time by Sports Illustrated

    "Beyond a Boundary . . . should find its place on the team with Izaak Walton, Ivan Turgenev, A. J. Liebling, and Ernest Hemingway."—Derek Walcott, The New York Times Book Review

    "As a player, James the writer was able to see in cricket a metaphor for art and politics, the collective experience providing a focus for group effort and individual performance. . . . [In] his scintillating memoir of his life in cricket, Beyond a Boundary (1963), James devoted some of his finest pages to this theme."—Edward Said, The Washington Post

    "A work of double reverence—for the resilient, elegant ritualism of cricket and for the black people of the world."—Whitney Balliett, The New Yorker

    "Beyond a Boundary isa book of remarkable richness and force, which vastly expands our understanding of sports as an element of popular culture in the Western and colonial world."—Mark Naison, The Nation

    "Everything James has done has had the mark of originality, of his own flexible, sensitive, and deeply cultured intelligence. He conveys not a rigid doctrine but a delight and curiosity in all the manifestations of life, and the clue to everything lies in his proper appreciation of the game of cricket."—E. P. Thompson, author of The Making of the English Working Class

    "Beyond a Boundary is . . . first and foremost an autobiography of a living legend—probably the greatest social theorist of our times."—Manning Marable, Journal of Sport & Social Issues

    "The great triumph of Beyond a Boundary is its ability to rise above genre and in its very form explore the complex nature of colonial West Indian society."—Caryl Phillips, The New Republic

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822376255
    Publication Date: 2013-07-31
    contrib-author: C. L. R. James
    copyright-year: 2013
    eisbn: 9780822376255
    isbn-paper: 9780822355632
    series: The C. L. R. James Archives
    short-abstract:

    This new edition of C. L. R. James's classic Beyond a Boundary celebrates the fiftieth anniversary of one of the greatest books about sport and culture ever written.

    subtitle: 50th Anniversary Edition
  • Beyond Belief
    Author(s): Roy, Srirupa; Adams, Julia; Steinmetz, George
    Abstract:

    Beyond Belief is a bold rethinking of the formation and consolidation of nation-state ideologies. Analyzing India during the first two decades following its foundation as a sovereign nation-state in 1947, Srirupa Roy explores how nationalists are turned into nationals, subjects into citizens, and the colonial state into a sovereign nation-state. Roy argues that the postcolonial nation-state is consolidated not, as many have asserted, by efforts to imagine a shared cultural community, but rather by the production of a recognizable and authoritative identity for the state. This project—of making the state the entity identified as the nation’s authoritative representative—emphasizes the natural cultural diversity of the nation and upholds the state as the sole unifier or manager of the “naturally” fragmented nation; the state is unified through diversity.

    Roy considers several different ways that identification with the Indian nation-state was produced and consolidated during the 1950s and 1960s. She looks at how the Films Division of India, a state-owned documentary and newsreel production agency, allowed national audiences to “see the state”; how the “unity in diversity” formation of nationhood was reinforced in commemorations of India’s annual Republic Day; and how the government produced a policy discourse claiming that scientific development was the ultimate national need and the most pressing priority for the state to address. She also analyzes the fate of the steel towns—industrial townships built to house the workers of nationalized steel plants—which were upheld as the exemplary national spaces of the new India. By prioritizing the role of actual manifestations of and encounters with the state, Roy moves beyond theories of nationalism and state formation based on collective belief.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822389910
    Publication Date: 2007-05-07
    contrib-author: Srirupa Roy
    contrib-series-editor: Julia Adams; George Steinmetz
    copyright-year: 2007
    eisbn: 9780822389910
    illustrations-note: 9 illustrations
    isbn-cloth: 9780822339847
    isbn-paper: 9780822340010
    series: Politics, History, and Culture
    short-abstract:

    Examines the formation of the nation-state in postcolonial India, how it worked to create an identity for itself, to what extent it succeeded, and what may be the prospects for unity in a widely diverse country.

    subtitle: India and the Politics of Postcolonial Nationalism
  • Beyond Biopolitics
    Author(s): Clough, Patricia Ticineto; Willse, Craig
    Abstract:

    Under the auspices of neoliberalism, technical systems of compliance and efficiency have come to underwrite the relations among the state, the economy, and a biopolitics of war, terror, and surveillance. In Beyond Biopolitics, prominent theorists seek to account for and critically engage the tendencies that have informed neoliberal governance in the past and are expressed in its reformulation today. As studies of military occupation, the policing of migration, blood trades, financial markets, the war on terror, media ecologies, and consumer branding, the essays explore the governance of life and death in a near-future, a present emptied of future potentialities. The contributors delve into political and theoretical matters central to projects of neoliberal governance, including states of exception that are not exceptional but foundational; risk analysis applied to the adjudication of “ethical” forms of war, terror, and occupation; racism and the management of the life capacities of populations; the production and circulation of death as political and economic currency; and the potential for critical and aesthetic response. Together, the essays offer ways to conceptualize biopolitics as the ground for today’s reformulation of governance.

    Contributors. Ann Anagnost, Una Chung, Patricia Ticineto Clough, Steve Goodman, Sora Y. Han, Stefano Harney, May Joseph, Randy Martin, Brian Massumi, Luciana Parisi, Jasbir Puar, Amit S. Rai, Eugene Thacker, Çağatay Topal, Craig Willse

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822394235
    Publication Date: 2011-10-01
    contrib-editor: Patricia Ticineto Clough; Craig Willse
    copyright-year: 2011
    eisbn: 9780822394235
    illustrations-note: 12 illustrations
    isbn-cloth: 9780822350033
    isbn-paper: 9780822350170
    short-abstract:

    Interdisciplinary collection of essays on the techniques of governance and economy that are used to organize populations around questions of life and death.

    subtitle: Essays on the Governance of Life and Death
  • Beyond Exoticism
    Author(s): Taylor, Timothy D.; McGovern, Charles; Radano, Ronald
    Abstract:

    In Beyond Exoticism, Timothy D. Taylor considers how western cultures’ understandings of racial, ethnic, and cultural differences have been incorporated into music from early operas to contemporary television advertisements, arguing that the commonly used term “exoticism” glosses over such differences in many studies of western music. Beyond Exoticism encompasses a range of musical genres and musicians, including Mozart, Beethoven, Jean-Philippe Rameau, Maurice Ravel, Charles Ives, Henry Cowell, Bally Sagoo, and Bill Laswell as well as opera, symphony, country music, and “world music.” Yet, more than anything else, it is an argument for expanding the purview of musicology to take into account not only composers’ lives and the formal properties of the music they produce but also the larger historical and cultural forces shaping both music and our understanding of it.

    Beginning with a focus on musical manifestations of colonialism and imperialism, Taylor discusses how the “discovery” of the New World and the development of an understanding of self as distinct from the other, of “here” as different from “there,” was implicated in the development of tonality, a musical system which effectively creates centers and margins. He describes how musical practices signifying nonwestern peoples entered the western European musical vocabulary and how Darwinian thought shaped the cultural conditions of early-twentieth-century music. In the era of globalization, new communication technologies and the explosion of marketing and consumption have accelerated the production and circulation of tropes of otherness. Considering western music produced under rubrics including multiculturalism, collaboration, hybridity, and world music, Taylor scrutinizes contemporary representations of difference. He argues that musical interpretations of the nonwestern other developed hundreds of years ago have not necessarily been discarded; rather they have been recycled and retooled.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822389972
    Publication Date: 2007-02-12
    contrib-author: Timothy D. Taylor
    contrib-series-editor: Charles McGovern; Ronald Radano
    copyright-year: 2007
    eisbn: 9780822389972
    illustrations-note: 16 illustrations, 3 tables, 5 figures
    isbn-cloth: 9780822339571
    isbn-paper: 9780822339687
    series: Refiguring American Music
    short-abstract:

    Study of how systems of power and domination have shaped representations of otherness in music.

    subtitle: Western Music and the World
  • Beyond Lines of Control
    Author(s): Aggarwal, Ravina
    Abstract:

    The Kashmir conflict, the ongoing border dispute between India and Pakistan, has sparked four wars and cost thousands of lives. In this innovative ethnography, Ravina Aggarwal moves beyond conventional understandings of the conflict—which tend to emphasize geopolitical security concerns and religious essentialisms—to consider how it is experienced by those living in the border zones along the Line of Control, the 435-mile boundary separating India from Pakistan. She focuses on Ladakh, the largest region in northern India’s State of Jammu and Kashmir. Located high in the Himalayan and Korakoram ranges, Ladakh borders Pakistan to the west and Tibet to the east. Revealing how the shadow of war affects the lives of Buddhist and Muslim communities in Ladakh, Beyond Lines of Control is an impassioned call for the inclusion of the region’s cultural history and politics in discussions about the status of Kashmir.

    Aggarwal brings the insights of performance studies and the growing field of the anthropology of international borders to bear on her extensive fieldwork in Ladakh. She examines how social and religious boundaries are created on the Ladakhi frontier, how they are influenced by directives of the nation-state, and how they are shaped into political struggles for regional control that are legitimized through discourses of religious purity, patriotism, and development. She demonstrates in lively detail the ways that these struggles are enacted in particular cultural performances such as national holidays, festivals, rites of passage ceremonies, films, and archery games. By placing cultural performances and political movements in Ladakh center stage, Aggarwal rewrites the standard plot of nation and border along the Line of Control.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822385899
    Publication Date: 2004-11-09
    contrib-author: Ravina Aggarwal
    copyright-year: 2004
    eisbn: 9780822385899
    illustrations-note: 29 illustrations, 1 map
    isbn-cloth: 9780822334286
    isbn-paper: 9780822334149
    short-abstract:

    A historical and ethnographic account of a region located on the border of India and Pakistan; the people who live there engage with the specter of war and religious conflict, racial identity, and the processes of modernity through varying performative mo

    subtitle: Performance and Politics on the Disputed Borders of Ladakh, India
  • Beyond Repair?
    Author(s): Garvey, Stephen P.; Devins, Neal; Graber, Mark A.; Gross, Samuel R.; Ellsworth, Phoebe C.
    Abstract:

    Can the death penalty be administered in a just way—without executing the innocent, without regard to race, and without arbitrariness? How does capital punishment in the United States fit with international human rights law? These are among the questions that leading legal scholars and journalists explore in Beyond Repair? All new, the essays in this collection focus on the period since 1976, when the Supreme Court held that capital punishment, in and of itself, does not violate the Constitution. In addition to reflecting on the most recent developments in the law, the contributors draw on empirical research to consider connections between newly available data and modern American death penalty procedures.

    A number of the essays scrutinize thinking about capital punishment. They examine why, following almost two decades of strong public support for the death penalty, public opinion in favor of it has recently begun to decline. Beyond Repair? presents some of the findings of the Capital Jury Project, a nationwide research initiative that has interviewed over one thousand people who served as jurors in capital trials. It looks at what goes through the minds of jurors asked to consider imposing the death penalty, how qualified they are to make such an important decision, and how well they understand the judge’s instructions. Contributors also investigate the risk of executing the innocent, the role that race plays in determining which defendants are sentenced to death, and the effect of expanded restrictions on access to federal appellate relief. The postscript contemplates the peculiarities of our contemporary system of capital punishment, including the alarming variance in execution rates from state to state.

    Filled with current insights and analysis, Beyond Repair? will provide valuable information to attorneys, political scientists, criminologists, and all those wanting to participate knowledgeably in the debates about the death penalty in America.

    Contributors. Ken Armstrong, John H. Blume, Theodore Eisenberg, Phoebe C. Ellsworth, Stephen P. Garvey, Samuel R. Gross, Sheri Lynn Johnson, Steve Mills, William A. Schabas, Larry W. Yackle, Franklin E. Zimring

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822384038
    Publication Date: 2002-11-01
    contrib-editor: Stephen P. Garvey
    contrib-other: Samuel R. Gross; Phoebe C. Ellsworth
    contrib-series-editor: Neal Devins; Mark A. Graber
    copyright-year: 2003
    eisbn: 9780822384038
    isbn-cloth: 9780822329602
    isbn-paper: 9780822330431
    series: Constitutional Conflicts
    short-abstract:

    Essays offer a new challenge to the death penalty's legitimacy, in light of new empirical research and case studies, and against the backdrop of international law and recent changes in U.S. domestic law.

    subtitle: America’s Death Penalty
  • Beyond Shangri-La
    Author(s): Knaus, John Kenneth
    Abstract:

    Beyond Shangri-La chronicles relations between the Tibetans and the United States since 1908, when a Dalai Lama first met with U.S. representatives. What was initially a distant alliance became more intimate and entangled in the late 1950s, when the Tibetan people launched an armed resistance movement against the Chinese occupiers. The Tibetans fought to oust the Chinese and to maintain the presence of the current Dalai Lama and his direction of their country. In 1958, John Kenneth Knaus volunteered to serve in a major CIA program to support the Tibetans. For the next seven years, as an operations officer working from India, from Colorado, and from Washington, D.C., he cooperated with the Tibetan rebels as they utilized American assistance to contest Chinese domination and to attain international recognition as an independent entity.

    Since the late 1950s, the rugged resolve of the Dalai Lama and his people and the growing respect for their efforts to free their homeland from Chinese occupation have made Tibet's political and cultural status a pressing issue in international affairs. So has the realization by nations, including the United States, that their geopolitical interests would best be served by the defeat of the Chinese and the achievement of Tibetan self-determination. Beyond Shangri-La provides unique insight into the efforts of the U.S. government and committed U.S. citizens to support a free Tibet.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822395300
    Publication Date: 2012-11-19
    contrib-author: John Kenneth Knaus
    copyright-year: 2012
    eisbn: 9780822395300
    illustrations-note: 22 illustrations, 1 map
    isbn-cloth: 9780822352198
    isbn-paper: 9780822352341
    series: American encounters/global interactions
    short-abstract:

    In Beyond Shandri-La, a former CIA officer provides unique insight into the efforts of the U.S. government and committed U.S. citizens to support a free Tibet.

    subtitle: America and Tibet's Move into the Twenty-First Century
  • Beyond the Color Line and the Iron Curtain
    Author(s): Baldwin, Kate A.; Pease, Donald E.
    Abstract:

    Examining the significant influence of the Soviet Union on the work of four major African American authors—and on twentieth-century American debates about race—Beyond the Color Line and the Iron Curtain remaps black modernism, revealing the importance of the Soviet experience in the formation of a black transnationalism.

    Langston Hughes, W. E. B. Du Bois, Claude McKay, and Paul Robeson each lived or traveled extensively in the Soviet Union between the 1920s and the 1960s, and each reflected on Communism and Soviet life in works that have been largely unavailable, overlooked, or understudied. Kate A. Baldwin takes up these writings, as well as considerable material from Soviet sources—including articles in Pravda and Ogonek, political cartoons, Russian translations of unpublished manuscripts now lost, and mistranslations of major texts—to consider how these writers influenced and were influenced by both Soviet and American culture. Her work demonstrates how the construction of a new Soviet citizen attracted African Americans to the Soviet Union, where they could explore a national identity putatively free of class, gender, and racial biases. While Hughes and McKay later renounced their affiliations with the Soviet Union, Baldwin shows how, in different ways, both Hughes and McKay, as well as Du Bois and Robeson, used their encounters with the U. S. S. R. and Soviet models to rethink the exclusionary practices of citizenship and national belonging in the United States, and to move toward an internationalism that was a dynamic mix of antiracism, anticolonialism, social democracy, and international socialism.

    Recovering what Baldwin terms the "Soviet archive of Black America," this book forces a rereading of some of the most important African American writers and of the transnational circuits of black modernism.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822383833
    Publication Date: 2002-09-26
    contrib-author: Kate A. Baldwin
    contrib-series-editor: Donald E. Pease
    copyright-year: 2002
    eisbn: 9780822383833
    illustrations-note: 19 b&w photos
    isbn-cloth: 9780822329763
    isbn-paper: 9780822329909
    series: New Americanists
    short-abstract:

    Re-examines the relations between African Americans and the Soviet Union from a more transnational perspective and shows how these relations were crucial in the formation of Black modernism.

    subtitle: Reading Encounters between Black and Red, 1922–1963
  • Beyond the Lettered City
    Author(s): Rappaport, Joanne; Cummins, Tom
    Abstract:

    In Beyond the Lettered City, the anthropologist Joanne Rappaport and the art historian Tom Cummins examine the colonial imposition of alphabetic and visual literacy on indigenous groups in the northern Andes. They consider how the Andean peoples received, maintained, and subverted the conventions of Spanish literacy, often combining them with their own traditions. Indigenous Andean communities neither used narrative pictorial representation nor had alphabetic or hieroglyphic literacy before the arrival of the Spaniards. To absorb the conventions of Spanish literacy, they had to engage with European symbolic systems. Doing so altered their worldviews and everyday lives, making alphabetic and visual literacy prime tools of colonial domination. Rappaport and Cummins advocate a broad understanding of literacy, including not only reading and writing, but also interpretations of the spoken word, paintings, wax seals, gestures, and urban design. By analyzing secular and religious notarial manuals and dictionaries, urban architecture, religious images, catechisms and sermons, and the vast corpus of administrative documents produced by the colonial authorities and indigenous scribes, they expand Ángel Rama’s concept of the lettered city to encompass many of those who previously would have been considered the least literate.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822394754
    Publication Date: 2011-12-30
    contrib-author: Joanne Rappaport; Tom Cummins
    copyright-year: 2012
    eisbn: 9780822394754
    illustrations-note: 58 b&w illustrations, 2 charts, 9 color plates
    isbn-cloth: 9780822351160
    isbn-paper: 9780822351283
    series: Narrating native histories
    short-abstract:

    This book extends the conception of literacy beyond the written word to incorporate the visual. Focusing on the period of colonization in the Andean region the authors argue that the European cultural literacy that they imposed on the indigenous population was not just a tool for oppression and control but was used by the local people as a means to assert their own cultural identity.

    subtitle: Indigenous Literacies in the Andes
  • Beyond the Sacred Forest
    Author(s): Dove, Michael R.; Sajise, Percy E.; Doolittle, Amity A.; Escobar, Arturo; Rocheleau, Dianne
    Abstract:

    Reflecting new thinking about conservation in Southeast Asia, Beyond the Sacred Forest is the product of a unique, decade-long, interdisciplinary collaboration involving research in Indonesia, Malaysia, and the Philippines. Scholars from these countries and the United States rethink the translation of environmental concepts between East and West, particularly ideas of nature and culture; the meaning of conservation; and the ways that conservation policy is applied and transformed in the everyday landscapes of Southeast Asia. The contributors focus more on folk, community, and vernacular conservation discourses than on those of formal institutions and the state. They reject the notion that conservation only takes place in bounded, static, otherworldly spaces such as protected areas or sacred forests. Thick with ethnographic detail, their essays move beyond the forest to agriculture and other land uses, leave behind orthodox notions of the sacred, discard outdated ideas of environmental harmony and stasis, and reject views of the environment that seek to avoid or escape politics. Natural-resource managers and policymakers who work with this more complicated vision of nature and culture are likely to enjoy more enduring success than those who simply seek to remove the influence and impact of humans from conserved landscapes. As many of the essays suggest, this requires the ability to manage contradictions, to relinquish orthodox ideas of what conservation looks like, and to practice continuously adaptive management techniques.

    Contributors. Upik Djalins, Amity A. Doolittle, Michael R. Dove, Levita Duhaylungsod, Emily E. Harwell, Jeyamalar Kathirithamby-Wells, Lye Tuck-Po, Percy E. Sajise, Endah Sulistyawati, Yunita T. Winarto

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822393078
    Publication Date: 2011-03-24
    contrib-editor: Michael R. Dove; Percy E. Sajise; Amity A. Doolittle
    contrib-series-editor: Arturo Escobar; Dianne Rocheleau
    copyright-year: 2011
    eisbn: 9780822393078
    illustrations-note: 7 tables, 10 maps, 11 figures
    isbn-cloth: 9780822347811
    isbn-paper: 9780822347965
    series: New ecologies for the twenty-first century
    short-abstract:

    Scholars rethink the translation of environmental concepts between East and West, particularly ideas of nature and culture; what conservation might mean; and how conservation policy is applied and transformed in the everyday landscapes of Southeast Asia.

    subtitle: Complicating Conservation in Southeast Asia
  • Bhangra and Asian Underground
    Author(s): Bakrania, Falu
    Abstract:

    Asian Underground music—a fusion of South Asian genres with western breakbeats created for the dance club scene by DJs and musicians of Indian, Pakistani, and Bangladeshi descent—went mainstream in the U.K. in the late 1990s. Its success was unprecedented: British bhangra, a blend of Punjabi folk music with hip-hop musical elements, was enormously popular among South Asian communities but had yet to become mainstream. For many, the widespread attention to Asian Underground music signaled the emergence of a supposedly new, tolerant, and multicultural Britain that could finally accept South Asians. Interweaving ethnography and theory, Falu Bakrania examines the social life of British Asian musical culture to reveal a more complex and contradictory story of South Asian belonging in Britain. Analyzing the production of bhangra and Asian Underground music by male artists and its consumption by female club-goers, Bakrania shows that gender, sexuality, and class intersected in ways that profoundly shaped how young people interpreted “British” and “Asian” identity and negotiated, sometimes violently, contests about ethnic authenticity, sexual morality, individual expression, and political empowerment.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822395645
    Publication Date: 2013-09-06
    contrib-author: Falu Bakrania
    copyright-year: 2013
    eisbn: 9780822395645
    illustrations-note: 15 photographs
    isbn-cloth: 9780822353010
    isbn-paper: 9780822353171
    short-abstract:

    Through their production and consumption of bhangra and Asian Underground music in the late 1990s, British Asian youth constructed masculinities and femininities with profoundly uneven implications for ethnic, racial, and national belonging.

    subtitle: South Asian Music and the Politics of Belonging in Britain
  • Big Ears
    Author(s): Rustin, Nichole T.; Tucker, Sherrie; Radano, Ronald; Kun, Josh
    Abstract:

    In jazz circles, players and listeners with “big ears” hear and engage complexity in the moment, as it unfolds. Taking gender as part of the intricate, unpredictable action in jazz culture, this interdisciplinary collection explores the terrain opened up by listening, with big ears, for gender in jazz. Essays range from a reflection on the female boogie-woogie pianists who played at Café Society in New York during the 1930s and 1940s to interpretations of how the jazzman is represented in Dorothy Baker’s novel Young Man with a Horn (1938) and Michael Curtiz’s film adaptation (1950). Taken together, the essays enrich the field of jazz studies by showing how gender dynamics have shaped the production, reception, and criticism of jazz culture.

    Scholars of music, ethnomusicology, American studies, literature, anthropology, and cultural studies approach the question of gender in jazz from multiple perspectives. One contributor scrutinizes the tendency of jazz historiography to treat singing as subordinate to the predominantly male domain of instrumental music, while another reflects on her doubly inappropriate position as a female trumpet player and a white jazz musician and scholar. Other essays explore the composer George Russell’s Lydian Chromatic Concept as a critique of mid-twentieth-century discourses of embodiment, madness, and black masculinity; performances of “female hysteria” by Les Diaboliques, a feminist improvising trio; and the BBC radio broadcasts of Ivy Benson and Her Ladies’ Dance Orchestra during the Second World War. By incorporating gender analysis into jazz studies, Big Ears transforms ideas of who counts as a subject of study and even of what counts as jazz.

    Contributors: Christina Baade, Jayna Brown, Farah Jasmine Griffin, Monica Hairston, Kristin McGee, Tracy McMullen, Ingrid Monson, Lara Pellegrinelli, Eric Porter, Nichole T. Rustin, Ursel Schlicht, Julie Dawn Smith, Jeffrey Taylor, Sherrie Tucker, João H. Costa Vargas

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822389224
    Publication Date: 2010-07-01
    contrib-editor: Nichole T. Rustin; Sherrie Tucker
    contrib-series-editor: Ronald Radano; Josh Kun
    copyright-year: 2008
    eisbn: 9780822389224
    illustrations-note: 19 photographs, 1 table, 4 figures
    isbn-cloth: 9780822343363
    isbn-paper: 9780822343202
    series: Refiguring American Music
    short-abstract:

    Collection of essays on the role of gender in jazz studies.

    subtitle: Listening for Gender in Jazz Studies
  • Bilingual Aesthetics
    Author(s): Sommer, Doris; Gaonkar, Dilip Parameshwar; Kramer, Jane; Lee, Benjamin; Warner, Michael
    Abstract:

    Knowing a second language entails some unease; it requires a willingness to make mistakes and work through misunderstandings. The renowned literary scholar Doris Sommer argues that feeling funny is good for you, and for society. In Bilingual Aesthetics Sommer invites readers to make mischief with meaning, to play games with language, and to allow errors to stimulate new ways of thinking. Today’s global world has outgrown any one-to-one correlation between a people and a language; liberal democracies can either encourage difference or stifle it through exclusionary policies. Bilingual Aesthetics is Sommer’s passionate call for citizens and officials to cultivate difference and to realize that the precarious points of contact resulting from mismatches between languages, codes, and cultures are the lifeblood of democracy, as well as the stimulus for aesthetics and philosophy.

    Sommer encourages readers to entertain the creative possibilities inherent in multilingualism. With her characteristic wit and love of language, she focuses on humor—particularly bilingual jokes—as the place where tensions between and within cultures are played out. She draws on thinking about humor and language by a range of philosophers and others, including Sigmund Freud, Immanuel Kant, Ludwig Wittgenstein, Hannah Arendt, and Mikhail Bakhtin. In declaring the merits of allowing for crossed signals, Sommer sends a clear message: Making room for more than one language is about value added, not about remediation. It is an expression of love for a contingent and changing world.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822385790
    Publication Date: 2004-03-17
    contrib-author: Doris Sommer
    contrib-series-editor: Dilip Parameshwar Gaonkar; Jane Kramer; Benjamin Lee; Michael Warner
    copyright-year: 2004
    eisbn: 9780822385790
    isbn-cloth: 9780822333326
    isbn-paper: 9780822333449
    series: Public planet books
    short-abstract:

    An analysis of the changing status of bi- and multi-lingualness in relation to issues of citizenship, ethnicity, and diversity.

    subtitle: A New Sentimental Education
  • Biocapital
    Author(s): Sunder Rajan, Kaushik
    Abstract:

    Biocapital is a major theoretical contribution to science studies and political economy. Grounding his analysis in a multi-sited ethnography of genomic research and drug development marketplaces in the United States and India, Kaushik Sunder Rajan argues that contemporary biotechnologies such as genomics can only be understood in relation to the economic markets within which they emerge. Sunder Rajan conducted fieldwork in biotechnology labs and in small start-up companies in the United States (mostly in the San Francisco Bay area) and India (mainly in New Delhi, Hyderabad, and Bombay) over a five-year period spanning 1999 to 2004. He draws on his research with scientists, entrepreneurs, venture capitalists, and policymakers to compare drug development in the two countries, examining the practices and goals of research, the financing mechanisms, the relevant government regulations, and the hype and marketing surrounding promising new technologies. In the process, he illuminates the global flow of ideas, information, capital, and people connected to biotech initiatives.

    Sunder Rajan’s ethnography informs his theoretically sophisticated inquiry into how the contemporary world is shaped by the marriage of biotechnology and market forces, by what he calls technoscientific capitalism. Bringing Marxian theories of value into conversation with Foucaultian notions of biopolitics, he traces how the life sciences came to be significant producers of both economic and epistemic value in the late twentieth century and early twenty-first.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822388005
    Publication Date: 2006-04-03
    contrib-author: Kaushik Sunder Rajan
    copyright-year: 2006
    eisbn: 9780822388005
    isbn-cloth: 9780822337089
    isbn-paper: 9780822337201
    short-abstract:

    An ethnography about the work of genome scientists, entrepreneurs, and policy makers in biotech drug development in the United States and India.

    subtitle: The Constitution of Postgenomic Life
  • Biological Relatives
    Author(s): Franklin, Sarah B.
    Abstract:

    Thirty-five years after its initial success as a form of technologically assisted human reproduction, and five million miracle babies later, in vitro fertilization (IVF) has become a routine procedure worldwide. In Biological Relatives, Sarah Franklin explores how the normalization of IVF has changed how both technology and biology are understood. Drawing on anthropology, feminist theory, and science studies, Franklin charts the evolution of IVF from an experimental research technique into a global technological platform used for a wide variety of applications, including genetic diagnosis, livestock breeding, cloning, and stem cell research. She contends that despite its ubiquity, IVF remains a highly paradoxical technology that confirms the relative and contingent nature of biology while creating new biological relatives. Using IVF as a lens, Franklin presents a bold and lucid thesis linking technologies of gender and sex to reproductive biomedicine, contemporary bioinnovation, and the future of kinship.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822378259
    Publication Date: 2013-10-16
    contrib-author: Sarah B. Franklin
    copyright-year: 2013
    eisbn: 9780822378259
    illustrations-note: 30 illustrations, 1 table
    isbn-cloth: 9780822354857
    isbn-paper: 9780822354994
    series: Experimental Futures
    short-abstract:

    Sarah Franklin explores the history and future of in vitro fertilization (IVF) thirty-five years and five million babies after its initial success as a form of technologically-assisted human reproduction.

    subtitle: IVF, Stem Cells, and the Future of Kinship
  • Biomedicalization
    Author(s): Clarke, Adele E.; Mamo, Laura; Fosket, Jennifer Ruth; Fishman, Jennifer R.; Shim, Janet K.; Riska, Elianne
    Abstract:

    The rise of Western scientific medicine fully established the medical sector of the U.S. political economy by the end of the Second World War, the first “social transformation of American medicine.” Then, in an ongoing process called medicalization, the jurisdiction of medicine began expanding, redefining certain areas once deemed moral, social, or legal problems (such as alcoholism, drug addiction, and obesity) as medical problems. The editors of this important collection argue that since the mid-1980s, dramatic, and especially technoscientific, changes in the constitution, organization, and practices of contemporary biomedicine have coalesced into biomedicalization, the second major transformation of American medicine. This volume offers in-depth analyses and case studies along with the groundbreaking essay in which the editors first elaborated their theory of biomedicalization.

    Contributors. Natalie Boero, Adele E. Clarke, Jennifer R. Fishman, Jennifer Ruth Fosket, Kelly Joyce, Jonathan Kahn, Laura Mamo, Jackie Orr, Elianne Riska, Janet K. Shim, Sara Shostak

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822391258
    Publication Date: 2009-01-01
    contrib-editor: Adele E. Clarke; Laura Mamo; Jennifer Ruth Fosket; Jennifer R. Fishman; Janet K. Shim
    contrib-other: Elianne Riska
    copyright-year: 2010
    eisbn: 9780822391258
    illustrations-note: 21 photographs, 3 tables, 4 figures
    isbn-cloth: 9780822345534
    isbn-paper: 9780822345701
    short-abstract:

    Essays describing how dramatic, and especially technoscientific, changes in the constitution, organization, and practices of contemporary biomedicine have coalesced since the mid-1980s in biomedicalization, the second transformation of American medicine.

    subtitle: Technoscience, Health, and Illness in the U.S.
  • Birds of Fire
    Author(s): Fellezs, Kevin
    Abstract:

    Birds of Fire brings overdue critical attention to fusion, a musical idiom that emerged as young musicians blended elements of jazz, rock, and funk in the late 1960s and 1970s. At the time, fusion was disparaged by jazz writers and ignored by rock critics. In the years since, it has come to be seen as a commercially driven jazz substyle. Fusion never did coalesce into a genre. In Birds of Fire, Kevin Fellezs contends that hybridity was its reason for being. By mixing different musical and cultural traditions, fusion artists sought to disrupt generic boundaries, cultural hierarchies, and critical assumptions. Interpreting the work of four distinctive fusion artists—Tony Williams, John McLaughlin, Joni Mitchell, and Herbie Hancock—Fellezs highlights the ways that they challenged convention in the 1960s and 1970s. He also considers the extent to which a musician can be taken seriously as an artist across divergent musical traditions. Birds of Fire concludes with a look at the current activities of McLaughlin, Mitchell, and Hancock; Williams’s final recordings; and the legacy of the fusion music made by these four pioneering artists.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822394389
    Publication Date: 2011-07-18
    contrib-author: Kevin Fellezs
    copyright-year: 2011
    eisbn: 9780822394389
    illustrations-note: 9 illustrations
    isbn-cloth: 9780822350309
    isbn-paper: 9780822350477
    series: Refiguring American music
    short-abstract:

    An analysis of the emergence, reception, and legacy of fusion, experimental music that emerged in the late 1960s and 1970s as musicians combined jazz, rock, and funk in new ways.

    subtitle: Jazz, Rock, Funk, and the Creation of Fusion
  • Black and Blue
    Author(s): Mavor, Carol
    Abstract:

    Audacious and genre-defying, Black and Blue is steeped in melancholy, in the feeling of being blue, or, rather, black and blue, with all the literality of bruised flesh. Roland Barthes and Marcel Proust are inspirations for and subjects of Carol Mavor's exquisite, image-filled rumination on efforts to capture fleeting moments and to comprehend the incomprehensible. At the book's heart are one book and three films—Roland Barthes's Camera Lucida, Chris Marker's La Jetée and Sans soleil, and Marguerite Duras's and Alain Resnais's Hiroshima mon amour—postwar French works that register disturbing truths about loss and regret, and violence and history, through aesthetic refinement.

    Personal recollections punctuate Mavor's dazzling interpretations of these and many other works of art and criticism. Childhood memories become Proust's "small-scale contrivances," tiny sensations that open onto panoramas. Mavor's mother lost her memory to Alzheimer's, and Black and Blue is framed by the author's memories of her mother and effort to understand what it means to not be recognized by one to whom you were once so known.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822395461
    Publication Date: 2012-09-01
    contrib-author: Carol Mavor
    copyright-year: 2012
    eisbn: 9780822395461
    illustrations-note: 113 illustrations, including 18 in color
    isbn-cloth: 9780822352525
    isbn-paper: 9780822352716
    short-abstract:

    Postwar French works that register disturbing truths about loss and regret, and violence and history, through aesthetic refinement anchor this exquisite, image-filled rumination on efforts to capture fleeting moments and comprehend the incomprehensible.

    subtitle: The Bruising Passion of Camera Lucida, La Jetée, Sans soleil, and Hiroshima mon amour
  • Black and Green
    Author(s): Asher, Kiran
    Abstract:

    In Black and Green, Kiran Asher provides a powerful framework for reconceptualizing the relationship between neoliberal development and social movements. Moving beyond the notion that development is a hegemonic, homogenizing force that victimizes local communities, Asher argues that development processes and social movements shape each other in uneven and paradoxical ways. She bases her argument on ethnographic analysis of the black social movements that emerged from and interacted with political and economic changes in Colombia’s Pacific lowlands, or Chocó region, in the 1990s.

    The Pacific region had yet to be overrun by drug traffickers, guerrillas, and paramilitary forces in the early 1990s. It was better known as the largest area of black culture in the country (90 percent of the region’s population is Afro-Colombian) and as a supplier of natural resources, including timber, gold, platinum, and silver. Colombia’s Law 70, passed in 1993, promised ethnic and cultural rights, collective land ownership, and socioeconomic development to Afro-Colombian communities. At the same time that various constituencies sought to interpret and implement Law 70, the state was moving ahead with large-scale development initiatives intended to modernize the economically backward coastal lowlands. Meanwhile national and international conservation organizations were attempting to protect the region’s rich biodiversity. Asher explores this juxtaposition of black rights, economic development, and conservation—and the tensions it catalyzed. She analyzes the meanings attached to “culture,” “nature,” and “development” by the Colombian state and Afro-Colombian social movements, including women’s groups. In so doing, she shows that the appropriation of development and conservation discourses by the social movements had a paradoxical effect. It legitimized the presence of state, development, and conservation agencies in the Pacific region even as it influenced those agencies’ visions and plans.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822390879
    Publication Date: 2009-07-20
    contrib-author: Kiran Asher
    copyright-year: 2009
    eisbn: 9780822390879
    illustrations-note: 13 photographs, 1 table, 2 maps
    isbn-cloth: 9780822344872
    isbn-paper: 9780822344834
    short-abstract:

    Looks at development of Afro-Colombian communities after passage of a 1991 law granting cultural rights and collective land ownership to the communities, arguing that social movements are often partially co-opted by market or state, but then use state res

    subtitle: Afro-Colombians, Development, and Nature in the Pacific Lowlands
  • Black Arts West
    Author(s): Widener, Daniel
    Abstract:

    From postwar efforts to end discrimination in the motion-picture industry, recording studios, and musicians’ unions, through the development of community-based arts organizations, to the creation of searing films critiquing conditions in the black working class neighborhoods of a city touting its multiculturalism—Black Arts West documents the social and political significance of African American arts activity in Los Angeles between the Second World War and the riots of 1992. Focusing on the lives and work of black writers, visual artists, musicians, and filmmakers, Daniel Widener tells how black cultural politics changed over time, and how altered political realities generated new forms of artistic and cultural expression. His narrative is filled with figures invested in the politics of black art and culture in postwar Los Angeles, including not only African American artists but also black nationalists, affluent liberal whites, elected officials, and federal bureaucrats.

    Along with the politicization of black culture, Widener explores the rise of a distinctive regional Black Arts Movement. Originating in the efforts of wartime cultural activists, the movement was rooted in the black working class and characterized by struggles for artistic autonomy and improved living and working conditions for local black artists. As new ideas concerning art, racial identity, and the institutional position of African American artists emerged, dozens of new collectives appeared, from the Watts Writers Workshop, to the Inner City Cultural Center, to the New Art Jazz Ensemble. Spread across generations of artists, the Black Arts Movement in Southern California was more than the artistic affiliate of the local civil-rights or black-power efforts: it was a social movement itself. Illuminating the fundamental connections between expressive culture and political struggle, Black Arts West is a major contribution to the histories of Los Angeles, black radicalism, and avant-garde art.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822392620
    Publication Date: 2009-01-01
    contrib-author: Daniel Widener
    copyright-year: 2010
    eisbn: 9780822392620
    illustrations-note: 48 illustrations
    isbn-cloth: 9780822346678
    isbn-paper: 9780822346791
    short-abstract:

    A social and cultural history of African American arts activity in Los Angeles between the Second World War and the 1992 riots.

    subtitle: Culture and Struggle in Postwar Los Angeles
  • Black Athena Writes Back
    Author(s): Bernal, Martin; Moore, David Chioni
    Abstract:

    In Black Athena Writes Back Martin Bernal responds to the passionate debates set off by the 1987 publication of his book Black Athena. Producing a shock wave of reaction from scholars, Black Athena argued that the development of Greek civilization was heavily influenced by Afroasiatic civilizations. Moreover, Bernal asserted that this knowledge had been deliberately obscured by the rampant racism of nineteenth-century Europeans who could not abide the notion that Greek society—for centuries recognized as the originating culture of Europe—had its origins in Africa and Southwest Asia.

    The subsequent rancor among classicists over Bernal’s theory and accusations was picked up in the popular media, and his suggestion that Greek culture had its origin in Africa was widely derided. In a report on 60 Minutes, for example, it was suggested that Bernal’s hypothesis was essentially an attempt to provide blacks with self-esteem so that they would feel included in the march of progress.

    In Black Athena Writes Back Bernal provides additional documentation to back up his thesis, as well as offering persuasive explanations of why traditional scholarship on the subject remains inaccurate and why specific arguments lobbed against his theories are themselves faulty.

    Black Athena Writes Back requires no prior familiarity with either the Black Athena hypothesis or with the arguments advanced against it. It will be essential reading for those who have been following this long-running debate, as well as for those just discovering this fascinating subject.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822380078
    Publication Date: 2001-08-30
    contrib-author: Martin Bernal
    contrib-editor: David Chioni Moore
    copyright-year: 2001
    eisbn: 9780822380078
    illustrations-note: 15 figures
    isbn-cloth: 9780822327066
    isbn-paper: 9780822327172
    short-abstract:

    This book is Bernal’s response to criticisms to his 1987 book, BLACK ATHENA, which argued for an Afro-Asiatic origin for Greek civilization.

    subtitle: Martin Bernal Responds to His Critics
  • Black behind the Ears
    Author(s): Candelario, Ginetta E. B.
    Abstract:

    Black behind the Ears is an innovative historical and ethnographic examination of Dominican identity formation in the Dominican Republic and the United States. For much of the Dominican Republic’s history, the national body has been defined as “not black,” even as black ancestry has been grudgingly acknowledged. Rejecting simplistic explanations, Ginetta E. B. Candelario suggests that it is not a desire for whiteness that guides Dominican identity discourses and displays. Instead, it is an ideal norm of what it means to be both indigenous to the Republic (indios) and “Hispanic.” Both indigeneity and Hispanicity have operated as vehicles for asserting Dominican sovereignty in the context of the historically triangulated dynamics of Spanish colonialism, Haitian unification efforts, and U.S. imperialism. Candelario shows how the legacy of that history is manifest in contemporary Dominican identity discourses and displays, whether in the national historiography, the national museum’s exhibits, or ideas about women’s beauty. Dominican beauty culture is crucial to efforts to identify as “indios” because, as an easily altered bodily feature, hair texture trumps skin color, facial features, and ancestry in defining Dominicans as indios.

    Candelario draws on her participant observation in a Dominican beauty shop in Washington Heights, a New York City neighborhood with the oldest and largest Dominican community outside the Republic, and on interviews with Dominicans in New York City, Washington, D.C., and Santo Domingo. She also analyzes museum archives and displays in the Museo del Hombre Dominicano and the Smithsonian Institution as well as nineteenth- and early-twentieth-century European and American travel narratives.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822390282
    Publication Date: 2007-11-21
    contrib-author: Ginetta E. B. Candelario
    copyright-year: 2007
    eisbn: 9780822390282
    illustrations-note: 37 b&w photos, 9 tables
    isbn-cloth: 9780822340188
    isbn-paper: 9780822340379
    series: E-Duke books scholarly collection.
    short-abstract:

    An innovative historical and ethnographic examination of Dominican identity formation in the Dominican Republic and the United States.

    subtitle: Dominican Racial Identity from Museums to Beauty Shops
  • Black Business in the New South
    Author(s): Weare, Walter B.
    Abstract:

    At the turn of the century, the North Carolina Mutual Life Insurance Company became the "world's largest Negro business." Located in Durham, North Carolina, which was known as the "Black Wall Street of America," this business came to symbolize the ideas of racial progress, self-help, and solidarity in America. Walter B. Weare's social and intellectual history, originally published in 1973 (University of Illinois Press) and updated here to include a new introduction, still stands as the definitive history of black business in the New South. Drawing on a wide range of sources—including personal papers of the company's leaders and oral history interviews—Weare traces the company's story from its ideological roots in the eighteenth century to its economic success in the twentieth century.

    DOI: 10.1215/9780822381785
    Publication Date: 1993-01-27
    contrib-author: Walter B. Weare